Part A. PRELIMINARY EXAMINATIONS
Part B. TRIPOS EXAMINATIONS
1. The Faculty Boards or other bodies responsible for the teaching for Honours Examinations shall be authorized to hold examinations preliminary to the Tripos with which they are concerned, or to a Part or Section of it, for the purpose of testing the progress of honours students, and their fitness for honours work. The Preliminary Examinations shall not be deemed Honours Examinations of the University.
2. Subject to the powers of the General Board and the Board of Examinations, the Faculty Boards and comparable authorities shall have power to determine the standard, scope, management, and conduct of the Preliminary Examinations with which they are concerned, and shall make special regulations for those examinations, subject to the approval of the General Board. Not later than the end of the Easter Term each year a Notice shall be published giving details of any amendments of the special regulations which have been made by the authorities concerned, to have effect for the examinations to be held in the following year; after the publication of that Notice, no further amendments shall be made of the special regulations for any Preliminary Examination save in exceptional circumstances and by special permission of the General Board. A Faculty Board or other body shall have power to make supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects of the examinations with which they are concerned and to amend or withdraw such regulations as they think fit, provided that due notice is given of any change.
3. The variable subjects for all the Easter Term Preliminary Examinations shall be published by the Faculty Board or other body concerned in the Easter Term next before that in which the examination is held; provided that the Board or other body concerned shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
4. A Faculty Board may prescribe requirements for candidates to take and pass the Preliminary Examination to the corresponding Tripos.
5. No student may take a Preliminary Examination unless he or she has kept one term.
6. The Faculty Boards or other bodies concerned shall nominate such number of Examiners and Assessors as they think fit for each Preliminary Examination, except in so far as the regulations for an examination provide for papers to be the responsibility of the Examiners for a particular Tripos examination.
7. The names of candidates who pass a Preliminary Examination, other than the Preliminary Examinations for Parts Ia and II of the Classical Tripos, for Parts I and II of the Education Tripos, for Parts I and II of the English Tripos, for Part I of the Historical Tripos, and for the Linguistics Tripos, shall be arranged in three classes, and the Examiners, if they think fit, may divide any class; the names in each class or division of a class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. The names of candidates who pass the Preliminary Examination for either Part of the Classical Tripos, for either Part of the Education Tripos, for either Part of the English Tripos, and for Part I of the Historical Tripos, shall be arranged in alphabetical order in one class. The general regulations regarding the publication and correction of class-lists shall apply to these examinations also.
8. Except so far as regards the nomination of Examiners the powers and duties assigned to Faculty Boards in these regulations shall be performed with respect to any Preliminary Examination pertaining to the Natural Sciences Tripos by the Committee of Management for the Natural Sciences Tripos.
1. There shall be a Preliminary Examination for Part I and for Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos.
2. The examination shall consist of Papers 1–10 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos, as follows:
Paper 1. |
England before the Norman Conquest |
Paper 2. |
Scandinavian history in the Viking Age |
Paper 3. |
The Brittonic-speaking peoples from the fourth century to the twelfth |
Paper 4. |
The Gaelic-speaking peoples from the fourth century to the twelfth |
Paper 5. |
Old English language and literature |
Paper 6. |
Old Norse language and literature |
Paper 7. |
Medieval Welsh language and literature |
Paper 8. |
Medieval Irish language and literature |
Paper 9. |
Insular Latin language and literature |
Paper 10. |
Palaeography and codicology |
3. In order to be classed, a candidate shall offer any four papers.
4. The examination shall consist of papers 1–10 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos, as listed above.
5. In order to be classed, a candidate shall offer any four papers.
1. There shall be a Preliminary Examination for Part II of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos.
2. The subjects of examination shall be as follows:
Chinese with Japanese
Japanese with Chinese
Each candidate shall offer one subject.
3. There shall be separate examinations for each subject, as specified below:
4. No candidate shall offer a paper he or she has previously offered in any Honours Examination.
5. The Examiners shall be the Examiners for Part Ia and Part Ib of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos.
1. There shall be Preliminary Examinations for Part Ia, and for Part II of the Classical Tripos.
2. Candidates wishing to present themselves for Part Ia of the Classical Tripos under Regulation 2(b) of the General Regulations for the Classical Tripos should successfully complete the Preliminary Examination for Part Ia.
3. The examination shall consist of:
(a) Two written papers, each of three hours:
Paper 1. |
Latin texts |
Paper 2. |
Latin questions |
(b) A portfolio of two essays each of no more than 4,000 words in length, including notes but excluding bibliography, and on a topic approved by the Faculty Board of Classics. Candidates should submit the titles of their essays through their Directors of Studies to the Academic Secretary of the Faculty in time to be considered by the third Monday of Full Easter Term. The essays shall be typewritten, in English, and shall be submitted through the candidate's Director of Studies to the Academic Secretary, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board, so as to arrive not later than the seventh Tuesday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination takes place. Candidates will be required to declare that the essays are their own work and that they do not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. Where appropriate full and proper acknowledgement must be given to the work of others.
4. In the class-list a mark of distinction may be attached to the name of any candidate whose work in the examination shows special merit.
5. The papers for this examination shall be taken from among the papers for Part II of the Classical Tripos, and the Examiners shall be the Examiners for that examination. Every candidate shall offer two papers, of which not more than one may be taken from the Schedule of Optional Papers.
This paper will contain passages in Latin for seen translation and for critical discussion.
This paper will contain passages in Latin for unseen translation, and exercises on the Latin language.
1. There shall be a Preliminary Examination for Part I of the Education Tripos.
2. The Examination shall comprise two sections as set out below. Each candidate shall offer the examination requirements set out in Section I and the examination requirements for a single subject area as set out in Section II. At the discretion of the Examiners the examination may include an oral examination on the course-work submitted under Section I.
Section I. Education studies
Section I consists of two written papers, one of three hours’ duration and one of two hours’ duration, and the submission of course-work, as prescribed by the Faculty Board of Education not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination.
Paper 1 |
Foundation course in the disciplines of education |
Paper 2 |
Language, communication, and literacy (also serves as Paper 11 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos) |
Course-work |
Section II. Subject studies
Candidates may offer papers from only one subject area. Where stated, some papers are examined by means other than a single written paper. For papers offered by the Faculty of Education, the Faculty Board of Education shall specify arrangements for the submission of course-work, the sitting of practical examinations, or performances or workshops not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. Some subject areas may restrict the combinations of papers that may be offered.
All candidates shall offer:
All candidates shall offer:
All candidates shall offer:
All candidates shall offer:
All candidates shall offer:
Each paper from Part Ia of the Geographical Tripos shall count as two papers.
All candidates shall offer:
All candidates shall offer:
All candidates shall offer two of the following papers from Part Ia of the Music Tripos:
Paper 1 |
Music and musicology today |
Paper 2 |
Music history I |
Paper 3 |
Music history II |
Paper 4 |
Introduction to music analysis |
Paper 5 |
Tonal skills I |
Paper 6 |
Tonal skills II |
All candidates shall offer:
All candidates shall offer:
Where, under the regulations for the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos, a paper may be offered in a form of assessment other than a written paper, the paper offered shall be submitted under conditions specified in the regulations for that Tripos.
3. There shall be a Preliminary Examination for Part II of the Education Tripos.
4. The Examination shall comprise four sections, as set out below. Candidates shall offer:
Section I. Education studies
Section I consists of two written papers, each of three hours’ duration.
Paper 1 |
Disciplines of education I |
Paper 2 |
Disciplines of education II |
Section II. Globalization, modernity, and education
Section II consists of one written paper of three hours’ duration.
Paper 3 |
Globalization, modernity, and education |
Section III. Special subjects in education
Candidates may offer one special subject in education, which shall count as one paper. The special subjects, and the examination requirements for each special subject, shall be announced by the Faculty Board from time to time, providing that due care is taken to give sufficient notice to all candidates.
Section IV. Subject studies
Candidates may offer two or three papers from only one subject area specified in Schedule 1 to the Education Tripos.1 Where stated, some papers are examined by means other than a single written paper. Some subject areas may restrict the combinations of papers that may be offered.
5. For either Preliminary Examination, no candidate shall offer any paper, dissertation, or other exercise that he or she has previously offered in any University examination.
6. A candidate who intends to submit a dissertation under Regulation 4 shall submit the proposed topic to the Secretary of the Faculty Board through her or his Director of Studies, by a date announced by the Faculty Board not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. The Secretary shall communicate the approval or rejection of the proposed topic to the candidate no later than the beginning of the Lent Term preceding the examination.
The submitted dissertation shall be of not less than 8,000 words and not more than 10,000 words, inclusive of notes and appendices. Dissertations shall be submitted by candidates through the Undergraduate Office to the Secretary of the Faculty Board by a date specified by the Faculty Board not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. Each dissertation shall be in typescript, unless previous permission has been obtained from the Faculty Board to present it in manuscript; it shall bear the candidate’s examination number and shall be accompanied by a brief synopsis.
Candidates will be required to declare that the dissertation is their own work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. At the discretion of the Examiners, a candidate may be examined viva voce on her or his dissertation.
1. There shall be a Preliminary Examination for Part I, and for Part II, of the English Tripos.
2. The Examiners shall be the Examiners for Parts I and II of the Tripos.
3. (a) For the purposes of the Regulations and any Supplementary Regulations, the study of ‘English literature’ shall be understood to mean, in the Preliminary Examination to both Parts of the Tripos, the study of literary works written in the English language (including Old English); of literary works of the British Isles including Ireland (whether written in English, or in other languages such as Latin or French); and of literary works written in Old Norse and the Medieval Celtic languages. It shall be understood to embrace the study of the English language.
(b) The study of ‘English literature’ shall normally also embrace, in the Preliminary Examination to both Parts of the Tripos, English literary translations of works originally written in other languages, so long as due consideration is given to the fact of translation.
(c) For the Preliminary Examination to Part I of the English Tripos, the study of ‘English literature’ shall also embrace such philosophical, historical and other writing as normally comes within the scope of Papers 3, 4, 6 and 7 of Part I of the Tripos as illustrated by reading lists announced by the Faculty Board.
(d) For the Preliminary Examination to Part II of the English Tripos, the study of ‘English literature’ shall also embrace such philosophical, historical and other writing, and such products of non-literary media and expressive forms, as normally come within the scope of Papers 1, 2, and 20 to 25 of Part II of the Tripos as illustrated by reading lists announced by the Faculty Board.
(e) In the Preliminary Examination to both Parts of the Tripos, relevant comparisons with other materials that fall outside the scope of ‘English literature’ thus defined shall be accepted; but only so long as greater weight falls, in each answer offered, on materials that come within the aforementioned scope.
4. Candidates must not use the same material twice, either within any given paper or across either examination as a whole.
5. The papers in the Preliminary Examination for Part I shall be as follows:
Paper A. |
English literature and its contexts, 1300–1550 |
Paper B. |
English literature and its contexts, 1500–1700 |
Paper C. |
English literature and its contexts, 1660–1870 |
Paper D1. |
English literature and its contexts, 1830–1945 |
Paper D2. |
English literature and its contexts, 1870–present |
A candidate shall offer either Paper A or Paper D, and either Paper B or Paper C. Every paper shall be set for three hours. Candidates offering Paper D may do so by offering either Paper D1 or Paper D2 but not both. Candidates offering any of Papers B, C, D1, and D2 shall be required to demonstrate, in each such paper offered, substantial knowledge of English literature before and after the medial date specified for the paper in question.
6. The papers in the Preliminary Examination for Part II shall be as follows: Papers 1, 2, and 20 to 25 of Part II of the English Tripos. A candidate shall offer any two papers. Every paper shall be set for three hours except Papers 1 and 21 which shall be set for three and a half hours. In Papers 21 to 25 candidates shall be required to demonstrate substantial knowledge of the literature of the British Isles (which may include Ireland). Candidates offering any of Papers 22, 24, 25A, and 25B shall be required to demonstrate, in each such paper offered, substantial knowledge of English literature before and after the medial date specified for the paper in question.
1. There shall be a Preliminary Examination for Part II of the Geographical Tripos.
2. The papers for this examination shall be taken from among the papers for Part Ib of the Geographical Tripos and the Examiners shall be the Examiners for that examination.
3. Each candidate shall
1. There shall be Preliminary Examinations for Part I and for Part II of the Historical Tripos.
2. The examination shall consist of nineteen papers as follows:
Section A |
|
Paper 1. |
Historical argument and practice |
Section B British Political History |
|
Paper 2. |
British political history, 380–1100 |
Paper 3. |
British political history, 1050–1509 |
Paper 4. |
British political history, 1485–1714 |
Paper 5. |
British political history, 1688–1886 |
Paper 6. |
British political history, since 1880 |
Section C British Economic and Social History |
|
Paper 7. |
British economic and social history, 380–1100 |
Paper 8. |
British economic and social history, 1050–c. 1500 |
Paper 9. |
British economic and social history, c. 1500–1750 |
Paper 10. |
British economic and social history, 1700–1880 |
Paper 11. |
British economic and social history, since c. 1880 |
Section D European History |
|
Paper 12. |
European history, 776 bc–ad 69 |
Paper 13. |
European history, 31 bc–ad 900 |
Paper 14. |
European history, 900–c. 1215 |
Paper 15. |
European history, 1200–1520 |
Paper 16. |
European history, 1450–1760 |
Paper 17. |
European history, 1715–1890 |
Paper 18. |
European history, since 1890 |
Section E World History |
|
Paper 19. |
World history, from 1400 |
3. In order to be included in the list of successful candidates, a candidate shall offer Paper 1 and two papers from Sections B–E. Only one paper may be offered from each section.
4. The examination shall consist of Papers 1 and 4–30 of Part II of the Historical Tripos. In order to be classed a candidate shall offer Paper 1 and either two or three papers, provided that no candidate shall offer a paper which he or she would not be permitted to offer as a candidate for the Tripos. A candidate who offers four papers shall be classed on the basis of the best three of those papers. The Examiners shall be the Examiners for Part II of the Tripos.
This paper aims to provide an opportunity for candidates to reflect on broad issues of historical argument and practice. The paper is a means of enabling candidates to raise and discuss fundamental questions which relate their specialist knowledge to more general themes of historical inquiry and explanation. The paper will offer a choice of questions, from which candidates will be required to answer one.
The scope of Papers 2–18 shall be that of the corresponding papers in Part I of the Tripos. The scope of Paper 19 shall be that of Papers 21 and 23 in Part I.
Three questions must be answered but no question shall be specified as compulsory, except that in Paper 4 (British political history, 1485–1714) and in Paper 18 (European history, since 1890) candidates will be required to answer at least one question from each of sections A and B.
1. There shall be a Preliminary Examination for Part II of the Natural Sciences Tripos. The subjects of the examination shall be as follows:
Chemistry |
Materials Science |
[Geological Sciences] 〈Earth Sciences〉2 |
Physics |
History and Philosophy of Science |
Psychology |
2. Each candidate for the examination shall offer one of these subjects and shall satisfy the requirements set out in the regulations below. No candidate may offer a paper which they have previously offered in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos.
3. The examination in Chemistry shall consist of the examination requirements for the subjects Chemistry A and Chemistry B in Part Ib of the Tripos. The Examiners in Chemistry A and Chemistry B in Part Ib shall be the Examiners in Chemistry in the Preliminary Examination.
4. The examination in Physics shall consist of:
The Examiners in the subjects Physics A and Physics B and Mathematics in Part Ib shall, as appropriate, be the Examiners in Physics in the Preliminary Examination.
5. The examination in [Geological Sciences] 〈Earth Sciences〉2 shall consist of the examination requirements for the subjects [Geological Sciences A and Geological Sciences B] 〈Earth Sciences A and Earth Sciences B〉2 in Part Ib of the Tripos. The Examiners in [Geological Sciences A and Geological Sciences B] 〈Earth Sciences A and Earth Sciences B〉2 in Part Ib shall, as appropriate, be the Examiners in [Geological Sciences] 〈Earth Sciences〉2 in the Preliminary Examination.
6. The examination in History and Philosophy of Science shall consist of:
The Examiners in History and Philosophy of Science in Part Ib shall be the Examiners in History and Philosophy of Science in the Preliminary Examination.
7. The examination in Materials Science shall consist of the examination requirements for Materials Science in Part Ib of the Tripos and two subjects selected from Chemistry A, Mathematics, Physics A, and Physics B, in Part Ib of the Tripos. The Examiners in Materials Science in Part Ib shall be the Examiners in Materials Science in the Preliminary Examination.
8. The examination in Psychology shall consist of the examination requirements for Experimental Psychology in Part Ib of the Tripos. The Examiners in Experimental Psychology in Part Ib shall be the Examiners in Psychology in the Preliminary Examination.
9. For each subject there shall be published a separate class-list, which shall be signed by the Examiners in that subject. In each list the names of the successful candidates shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions.
1. The Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos shall consist of two Parts. A separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part I:
3. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part II:
4. No student shall be a candidate for both Parts, or for either Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
5. No student who has been a candidate for either Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
6. The Faculty Board of English may from time to time make supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects set out in the following regulations, and may modify, alter, or withdraw such supplementary regulations as they think fit, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any change.
7. The Faculty Board of English shall give notice before the end of the Easter Term in every academical year of the variable subjects for the examinations to be held in the academical year next but one following; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
8. The Faculty Board of English shall nominate such number of Examiners as they may deem sufficient for each Part of the Tripos, and shall have the power to nominate Assessors for any papers.
9. The questions proposed by each Examiner and Assessor shall be submitted for approval to the whole body of Examiners.
10. The answers to each question shall be read by at least two Examiners or Assessors.
11. In the class-list for each Part of the Tripos, the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. A mark of distinction shall be affixed to the names of those candidates placed in the first class whose work either in a part or in the whole of the examination is of special merit.
12. The papers in Part I shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
England before the Norman Conquest. |
Paper 2. |
Scandinavian history in the Viking Age.4 |
Paper 3. |
The Brittonic-speaking peoples from the fourth century to the twelfth. |
Paper 4. |
The Gaelic-speaking peoples from the fourth century to the twelfth. |
Paper 5. |
Old English language and literature (also serves as Paper 26 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)).4 |
Paper 6. |
Old Norse language and literature (also serves as Paper 27a of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)).4 |
Paper 7. |
Medieval Welsh language and literature (also serves as Paper 28a of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)).4 |
Paper 8. |
Medieval Irish language and literature (also serves as Paper 29a of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)).4 |
Paper 9. |
Insular Latin language and literature (also serves as Paper 8E of Part I and Paper 30 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Paper 10. |
Palaeography and codicology. |
Paper 11. |
Early medieval literature and its contexts (also serves as Paper 20 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Paper 12. |
Love, violence, and power in France 1100–1500 (Paper Fr. 3 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
Paper 13. |
Medieval Latin literature, from 650 to 1300 (Paper ML 2 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos).5 |
Paper 14. |
The North Sea in the early Middle Ages (Paper A25 of Part IIb of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos and Paper ARC26 of Parts IIa and IIb of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos). |
Paper 15. |
Europe in late Antiquity and the migration period (Paper A27 of Part IIb of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos and Paper ARC27 of Parts IIa and IIb of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos). |
13. A candidate for Part I shall offer six of the papers specified in Regulation 12, provided that
14. The papers in Part II shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
A subject in Anglo-Saxon history specified by the Faculty Board of English. |
Paper 2. |
A subject in Scandinavian history of the Viking Age specified by the Faculty Board of English. |
Paper 3. |
A subject in Celtic history specified by the Faculty Board of English. |
Paper 4. |
A subject in Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic history specified by the Faculty Board of English. |
Paper 5. |
A subject in Old English literature specified by the Faculty Board of English.4 |
Paper 6. |
Advanced medieval Scandinavian language and literature (also serves as Paper 27b of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)).4 |
Paper 7. |
Advanced medieval Welsh language and literature (also serves as Paper 28b of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)).4 |
Paper 8. |
Advanced medieval Irish language and literature (also serves as Paper 29b of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)).4 |
Paper 9. |
A subject in Insular Latin literature specified by the Faculty Board of English. |
Paper 10. |
Textual criticism. |
Paper 11. |
Germanic philology (also serves as Paper 31 of the Linguistics Tripos).4 |
Paper 12. |
Celtic philology (also serves as Paper 27 of the Linguistics Tripos).4 |
Paper 13. |
Medieval English literature, 1066–1500 (Paper 6 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Paper 14. |
A subject in medieval European history (a paper on a subject announced for a paper of Part II of the Historical Tripos which in any year has been approved for the purpose of this regulation by the Faculty Board of English). |
Paper 15(a). |
Historical linguistics (Paper 11 of the Linguistics Tripos).6 |
Paper 15(b). |
History of the English language (Paper 13 of the Linguistics Tripos).7 |
Paper 16. |
The North Sea in the early Middle Ages (Paper A25 of Part IIb of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos and Paper ARC26 of Parts IIa and IIb of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos). |
Paper 17. |
Europe in late Antiquity and the migration period (Paper A27 of Part IIb of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos and Paper ARC27 of Parts IIa and IIb of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos). |
Paper 18. |
Topics in medieval studies: to be specified by the Faculty Board from time to time (Paper Fr.7 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
Paper 19. |
England before the Norman Conquest (Paper 1 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
Paper 20. |
Scandinavian History in the Viking Age (Paper 2 of Part I of the Anglo- Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
Paper 21. |
The Brittonic-speaking peoples from the fourth century to the twelfth (Paper 3 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
Paper 22. |
The Gaelic-speaking peoples from the fourth century to the twelfth (Paper 4 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
Paper 23. |
Old English language and literature (Paper 5 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos. Also serves as Paper 8A of Part I of the English Tripos and Paper 26 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Paper 24. |
Old Norse language and literature (Paper 6 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos. Also serves as Paper 8B of Part I and Paper 27A of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Paper 25. |
Medieval Welsh language and literature (Paper 7 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos. Also serves as Paper 8C of Part I and Paper 28A of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Paper 26. |
Medieval Irish language and literature (Paper 8 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos. Also serves as Paper 8D of Part I and Paper 29A of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Paper 27. |
Insular Latin language and literature (Paper 9 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos. Also serves as Paper 8E of Part I and Paper 30 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Paper 28. |
Palaeography and codicology (Paper 10 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
15. Except as provided in Regulation 16, a candidate for Part II shall offer
16. (a) A candidate for Part II who takes the examination in the year next after obtaining honours in Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos or in another Honours Examination may offer in place of one of the papers required under Regulation 15(a) one paper chosen from among Papers 19–28;
(b) candidates for Part II who take the examination in the year next but one after obtaining honours in another Honours Examination may offer in place of up to two of the papers required under Regulation 15(a) papers chosen from among Papers 23–27;
provided that:
17. (a) A candidate for Part I who wishes to offer a dissertation under Regulation 13(c), or a candidate for Part II who is required to offer a dissertation under Regulation 15(b), shall submit an application, including the title of the proposed dissertation, a brief account of its scope, and a statement of the scheme of papers to be offered in the examination. Applications shall be submitted to the Head of the Department, so as to arrive not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
(b) Each candidate must obtain the approval of the proposed title by the Faculty Board not later than the last day of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. When the Faculty Board have approved a title, no change shall be made to it or to the candidate's scheme of papers, without the further approval of the Faculty Board.
(c) A Part I dissertation shall be of not fewer than 7,000 and not more than 10,000 words in length, and a Part II dissertation shall be of not fewer than 9,000 and not more than 12,000 words in length, including appendices but excluding bibliography. Candidates will be required to declare that the dissertation is their own work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. Every dissertation shall be typewritten.
(d) A dissertation shall be submitted to the Head of the Department, so as to arrive not later than the first day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
(e) The Examiners shall have power to examine a candidate viva voce on his or her dissertation and on the general field of knowledge within which it falls.
An introduction to the history and civilization of England from the age of the Anglo-Saxon settlements to the Norman Conquest. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
An introduction to the history and culture of Denmark, Norway, and Sweden in the Viking Age, including the westward expansion to the North Atlantic and the eastward expansion to Russia and Ukraine. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
An introduction to the history and culture of the Brittonic-speaking peoples from the collapse of the Roman Empire to the Anglo-Norman invasions. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
An introduction to the history and culture of the Gaelic-speaking peoples from the fourth century to the twelfth. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
An introduction to the language and literary characteristics of Old English prose and poetry. There will be set texts in the original language; candidates will be required to translate passages from the set texts and an unseen passage of Old English, and to write essays on selected topics.
An introduction to the language and literary characteristics of Old Norse prose and poetry. There will be set texts in the original language; candidates will be required to translate passages from the set texts and an unseen passage of Old Norse, and to write essays on selected topics.
An introduction to the language and literature of Wales from the beginnings to the end of the Middle Ages. There will be set texts in the original language; candidates will be required to translate, and to comment on the linguistic characteristics of, passages from the set texts, to translate an unseen passage of Middle Welsh, and to write essays on selected topics.
An introduction to the language and literature of early medieval Ireland, in particular until the end of the tenth century. There will be set texts in the original language; candidates will be required to translate, and to comment on the linguistic characteristics of, passages from the set texts, to translate an unseen passage of Old Irish, and to write essays on selected topics.
An introduction to the Latin literature of England and the Celtic-speaking countries from the fourth century to the twelfth. An advanced knowledge of Latin is not expected when preparation is begun, although some knowledge of the language is desirable. There will be set texts in the original language; candidates will be required to show detailed knowledge of these and to write essays on selected topics.
An introduction to the manuscript as a physical object and the history of scripts used in the manuscript sources studied in Papers 1–9. Candidates will be required to answer compulsory practical questions, and to write essays on selected topics.
An advanced topic in the history and civilization of England from the age of the Anglo-Saxon settlements to the Norman Conquest. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
An advanced topic in the history and culture of Denmark, Norway, and Sweden in the Viking Age, including the westward expansion to the North Atlantic and the eastward expansion to Russia and Ukraine. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
An advanced topic in the history and culture of the Celtic-speaking peoples from the fourth century to the twelfth. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
An advanced topic in the history and culture of Anglo-Saxon England, medieval Scandinavia, and the medieval Celtic-speaking peoples. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original languages or in translation.
The work of an author or a group of authors, or a group of texts, or a literary topic or genre within the field of Old English literature, will be prescribed for special study. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original language.
Scandinavian languages and literatures from the medieval period are studied. There will be set texts in the original language. Candidates will be required to translate and comment on extracts from these set texts and to translate unseen passages, and also to write essays on selected topics in medieval Scandinavian literature.
Welsh language and literature from the beginnings to the end of the Middle Ages are studied. There will be set texts in Old and Middle Welsh. Candidates will be required to translate and comment on extracts from these set texts and to translate unseen passages from Middle Welsh. There will be a further group of set texts, in medieval Breton and Cornish. Candidates will be required to translate and comment on extracts from these set texts. They will also be required to write essays on selected topics in medieval Welsh, Breton, and Cornish language and literature.
Irish language and literature from the beginnings to the end of the Middle Ages are studied. There will be set texts in the original language. Candidates will be required to translate extracts from these set texts and to translate unseen passages, and also to write essays on selected topics in medieval Irish language and literature.
The work of an author or a group of authors, or a group of texts, or a literary topic or genre within the field of Insular Latin literature, will be prescribed for special study. Candidates will be required to use primary sources in the original language.
An introduction to the processes by which extant sources written in the languages studied for Papers 5–9 have been transmitted, and of the scholarly methods by which these sources are converted into a usable form. The various editorial and diplomatic approaches and techniques are studied. Candidates will be required to answer a compulsory practical question and to write essays on selected topics.
The history and grammar of the Germanic languages will be studied in relation to one another and to their Indo-European background. Candidates will be required to comment on passages and to write essays on selected topics.
The history and grammar of the Celtic languages will be studied in relation to one another and to their Indo-European background. Candidates will be required to comment on passages and to write essays on selected topics.
1. The Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos shall consist of three Parts, Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb. In Part IIa and Part IIb there shall be an examination in each of the following three subjects: Archaeology (including Assyriology and Egyptology), Biological Anthropology, Social Anthropology. For Part I there shall be a single class-list; for Part IIa and Part IIb there shall be a separate class-list for each of the three subjects of the examination.
2. The Faculty Board of Human, Social, and Political Science shall nominate such number of Examiners to conduct the examination for Part I of the Tripos, and a Senior Examiner and such number of Examiners to conduct the examination in each subject for Part IIa and Part IIb, as they shall deem sufficient. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate such number of Assessors as they shall deem sufficient to assist the Examiners for each Part. If required to do so, Assessors shall set papers in the subject or subjects assigned to them, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers, shall assess dissertations, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
3. The Faculty Board may from time to time make supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects and specified texts of examination and may modify, alter, or withdraw such supplementary regulations as they think fit, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any change.
4. Before the end of the Easter Term each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of the variable subjects for the examinations to be held in the academical year next following; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected. The Board shall have power when they give notice of variable subjects to announce any consequential restriction on the combination of papers that a candidate may choose to offer.
5. The questions proposed by each Examiner and Assessor shall be submitted for approval to the whole body of Examiners for Part I or to the Examiners in the particular subject for Part IIa or Part IIb.
6. The answers to each question shall be read by at least two Examiners or Assessors.
7. Separate meetings shall be held of all the Examiners for Part I and of the three bodies of Examiners for Part IIa and Part IIb, at which the respective class-lists shall be drawn up. In each class- list the names of the candidates who deserve honours shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence a mark of distinction may be awarded. The class-lists for Part IIa and Part IIb shall indicate whether a candidate has offered in the examination the Assyriology and/or Egyptology option.
8. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination in the same term.
9. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
10. A candidate shall not offer in any Part of the Tripos a paper that he or she has previously offered in another University examination.
11. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part I:
12. The scheme of examination for Part I shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
The development of human society (also serves as Paper 6 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
Paper 2. |
Humans in biological perspective (also serves as Paper 7 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
Paper 3. |
Human societies: the comparative perspective (also serves as Paper 8 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
Paper 4A. |
Being human: an interdisciplinary approach. |
Paper 4B. |
Introduction to sociology: modern societies (Paper 2 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
Paper 4C. |
The analysis of modern politics I (Paper 1 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
Paper 4D. |
Introduction to psychology (Paper 3 of Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
Paper 5. |
Introduction to the cultures of Egypt and Mesopotamia. |
Paper 6. |
Akkadian language I (also serves as Paper X.1 of Part Ia of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos). |
Paper 7. |
Egyptian language I (also serves as Paper X.2 of Part Ia of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos). |
A candidate for Part I shall offer one of the following:
13. A student who has obtained honours in Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part IIa in the year next after so obtaining honours.
14. (a) A student who has obtained honours in any Honours Examination other than Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that
(b) No student shall be a candidate for Part IIb in Archaeology unless the Head of the Department of Archaeology and Anthropology is satisfied that the student has, since matriculation, undertaken at least six weeks of archaeological excavation or fieldwork8 on a project or projects (or in the case of candidates for Assyriology or Egyptology on a study visit to Egypt or the Middle East and/or study in a museum) approved by the Head of the Department, provided that the Head of the Department shall have power to grant exemption from this requirement to a candidate who has obtained an equivalent amount of appropriate experience in some other way. Before the division of the Lent Term each year the Head of the Department shall draw up a list of those candidates who have satisfied this requirement or have been granted exemption from it, and shall communicate this information to the Registrary.
15. The scheme of examination for Part IIa and Part IIb9 shall be as follows:
A1. |
Archaeological thought I |
A2. |
Archaeology in action I |
A3. |
Archaeological thought II |
A4. |
Archaeology in action II |
A10. |
Archaeological practice |
Special areas |
|
A5. |
The archaeology of early human development10 |
A6. |
The Palaeolithic of the Old World |
A7. |
Topics in Palaeolithic archaeology10 |
A8. |
European prehistory |
A9. |
Special topics in European prehistory |
A13. |
Aegean prehistory (Paper D1 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
A14. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art (Paper D2 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
A15. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art (Paper D3 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
A16. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art (Paper D4 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
A17. |
The historical archaeology of Ancient Egypt I10 |
A18. |
The historical archaeology of Ancient Egypt II10 |
A19. |
Ancient Egyptian religion I10 |
A20. |
Ancient Egyptian religion II10 |
A21. |
Mesopotamian culture I: literature10 |
A22. |
Mesopotamian culture II: religion and scholarship10 |
A23. |
Mesopotamian archaeology I: prehistory and early states10 |
A24. |
Mesopotamian archaeology II: territorial states to empires10 |
A25. |
The North Sea in the early Middle Ages (also serves as Paper 14 of Part I and Paper 16 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
A26. |
The Long Viking Age |
A27. |
Europe in Late Antiquity and the Migration Period (also serves as Paper 15 of Part I and Paper 17 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
A28. |
The archaeology of medieval Britain |
A29. |
Ancient India I: prehistory of India10 |
A30. |
Ancient India I: the Indus civilization and beyond10 |
A31. |
Ancient India II: early historic cities of South Asia10 |
A32. |
Ancient India II: art and architecture of ancient India10 |
A33. |
Ancient South America10 |
A34. |
The archaeology of Mesoamerica and North America10 |
A36. |
The late prehistoric and historical archaeology of sub-Saharan Africa |
A37. |
Introduction to scientific approaches in archaeology |
A38. |
Archaeological science |
M1. |
Akkadian language II (also serves as Paper X.6 of Part Ib of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos) |
M2. |
Akkadian language III |
M3. |
Sumerian |
M4. |
Mesopotamian history I: states and structures10 |
M5. |
Mesopotamian history II: empires and systems10 |
E1. |
Egyptian language II (also serves as Paper X.7 of Part Ib of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos) |
E2. |
Egyptian language III |
The Faculty Board shall announce before the end of the Easter Term the papers that will be available in the examinations to be held in the next academical year.
BA1. |
Foundations in biological anthropology: the human animal |
BA2. |
Foundations in biological anthropology: the human journey |
BA3. |
Foundations in biological anthropology: the human lifespan |
BA4. |
Theory and practice in anthropology |
BA5–17. |
Not more than thirteen papers, each on a special subject in biological anthropology prescribed by the Faculty Board. In announcing the special subjects available the Faculty Board shall also announce the form of the examination which shall be either a written examination of two hours’ duration or the submission of an essay or other exercise in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 19 and which may also include practical work to be submitted in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 18. |
S1. |
Foundations of social anthropology I |
S2. |
Foundations of social anthropology II |
S3. |
Theory, methods, and enquiry in social anthropology |
S4. |
Thought, belief, and ethics |
S5. |
Political economy and social transformations |
S6. |
Ethnographic areas |
S7–11. |
Not more than five papers, each on a special subject in social anthropology prescribed by the Faculty Board. Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, provided that the Faculty Board may announce an alternative mode of assessment for any of the special subjects which shall consist of the submission of two essays in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 19(b). |
16. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 10, candidates for Part IIa shall offer papers and other exercises as follows:
Option 2 (Assyriology)
Option 3 (Egyptology)
Option 4 (Assyriology and Egyptology)
|
Historical Tripos, Part I |
|
|
Paper 21. |
Empires and world history from the fifteenth century to the First World War. |
|
Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos, Part IIa |
|
|
Paper Pol. 3. |
The analysis of modern politics II. |
|
Paper Psy. 1. |
Social psychology. |
|
Paper Soc. 1. |
Social theory. |
|
Paper Soc. 2. |
Contemporary societies and global transformations. |
17. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 10, candidates for Part IIb shall offer papers and other exercises as follows:
provided that a candidate may not offer (i) Paper A22 unless he or she has previously taken either Paper A21 or Papers A23 or A24, and (ii) Paper A38 unless he or she has previously taken Paper A37.
Option 2 (Assyriology)
Option 3 (Egyptology)
Option 4 (Assyriology and Egyptology)
18. Candidates for Part IIa and Part IIb in Archaeology (and where appropriate in Biological Anthropology) shall present for the inspection of the Examiners, by a date which the Head of the Department shall announce not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term, records of such practical work done during the courses leading to the examination as shall be determined from time to time by the Faculty Board. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of candidates’ practical work, and shall take these assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
19. (a) The arrangements for the submission of essays or other exercises by candidates for Part IIa and Part IIb in Biological Anthropology who choose a paper from Papers BA5–17 for which the Faculty Board have announced that the examination shall be by one of these alternative means shall be as follows:
Essays shall not exceed 4,000 words in length, excluding footnotes, figures, tables, appendices, and bibliography. Candidates shall be required to state in the bibliography the sources that they have used and to declare that the essay represents their own work unaided except as may be specified in the declaration. Detailed instructions about other exercises shall be issued by the Head of the Department together with the announcements of variable subjects by the Faculty Board. Each essay or other exercise shall be typewritten, unless a candidate has obtained previous permission from the Faculty Board to present it in manuscript; essays or other exercises shall be submitted to the Head of the Department so as to arrive not later than the third Monday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held. A candidate who submits an essay or other exercise after that date may be penalized.
(b) The arrangements for the submission of essays by candidates for Part IIb in Social Anthropology who choose a paper from S7–11, for which the Faculty Board have announced that the examination may be by this form of assessment, shall be as follows:
Two essays shall be submitted, each not exceeding 5,000 words in length, excluding footnotes, figures, tables, appendices, and bibliography. Candidates shall be required to state in the bibliography the sources that they have used and to declare that the essay represents their own work unaided except as may be specified in the declaration. Each essay shall be typewritten, unless a candidate has obtained previous permission from the Faculty Board to present it in manuscript; essays shall be submitted to the Administration Office in the Department of Archaeology and Anthropology, one to arrive not later than the first Friday of Full Lent Term and one to arrive by the first Friday of Full Easter Term. A candidate who submits an essay after the required date may be penalized. A candidate who submits an essay or other exercise in place of the written examination may not also submit a dissertation.
(c) The arrangements for the submission of essays by candidates taking paper A21 for Part IIa and Part IIb in Archaeology shall be as follows:
Three essays shall be submitted, each not exceeding 2,000 words in length, excluding footnotes, figures, tables, appendices and bibliography. Candidates shall be required to state in the bibliography the sources that they have used and to declare that the essay represents their own work unaided, except as may be specified in the declaration. Each essay shall be typewritten, unless a candidate has obtained previous permission from the Faculty Board to present it in manuscript. Essays shall be submitted to the Administration Office in the Division of Archaeology, the first to arrive not later than the last Monday of Full Michaelmas Term, the second to arrive not later than the fifth Monday of Full Lent Term, and the third not later than the third Monday of Full Easter Term. A candidate who submits an essay after the required date may be penalized. The submitted essays shall form 40% of the assessment for this paper; the remainder of the assessment (60%) shall be by an examination of two hours’ duration.
20. (a) A candidate for Part IIb who wishes to offer a dissertation under Regulation 17 shall submit an application, including the title of the proposed dissertation, a brief account of its scope, and a statement of the scheme of papers to be offered in the examination. A candidate who so wishes may request permission to include a film or filmed material, amounting to not more than twenty minutes in length, as a component part of the dissertation. Applications shall be submitted to the Head of the Department so as to arrive not later than the last day of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
(b) Each candidate must obtain the approval of the Faculty Board for the proposed title not later than the division of the Lent Term. When the Faculty Board have approved a title, no change shall be made to it, or to the candidate's scheme of papers, without the further approval of the Faculty Board.
(c) A dissertation shall be of not more than 10,000 words in length, excluding footnotes, figures, tables, appendices, and bibliography. Each dissertation shall be typewritten, unless a candidate has obtained previous permission from the Faculty Board to present it in manuscript.
(d) A dissertation shall be submitted to the Senior Examiner in the Department not later than the following dates:
A dissertation shall be accompanied by (i) a brief synopsis on a separate sheet of paper of the contents of the dissertation, and (ii) a certificate signed by the candidate that it is his or her own original work, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
21. At the discretion of the Examiners, a candidate for Part IIb may be examined viva voce.
22. Examinations for the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos will be held for the last time as follows:
Part I in 2013
Part IIa in 2014
Part IIb in 2015
This paper serves as an introduction to the collection, analysis, and interpretation of archaeological data, and focuses on major issues in the development of human societies. Examples are drawn from the entire span of the human career, from the initial evolution of hominid behaviour patterns to the emergence of historically documented states and empires. Issues are explored in terms of the principal archaeological methods and theories which contribute to our current understanding of past societies.
This paper provides an introduction to biological anthropology. The syllabus covers the genetic basis of life; evolutionary theory; primate biology, ecology, and behaviour; human evolution; human diversity, geographical patterns of variation and its genetic basis; human ecology, including disease, nutrition, energetics, and behaviour; problems in gene-environment interactions and behavioural genetics. Two special subjects will be prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board.
This paper provides an introduction to the aims, scope, and methods of social anthropology. It covers the whole range of human societies, past and present, with a view to understanding them both individually in depth and within a broad comparative perspective. It approaches social life from a number of different angles, focusing on the ideas that people hold, their forms of organization, the way they interact, and the things they produce.
This paper combines approaches from archaeology, biological anthropology, and social anthropology to study the human condition. Questions addressed will concern: the origins and evolution of human society; symbols, communication, and culture; problems of human ecology and adaptation. Special topics may include sex and gender; sociality and social inequality; art and material culture; technology; language; health and illness; nutrition and development.
The origins and institutional features of modern societies. Social change and global interconnections in the modern world. Selected aspects of modern societies including work, stratification, and inequality; gender and sexual divisions; race and ethnicity; political organization and the modern state; culture and mass communication; deviance and social control.
This paper introduces the cultures of Egypt and Mesopotamia and is taught through lectures in each subject area and comparative seminars. The paper is in two parts: section A consists of five comparative questions; section B consists of ten subject specific questions, five related to Egypt and five to Mesopotamia. Students are required to answer one question from each section and a third question from either section.
This paper consists of passages for transliteration from cuneiform and translation from Akkadian taken from the texts read in class and specified from time to time in the Reporter, a passage for translation from English into transliterated Akkadian, and questions on grammar.
This paper covers the study of hieroglyphic texts in Middle Egyptian, the classic form of the language. Students will be expected to transliterate and translate into English passages from the specified texts, and comment where appropriate. They will also be given a passage from an unspecified text for transliteration and translation into English.
Why study archaeology, when did people start studying archaeology, and what role does archaeology play in contemporary society? Answers to such questions are discussed in the course for this paper, which reviews the history of archaeological thought. The main issues in archaeology, as they have been seen since the early nineteenth century, are covered, with emphasis placed on the rise of a scientific archaeology in the mid-twentieth century and reactions to it.
The course for this paper shows how the sciences and the humanities are integrated in the practice of archaeology over a broad range of topics concerned with the nature of past societies. The interdisciplinary character of archaeology is explored through consideration of a range of thematic issues, such as material culture; the study of landscapes and settlements; the establishment and study of temporal sequences, and archaeological field methods.
The course for this paper provides an opportunity to extend the depth and range of theoretical issues introduced in Paper A1. In terms of depth, there is fuller coverage of modes of explanation and interpretation in archaeology and discussion of how they are situated within wider debates in the sciences and the humanities. In terms of range, the scope of archaeological awareness is extended to global issues, drawing on a variety of themes in world archaeology.
This paper expands on the range of themes covered in Paper A2, exploring ways in which a wide range of scientific approaches and techniques can be integrated with humanistic and social science perspectives in studying and interpreting the nature of past societies. The interdisciplinary character of archaeology is explored through consideration of a range of thematic issues, such as human impact on the environment; the study of households and communities; the archaeology of death and the body; the archaeology of ‘art’; categorization and style; symbols and power; production and exchange, and contemporary notions of heritage.
The course for this paper provides an introduction to the practical methods and approaches used by archaeologists to create and analyse archaeological data. It covers the ways in which archaeological theories are applied in practice, through data recovery, analysis, and interpretation. Much of the instruction is provided through hands-on practicals, field trips, and fieldwork.
These papers are paired. Courses are taught over a two-year cycle and are examined in alternate years, so that in any particular year one paper of each pair will be set, corresponding to the subject that has been taught in that year.
This course surveys the development of human societies from their primate origins 2–3 million years ago to the emergence of food production in the early postglacial period. The scope of the course is world-wide; it puts special emphasis on the processes of population dispersal (of both the earliest hominids and biologically modern humans) and the processes of technological and social adaptation to the changing environmental conditions of the Pleistocene period. Special emphasis is placed on the patterns of human social and cognitive development, and on the inevitably close inter-relationships between the parallel processes of biological and cultural evolution throughout the course of human development. One of Papers A5 and A7 is taught in alternate years.
This course presents a broad general introduction to later European prehistory from the beginning of the Holocene through the earliest historical societies. Coverage includes the Mesolithic, the Neolithic, the Copper and Bronze Ages, and the Iron Age.
This course presents advanced discussion of special topics in European prehistory. Each year’s topics are drawn from a rotating list of regional, thematic, and/or theoretical subjects relevant to Later European Prehistory (Mesolithic through Iron Age). It is normally expected that students will have taken or be taking Paper A8 (Later European prehistory) currently.
Within Classical archaeology, four different papers are available, concerning which information is available from the Faculty of Classics.
The course reviews the historical archaeology of ancient Egypt from its origins to the Roman conquest and integrates archaeological, textual, and artistic evidence. Emphasis is placed on examining the nature of society, urbanism, kingship and political power, ideology, and interactions between Egypt and its neighbours. The course is taught over a two-year cycle: A17 covers the unification of Egypt to the end of the Second Intermediate Period (c. 3000–1550 bc); A18 covers the New Kingdom and up to the Roman conquest (c. 1550–30 bc).
This course examines archaeological, textual, and artistic evidence for ancient Egyptian religious practices and beliefs. The course is taught over a two-year cycle: A19 covers the period from the unification of Egypt to the end of the Second Intermediate Period (c. 3000–1550 bc); A20 covers the New Kingdom and up to the Roman conquest (c. 1550–30 bc).
This paper will cover both Sumerian and Akkadian literary texts in translation, and thus be open to candidates not studying either language. It will cover myths and epics, including Gilgamesh and the Epic of Creation, as well as political and ‘Wisdom’ literature. Assessment will be by one examination of two hours’ duration in which candidates must answer two questions (60% of the final mark for the paper), and by the submission of three essays of 2,000 words each, which together make up 40% of the final mark for the paper.
This paper will deal with literacy and numeracy in ancient Mesopotamia; science and scholarship, including divination; religious beliefs as expressed in both the textual and the archaeological sources. Knowledge of the languages will not be required.
This course covers the archaeology of modern Iraq and Syria. Subjects addressed include the development of agriculture and urbanism, the relationship of the environment to the rise of complex society, the interplay of textual and archaeological data, propaganda and the presentation of kingship and power, symbolism in art and architecture, and the archaeological evidence for religious ritual. The course covers the archaeology of Mesopotamia in two periods (6000–2000 bc and 2000–539 bc), is taught over a two-year cycle and examined in Papers A23 and A24 in alternate years.
This course surveys the period which saw the rise, development, and fall of the Roman Empire, and the emergence of the early medieval states which were the foundation of modern Europe; it relates mainly to the northern and western parts of Europe (including Scandinavia). The course includes two papers which are both normally taught every year.
This course covers the archaeology of post-conquest Britain, approximately ad 1050 to 1500. This was the period when the ‘historic’ landscape of Britain took on its pre-industrial form, and the history of landscape and villages, castles, towns, and the church is still visible in the material remains of this period. Since East Anglia is particularly rich in such evidence, lectures are complemented by field trips or museum sessions for almost every topic.
This course surveys the archaeology and art of ancient India extending from the prehistoric periods up to the fifth century ad. In one year the main emphasis is on the earlier prehistoric periods (up to the emergence of agriculture), together with a survey of the principal excavated historical sites (c. 600 bc to c. ad 400). In the other year the emphasis is placed on the later prehistoric and proto-historic periods, and on the major features of Indian art, architecture, inscriptions, and coins. The course also surveys the geographical and environmental features of ancient India, and the history of archaeological research in the subcontinent. Four modules are taught over a two-year cycle, two being available each year: Prehistory of India; The Indus civilization and beyond; Early historic cities of South Asia; Art and architecture of ancient India.
The course covers major developments in the region, from the peopling of the New World and the origins of agriculture to the rise of complex societies that culminated in the late pre-Hispanic empires (Inka and Aztec). Emphasis is placed on theoretical approaches to understanding the long-term development of social inequality and the rise of complex societies, and attention is given to the interactions of human populations with their environments. Two modules (Ancient South America, and Archaeology of Mesoamerica and North America) are taught over a two-year cycle and are examined in alternate years.
The course provides a broad overview of the prehistory of the African continent from the earliest times, together with the historical archaeology of sub-Saharan Africa. Emphasis is placed upon the study of Post-Pleistocene times and upon the relationship between archaeology and other sources of information about the African past. The subject is viewed from an essentially African perspective, although due attention is paid to external connections. Students are encouraged to view African prehistory as an essential and central part of human development.
The courses for these papers allow students to explore a range of scientific approaches in archaeology in depth. Consideration is given to the geo-archaeological context of our evidence, and the dynamics of preservation and transformation of archaeological materials. From this foundation students can select from a range of bio-archaeological and environmental options, e.g. in archaeobotany or zoo-archaeology, backed up by laboratory practicals. These papers can be taken with, and are designed to complement, any of the papers on special areas, for those candidates who wish to put a greater emphasis on scientific method in the course as a whole.
This paper is for candidates in their second year of study of Akkadian, and will test candidates’ knowledge of the Old Babylonian and Standard Babylonian dialects of Akkadian as used in literary and historical texts. They will be required to transliterate from cuneiform and translate passages from both seen and unseen texts. Comment may be required on points of grammar and/or content.
This paper is for candidates in their third year of study of Akkadian. It will include transliteration and translation from unseen texts and from a range of Akkadian texts studied during the year including letters and legal documents, some in Assyrian dialect. Comment may be required on points of grammar and/or content.
This paper is only offered to candidates taking Paper M2 in Part IIb. It will consist of passages from Sumerian texts studied during the year for transliteration and translation, together with questions on Sumerian grammar.
These papers are taught through the same lecture course as Mesopotamian archaeology (Papers M4/5 are the same as Papers A23/24), in the same two-year cycle. In year I the course covers the early history of Sumer and Akkad, through the Old Babylonian period in Mesopotamia and Syria. In year II it covers the ‘Amarna Period’ or later 2nd millennium bc, and the Assyrian and Babylonian empires down to the fall of Babylon to Cyrus in 539 bc. A balance is maintained between the narrative of political events and social and economic history.
This paper contains passages from specified and unspecified texts for transliteration and translation into English. The passages are taken from Middle Egyptian texts.
This paper contains passages from specified and unspecified texts for transliteration and translation into English. The passages are taken from Old and Middle and Late Egyptian texts.
This paper examines the human species in a broad comparative perspective, with two themes. The first is the extent to which humans share their biology and behaviour with other animals, especially primates. The second perspective is concerned with comparisons between humans and the rest of the biological world in terms of similarities, differences, and uniqueness. Material will be drawn from genetics, morphology, and behaviour.
This paper will look at the evolution of the human species, from its origins among the great apes, to the evolution of modern humans, and the diversity that has taken place in the course of the last 10,000 years, leading to the processes of modernization. Material will be drawn from the fossil record, archaeology, genetics, and human population biology and ecology.
This paper looks at human biology and behaviour from the perspective of development and ontogeny. From conception to death, humans undergo a process of development that is shaped by both genes and environment. The patterns of such development can be framed in terms of life history theory, the role of nutrition, and the interactions between demography and threats to life such as disease, and the way in which reproduction is integrated into the lifespan.
This paper explores current developments in the discipline, and how advances in theory and method in anthropology and related disciplines are having an impact on anthropology and the understanding of the human species and its diversity. Emphasis is on the understanding of analytical methods and assessment of hypotheses to tackle problems in biological anthropology.
The aim of these papers is to examine in detail particular subjects in biological anthropology and related disciplines. Topics for special subjects will be announced by the Faculty Board, and details of the syllabus will be provided in the course handbook.
Kinship and economics have been linked in the major theories of production, reproduction, and exchange. The course for this paper considers the conditions under which kinship becomes an organizing template for economic relations, and its bearing on group dynamics and gender relations. New patterns of marriage, conjugality, sexuality, and procreation throw into relief the continuing relevance of classic kinship theory. Under the rubric of economics, the course treats the nature and interaction of different systems of production, distribution, and exchange, and historical processes of economic transformation; it reviews different ways of conceptualizing the economy, the works of major theorists, and key contemporary debates in economic anthropology.
The course for this paper brings together politics and religion. Under politics, it deals with theories of the state; inequality; war and violence; law and dispute-settlement; political action, strategy, and tactics; ‘fourth-world’ political action and resistance; social movements; the role of ideology and theories of governance. Under religion, the course deals with the major anthropological theories of religion and their relation to systems of knowledge and ideology. Specific fields covered include ritual and sacrifice; spirit possession and shamanism; forms of traditional knowledge and classification; world religions; the transformation of religion in the contemporary world. Emphasis will be given to the many links between politics and religion.
This course provides a grounding in sociological theories and discusses their relation to more recent anthropological theory and methods. Topics to be discussed include: eighteenth and nineteenth century social theory; Marx, Durkheim, Simmel, Weber, Mauss; functionalism, structural-functionalism; structuralism; cultural materialism and neo-Marxism; interpretative anthropology, semiology, and symbolic anthropology. These theories are seen in the context of anthropological field research and the various types of anthropological writing.
The courses for this paper will normally cover anthropological perspectives on mind, thought, and belief. Particular concerns may be expected to include the anthropology of cognition, knowledge, and belief systems, and the anthropological study of ethics and moral economy.
The courses for this paper will normally cover anthropological perspectives on political economy and processes of social transformation. Particular concerns may be expected to include anthropological contributions to the study of value, property, and domination, and the growth and legacy of modern social forms including capitalism and socialism.
Candidates will be required to offer one ethnographic area from a choice of three, which will be specified by the Faculty Board each year and will be taken from the following list: Europe, Latin America, Inner Asia, South Asia, Southeast Asia, the Pacific, Africa.
Up to five papers will be available each year. These are currently drawn from the following list:
This course is concerned with illness and healing in comparative perspective. It discusses ideas of health and illness, causation and healing, how they are constructed and how they change. A wide range of societies provides the examples of different approaches, from urban and industrialized contexts to relatively isolated, self-sufficient settings. Alternative systems of medicine and local regional systems, as well as the impact of western biomedicine on local regional systems, are considered in relation to medical pluralism and contexts of practice. Attention is also given to the cultural understanding of the body in illness, and to the management of childbirth and reproduction in different societies. Teaching for the course is by lecture and seminar.
While a primary objective of this paper is to examine the processes of city transformation in recent times, attention is also paid to pre-twentieth century and non-European cities. Processes of urbanization bring out the political, economic, and cultural complexities of city social organization. Images of the city are approached through examining utopian thought and experimentation, social engineering, urban planning, and forms of architecture. The city as a symbolic form and as a centre of power is addressed through studies of urban rituals, processions, commemorations, buildings, and through consideration of the relationships between space, the body, and gender. The paper also includes an examination of the ways in which the city has been theorized, and the problems of reconciling the distinctive method of fieldwork-based anthropology when applied to the large-scale organizational complexity of urban life.
This paper aims to use a variety of disciplinary perspectives to explore powerful new developments in the experience and understandings of gender and kinship in the context of the emergent field of ‘care’. The course addresses recent developments in gender theory and global changes in the nature of intimacy. It examines anthropological evidence of the re-emergence of more traditional kinship and gender relations in new forms. Cross-cultural studies of same-sex and heterosexual relationships and especially friendships will be examined so as to better theorize the ways in which care is being reconfigured both within and outside normative kinship configurations. The new theorization of care builds upon the new ways of caring for the sick, frail, and elderly as well as the young and examines policy concerns about the failures of parents in the care of children. It also examines care as a form of governance and identifies the ways in which the multiple and culturally specific ways of ‘caring’ are often not recognized by the state which increasingly seeks to standardize practices of care and divest them of their socio-cultural meanings and significances. Themes to be addressed include: gender and work/family balance, migration and the international division of reproductive labour (employed care givers and global ‘care-chains’), ‘caring capitalism’, new models and practices of parenting, domestic and state coercions, public planning, and state policy in the realm of care.
The professionalization of anthropology as a social science resulted among other things in the definition of the discipline through a specific kind of empirical research (fieldwork) and a specific narrative form (ethnography). There are of course other professionals who address issues central to anthropological concerns: other social scientists, philosophers, historians, novelists, and poets – many of whom borrow from anthropological works and whose works are borrowed as well. This paper seeks to broaden the basis on which anthropological texts may be analysed as well as to broaden critical awareness of anthropological inquiry beyond textual form. Both the bases on which anthropological knowledge came to be defined and the grounds on which these bases may be re-evaluated critically are presented, including an examination of the professionalization of anthropology, and the intellectual traditions influential in this process; the theoretical question of ‘representation’, and how ‘others’ represent themselves to themselves. In collaboration with the Faculty of English, the paper addresses aspects of literary theory through the consideration of specific texts and literary techniques, poetics, the use of ‘multimedia’, and what one may learn from the parallel examinations of anthropological and non-anthropological texts.
This paper draws attention to the aesthetic and performative aspects of human communication. It provides an introduction to the main perspectives anthropologists have brought to an understanding of the visual and performing arts. While the paper provides a broad cross-cultural overview of distinctive artistic practices and productions, each year a section of the course focuses in some detail on a particular cultural area. Where appropriate the course will draw on the extensive collections of the Museum of Archaeology and Anthropology and the video library held within the Department of Archaeology and Anthropology. Topics for study are drawn from the following areas: theories of non-western art and aesthetics; social and technical aspects of artistic production and consumption; the use of different media in anthropological analysis; the poetics and politics of representation; museology; masking and body decoration; the anthropology of dance; aspects of ethnomusicology; and analyses of film and advertising.
This paper covers social, economic, and political aspects of ‘development’, with particular reference to the experience of the poorer countries since World War II and to the theories and practical involvement of anthropologists. Case studies of development projects of rural and urban areas are analysed, with particular attention being paid to indigenous knowledge, and the participation of local people in projects which transform their lives. Other themes include socialist development, the demise of ‘peasant economy’, and the emergence of new social movements in Third World cities. Anthropological approaches to the study of policy, planning, and development organizations are also considered and throughout the course students are encouraged to maintain a critical stance towards the very concept of ‘development’.
The paper aims to examine the societies of the former Soviet Union and Eastern and Central Europe as they are currently undergoing transformation. Virtually all of them have abandoned socialism for different political and economic paths. The aim of this paper is to understand (a) what actually existing socialism was, (b) the causes and consequences of its collapse, and (c) what heritage or residue of socialism remains in the post-socialist societies. We examine the processes of transformation, in political, economic, social, and cultural terms. The paper focuses particularly on ways in which we can analyse the experience of sudden change, the associated phenomena labelled as ‘development’ or ‘regression’, emerging social and familial forms, new attitudes to history and memory, and changes in ‘high’ and popular culture, ideology, and values.
The aim of this paper is to offer a critical introduction to the literature on nationalism, race, and ethnicity both in and outside anthropology, and to explore the ideas advanced in that literature in relation to material drawn from specific historical and cultural contexts. This includes the intellectual history of the concepts of, respectively, nation and race, to be examined through the main relevant theoretical literature. Historical, anthropological, and sociological approaches are covered. Specific case material, drawn from a range of geographical and historical contexts, will address issues such as the politics of identity in Britain; thinking about conflict in Northern Ireland; ‘tribalism’ and the culture of post-colonial states in sub-Saharan Africa; communal identities and violence in South Asia; religion and communal mobilization; Diaspora communities and transnationalism; gendering the nation. The examples vary from time to time.
Focusing on a wide range of regional case studies, this paper explores the emergence of colonial politics, cultures, and imperial systems of power as objects of anthropological analysis, and considers the ways in which both the making and unmaking of Western as well as non-Western imperial systems have had ramifications for the societies and cultures studied by anthropologists. A variety of theoretical and interpretive approaches will be discussed, but the main emphasis will be on ethnographic accounts, and on the anthropological implications of historical studies. A wide range of examples may be covered, including social, cultural, and political transformations arising from Western colonial conquest and rule in Asia, Africa, and the Americas, and aspects of empire as conceptualized and experienced under Chinese, Ottoman, and/or Russian/Soviet rule.
Legal frameworks have re-emerged, in the contemporary period, as ways to justify social and political action. The language of ‘the law’ pervades a multiplicity of arenas, both local and global, implicating experience, personhood, and subjectivity. The aim of this paper is to show the way the law is used as a vehicle to structure relations, whether between states, between colonized and colonizer, or between special interest groups (as in the case of new technologies). Legal systems acquire a social and cultural character of their own, appearing to be departments of modern life and thus potential ethnographic objects. If such systems represent themselves as normative and rational, from an anthropological view they are contextualized by other phenomena. The course explores what it means to study legal systems, and in doing so opens up questions about organizing concepts (such as ‘rights’) of major contemporary importance.
The aim of this paper is to offer a critical exploration of recent developments and debates in the anthropology of science in a wide range of social and regional settings, as well as across diverse traditions of thought. The course explores what it means to study societal, institutional, and epistemic conditions of science and scientific knowledge production through a comparative frame. From an anthropological view the critical study of ‘cross-cultural science’ as ethnographic object puts into political relief the way that encounters between ‘parallel worlds’, ‘purity’, ‘hybridity’, ‘reliability’, ‘evidence’, ‘verification’, and so on are justified as particular social forms and moral action claims.
1. The Architecture Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II. A separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
3. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ia of the Architecture Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept four terms, and has satisfied the Examiners in studio-work in the examination for Part Ia.
4. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ib of the Architecture Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term; and no student who has been a candidate for honours in any Part shall again be a candidate for honours in the same Part.
6. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 5, a student who is not eligible to be a candidate for honours shall be entitled to take the examination for any Part of the Architecture Tripos as a candidate not for honours for the purpose of qualifying for exemption from professional examinations, provided that he or she has obtained honours in another Honours Examination and, if a candidate for Part Ib or Part II, has satisfied the requirements of these regulations in so far as they relate to studio-work.
7. To conduct the examination in each Part the Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient. The Board shall have power to nominate Assessors to the Examiners for any of the papers. The Assessors shall be responsible for setting the questions in the subject or subjects assigned to them and for advising the Examiners on the candidates’ performance in those questions.
8. In each Part the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. A mark of distinction may be affixed to the names of those candidates placed in the first class whose work either in a part or in the whole of the examination is of special merit. In the class-lists for Part Ia and Part Ib, a mark s shall be attached to the names of those candidates who have satisfied the Examiners in studio-work.
9. The names of candidates who, having presented themselves under the provisions of Regulation 6, attain the honours standard shall be published in a list headed ‘The following who are not candidates for honours have attained the honours standard’.
10. The Faculty Board shall have power to make supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects set out in the following regulations as they think fit.
11. Public notice of subjects, special periods, and books prescribed under the following regulations or under any supplementary regulations shall be given by the Faculty Board (a) for Part Ia and for Part Ib of the Tripos, not later than the Easter Term next preceding the examination to which they apply, and (b) for Part II of the Tripos, not later than the Easter Term next but one preceding the examination to which they apply; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
12. The examination for Part Ia of the Architecture Tripos shall consist of three sections:
Section A. Five papers as follows:
Paper 1. |
An introduction to the histories and theories of architecture to 1800. |
Paper 2. |
An introduction to the histories and theories of architecture from 1800 to the present. |
Paper 3. |
Fundamental principles of construction. |
Paper 4. |
Fundamental principles of structural design. |
Paper 5. |
Fundamental principles of environmental design. |
Section B. Studio-work.
Section C. Course-work.
13. A candidate for Part Ia shall be required:
The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of all the course-work carried out by candidates of which records have been presented under (c).
14. The examination for Part Ib of the Architecture Tripos shall consist of three sections:
Section A. |
(i) |
Two papers (Papers 1 and 2) on historical and theoretical topics concerning architecture and its setting. For Paper 1 candidates will be required to submit two essays of 2,000 words. Paper 2 shall be assessed by a three-hour written examination. |
(ii) |
Three introductory papers (Papers 3–5) on technical topics concerning the theory and practice of construction and of structural and environmental design. |
|
Section B. |
Studio-work. |
|
Section C. |
Course-work. |
15. A candidate for Part Ib shall be required:
Detailed instructions will be issued by the Department, by the division of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination, regarding the coverage of prescribed texts and topics and any other requirements for the portfolio as a whole. Candidates will be required to declare that the essays are their own work. The essays shall consist of work done for supervisions and shall be in English and submitted with supervisors’ comments but without revision of any kind by the candidate. They shall be submitted by the candidate to the Secretary of the Faculty Board, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board, so as to arrive not later than the first Friday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination takes place. Candidates may be called for viva voce examination in connection with their portfolios.
The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of all the course-work carried out by candidates of which records have been presented under (c).
16. The examination for Part II of the Architecture Tripos shall consist of four sections:
Section A. |
(i) |
One paper on the theoretical and historical aspects of architecture and urbanism (Paper 1). |
|
(ii) |
Three papers (Papers 2–4) on the technical aspects of the theory and practice of construction and of structural and environmental design. |
Section B. |
Studio-work. |
|
Section C. |
Course-work. |
|
Section D. |
A thesis, or an alternative exercise approved by the Faculty Board, on a subject approved by the Faculty Board. |
Papers 1–3 in Section A shall be examined by written papers, each of which shall be of three hours’ duration. Paper 4 shall be examined by the submission of course-work.
17. A candidate for Part II shall be required:
The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of all the course-work carried out by candidates of which records have been presented under (c).
18. (a) Not later than 1 June each year the Faculty Board shall publish by Notice in the Department of Architecture a list of subject areas for the thesis or other exercise required for Section D in the examination to be held in the following academical year. In publishing the list the Faculty Board shall specify what types of exercise (if any) are permitted as alternatives to a thesis.
(b) Each candidate shall submit the proposed subject of his or her thesis or other exercise to the Secretary of the Faculty Board not later than the end of the third quarter of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. A candidate may propose either (i) a subject that falls within one of the subject areas in the list published by the Faculty Board under sub-paragraph (a) above, or (ii) a subject of the candidate's own choice.
(c) Each candidate shall obtain the approval of the proposed subject by the Faculty Board not later than the last day of the Michaelmas Term.
(d) The Secretary of the Faculty Board shall notify the Examiners of candidates’ subjects; the Examiners shall have power to impose restrictions on the questions that a candidate may offer in Paper 1, and shall inform candidates of any such restrictions not later than the end of the first quarter of the Easter Term.
19. A thesis presented under Regulation 17(d) shall be of not less than 7,000 words and not more than 9,000 words in length, including notes, appendices, and bibliography; an alternative exercise shall be of comparable substance. Each thesis shall be printed or typewritten, and shall be submitted through the candidate's Tutor to the Head of the Department of Architecture so as to arrive not later than the first day of Full Easter Term. Each candidate will be required to sign a declaration that the thesis is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
20. In each Part the Examiners may impose such oral and practical tests as they think fit, and in drawing up the class-list they shall take into account the candidates’ performance in all such tests, and in the studio-work and course-work, as well as in the written papers and theses or alternative exercises, together with the assessment of course-work presented by the Head of the Department. A candidate for Part II may be examined viva voce, at the discretion of the Examiners, on the subject of his or her thesis or alternative exercise.
The paper deals with a selective introduction to the histories of architecture and the city in Western Europe and to theoretical writings on architecture and the role of the architect from classical antiquity to the start of the nineteenth century.
The paper deals with a selective introduction to the histories of architecture and the city in Western Europe and to theoretical writings on architecture and the role of the architect from the nineteenth century to the present.
The paper may include questions on the development of construction methods, the elementary principles of construction of small buildings, and the basic properties of construction materials.
The paper may include questions on the elementary principles of structural design of buildings, on simple statics, stress analysis, and strength of structural materials.
The paper may include questions on the elementary principles of environmental control in buildings and servicing of buildings.
The essays submitted for this paper must relate to the subject matter of the history and theory lecture courses given for Paper 2 in the Michaelmas and Lent Terms.
The courses of lectures for this paper will be specified from time to time by the Faculty Board of Architecture and History of Art and will cover topics from the history and theory of architecture, urbanism, and design.
This paper may include questions on the principles governing the use of constructional elements in complex building types, properties of materials, dimensional co-ordination, analysis of simple methods of enveloping space.
This paper may include questions on the structural aspects of architectural design, the behaviour of structural elements under load, the use of load-bearing brickwork, steel, and reinforced concrete, systems of roof spanning and their calculation, the mathematical and graphical determination of simple structural systems.
This paper may include questions on the principles of environmental control and functional design, the practical applications of the principles of thermal response, of acoustics, and of lighting in buildings, micro-climate, planning and designing for user needs.
The paper will be divided into a number of sections corresponding to the topics or periods in the theory and history of architecture and urbanism announced by the Faculty Board under the provisions of Regulation 18(a). Under the provisions of Regulation 18(b) the Faculty Board shall have power to debar a candidate from attempting a specified section or sections.
1. The Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
3. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ib:18
4. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part II:18
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part. No candidate shall offer a paper he or she has previously offered in any other Honours Examination.
7. The Faculty Board shall have the power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of the examination, and to modify, alter or withdraw such supplementary regulations, provided that due care is taken to give sufficient notice of any change.
8. The Faculty Board shall have the power to prescribe, not later than the end of the Easter Term in the year next before the examination to which they apply, a number of additional papers to be offered to candidates in each subject of both Part Ib and Part II of the examination, providing that (i) the Faculty Board are not required to offer additional papers in Part Ib and (ii) at least two papers shall be prescribed in each subject in Part II. When giving notice of the additional papers, the Faculty Board shall prescribe the mode of examination for each paper and any restrictions on the combination of papers that any candidate may offer. The Faculty Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for so doing and if they are satisfied that no student’s preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
9. There shall be a separate body of Examiners for each Part. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners for each Part as they may deem sufficient. For each body of Examiners, the Faculty Board shall also have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners.
10. The Examiners shall set, and shall be responsible for marking, all written papers except papers from another Tripos, and shall also mark dissertations submitted under Regulations 22 and 23. If required to do so, Assessors shall propose questions in the subject or subjects assigned to them, shall review the answers of candidates to those questions, and shall report as required to the Examiners. An Assessor may be summoned, for the purpose of consultation and advice, to meetings of the relevant body of Examiners, but shall not be entitled to vote.
11. The subject matter for each oral examination shall be approved by the body of Examiners for the corresponding Part. Two Examiners or Assessors shall conduct the oral examination of each candidate.
12. The Examiners shall have regard to the style and method of candidates’ answers and shall give credit for excellence in these respects. They shall give due credit for the performance of candidates in the oral examinations. The Examiners shall be empowered to examine any candidate viva voce.
13. The names of those candidates who deserve honours in each Part shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. Each class-list shall also indicate the subject or subjects which each candidate has offered in the examination. A mark of distinction may be awarded for special excellence.
14. The subjects of examination in Part Ia shall be as follows:
East Asian Studies
Middle Eastern Studies
Middle Eastern Studies with a Modern Language
Each candidate shall offer one subject.
15. The papers for the examination in Part Ia shall be as follows:
EAS.1 |
Introduction to East Asian history |
C.1 C.2 C.3 |
Modern Chinese translation and writing 1 Modern Chinese texts 1 Literary Chinese 1 |
J.1 J.2 J.3 |
Modern Japanese 1 Japanese grammar and translation Modern Japanese texts 1 |
MES.1 MES.2 MES.3 MES.4 MES.5 MES.6 MES.7 |
Elementary Arabic language A Elementary Arabic language B (one and a half hour written examination) Elementary Persian language Elementary Hebrew language A Elementary Hebrew language B Introduction to the history and culture of the Middle East Introduction to the contemporary Middle East |
X.1 |
Akkadian I (Paper ARC4 of Part I of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos) |
X.2 |
Egyptian language I (Paper ARC5 of Part I of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos) |
Unless otherwise specified, all papers consist of a three-hour written examination.
16. There shall be separate examinations for each subject, as specified below:
17. The subjects of examination in Part Ib shall be as follows:
East Asian Studies
Middle Eastern Studies
Middle Eastern Studies with a Modern Language
Each candidate shall offer one subject.
18. The papers for the examination in Part Ib shall be as follows:
AMES.1 |
Cinema East |
C.4 C.5 C.6 C.7 C.8 |
Modern Chinese translation and writing 2 Modern Chinese texts 2 Literary Chinese 2 History of dynastic China Globalization in China, 1850 to the present (an essay of 8,000 words, to be submitted not later than the first day of Full Easter Term) |
J.4 J.5 J.6 J.7 J.8 J.9 J.10 |
Modern Japanese 2 Modern Japanese texts 2 Japanese history Literary Japanese Japanese literary modernity Japanese society Japanese politics |
MES.11 MES.12 MES.13 MES.14 MES.15 MES.16 MES.17 MES.18 MES.19 MES.20 |
Intermediate Arabic language Intermediate Persian language Intermediate Hebrew language Intermediate literary Arabic Intermediate literary Persian Intermediate literary Hebrew The formation of Islam Topics in Hebrew studies The formation of the modern Middle East Themes in the anthropology of Islam |
X.3 X.4
X.5 |
Structures and meanings (Paper 2 of the Linguistics Tripos) Life, thought, and worship of modern Judaism (Paper B14 of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos) Introduction to Islam (Paper B15 of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos) |
X.6 |
Akkadian language II (Paper M1 of Parts IIa and IIb of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos)19 |
X.7 |
Egyptian language II (Paper E1 of Parts IIa and IIb of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos)20 |
X.8 |
Sounds and words (Paper 1 of the Linguistics Tripos) |
X.13 |
Language, brain, and society (Paper 3 of the Linguistics Tripos) |
Unless otherwise specified, all papers consist of a three-hour written examination.
19. There shall be separate examinations for each subject, as specified below:
20. The subjects of examination in Part II shall be as follows:
Chinese
Chinese with Japanese
Japanese
Japanese with Chinese
Middle Eastern Studies
Middle Eastern Studies with a Modern Language
Each candidate shall offer one subject.
21. The papers for the examination in Part II shall be as follows:
C.11 |
Modern Chinese translation and writing 3 |
C.12 |
Modern Chinese texts 3 |
C.13 |
Literary Chinese 3 |
J.11 |
Modern Japanese 3 |
J.12 |
Modern Japanese texts 3 |
MES.31 |
Advanced Arabic language |
MES.32 |
Advanced Persian language |
MES.33 |
Advanced Hebrew language |
MES.34 |
Advanced literary Arabic |
MES.35 |
Advanced literary Persian |
MES.36 |
Advanced literary Hebrew |
Unless otherwise specified, all papers consist of a three-hour written examination.
22. There shall be separate examinations for each subject, as specified below:
23. Any candidate submitting a dissertation under Regulation 22 shall be required to have spent a period of at least eight months, since matriculation, in a country or countries deemed appropriate by the Faculty Board and under conditions approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board,23 providing that the Faculty Board may waive this requirement under exceptional circumstances.
A candidate who is required to submit a dissertation under Regulation 22 shall submit the proposed title, together with a statement of the papers to be offered in the examination, to the Secretary of the Faculty Board so as to arrive not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. Each candidate must obtain the approval of the proposed title by the Faculty Board not later than the end of that term. A dissertation, which shall be of not more than 12,000 words in length (inclusive of notes and appendices), should show evidence of reading, judgement, and power of exposition, but not necessarily evidence of original research, and must give full references to the sources used. One electronic and two paper copies of each dissertation, marked with the candidate’s examination number, shall be submitted in a format specified by the Faculty Board from time to time to the Secretary of the Faculty Board so as to arrive not later than the third day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
Each candidate will be required to sign a declaration that the dissertation is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. Each copy of the dissertation shall be accompanied by a summary of not more than 300 words in English, except that a candidate offering a dissertation under Regulation 22(a) (Chinese) shall furnish instead a summary in Chinese of not less than 600 characters. The maximum marks allocated to the dissertation shall be one quarter of the maximum marks for the examination as a whole.
24. The Faculty Board shall have power to grant permission to a candidate for any Part of the Tripos to offer in the examination a subject or language other than those specified in Regulations 14, 17, and 20, provided that the Board are satisfied:
Applications for such permission shall be made through the candidate’s Tutor to the Secretary of the Faculty Board at the earliest possible date and in no circumstances later than the following dates:
the division of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination, for a candidate taking Part Ia or Part Ib;
the division of the Easter Term in the year next but one preceding the examination, for a candidate taking Part II.
For subjects offered under this regulation the Faculty Board shall have power to determine the papers to be set, in general conformity with the provisions of Regulations 16, 19, and 22.
25. Not later than the division of Full Michaelmas Term each year the Secretary of the Faculty Board shall inform the Registrary of any subjects for which permission has been granted under Regulation 24, together with the names of the candidates to whom such permission has been granted.
The course covers the history of East Asia thematically from the earliest times to the present, focusing on China, Japan, and Korea. Students will read literature, historical monographs, and primary sources to familiarize themselves with various types of historical evidence.
This course is to enable students to use basic elements of Chinese grammar correctly, use Chinese over a range of everyday situations, write basic Chinese and translate English into Chinese at the sentence level, and write simple essays in Chinese.
Modern Chinese is taught intensively throughout the year, and in this paper students are required to translate passages in modern Chinese into English. This paper is mainly designed to assess the student’s ability in understanding and translating simple Chinese texts.
An introduction to the literary Chinese language. The course introduces students to basic vocabulary, syntax, and grammar of the classical period. Excursions are made into the etymology of graphs, the origins of common proverbs and set phrases as well as the intellectual world behind the selected text passages.
The course aims to teach students modern Japanese with primary emphasis on reading and writing. The textbook used for this purpose is Bowring and Laurie, Introduction to Modern Japanese. In the Michaelmas and Lent Terms students undergo an intensive study of the grammar of modern Japanese. In the Easter Term the course focuses on the development of students’ listening and speaking skills.
This paper is taught in conjunction with J.1 in the Michaelmas and Lent Terms and separately in the Easter Term. It also draws upon skills learned in tackling the texts in J.3, both in terms of ability to construe Japanese texts and in terms of understanding of grammatical patterns.
The reading of one or two short stories in order to put into practice the skills and knowledge learned in the Michaelmas and Lent Terms.
These two papers are taught as a single course. The aim is to equip students to read and write Modern Standard Arabic, and cover all the basic grammar, and to hold simple conversations in one particular Arabic dialect.
This paper introduces students to Persian grammar and the written and oral use of the language (listening and comprehension practice in the language laboratory). Reading classes expose students to the language in action and to a variety of usages of the grammatical rules.
In this course students are introduced to the language of the Hebrew Bible. In Michaelmas Term students will concentrate on working through the textbook Introduction to Biblical Hebrew by T. Lambdin. In Lent Term the focus will be on a philologically and linguistically oriented reading of Genesis 1–4 (and possibly related texts) along with the integration of secondary literature dealing with pertinent issues of both a linguistic and non-linguistic nature.
In this course, students acquire competence in spoken and written Modern Hebrew. Classes will cover Modern Hebrew grammar and representative texts from Modern Hebrew literature. All students taking this course also take an introductory course on Biblical Hebrew grammar in the Michaelmas Term and are required to answer one question on Biblical Hebrew in the examination.
This paper provides an introduction to the history of the Middle East and the political, religious, and cultural developments of the different regions and periods. It aims to familiarize the student with the sources of information available and with the main themes that will arise in studying Middle Eastern societies in subsequent years of the Tripos.
This paper provides a critical introduction to the languages, cultures, and literatures of the Middle East.
The course provides students with the opportunity to explore the film traditions of East Asia through a number of possible themes, including modernity, identity and nation, and genre. These broad concerns encompass common themes of comparative significance, such as gender, city and countryside, love, marriage, and family and violence and are expressed in genres such as melodrama. Each student will give two presentations and write two essays (1,500–2,000 words) each term, one on each of the four sections of the course; feedback on these will be given in supervisions or in group discussions.
This course aims to develop the students’ ability to translate English texts into Chinese and to write Chinese compositions of various styles, such as letters, messages, notices, narration.
This course enables students to read modern Chinese writings, both literary and non-literary. Information about authors, the background, and the linguistic and stylistic features of the texts is provided as appropriate. The purpose is to give students experience of intensive and extensive reading. Students read unabridged texts from beginning to end, thus increasing their vocabulary and familiarity with modern written Chinese and advancing their understanding of aspects of Chinese historical and cultural experience in 20th-century and contemporary China.
An introduction to selected works of poetry, prose, and fiction in literary Chinese. The course draws on texts ranging from early medieval to late imperial times. Students are introduced to the basic features of grammar and genre and the intellectual and historical background of the readings in question.
The history of dynastic China from the Qin through Qing periods. The course, consisting of lectures and essay seminars, introduces students to the formative political, social, economic, religious, and cultural features that defined the Chinese empire.
The history of globalization in China from the Taiping Rebellion in the mid nineteenth century until today. For the century after 1850, it will examine the rise of the large vibrant port cities that resulted from the rapid expansion of foreign trade and became centres of social, political, and cultural change. It will also analyse Chinese migration, the emergence of Chinese forms of modernity, the rise of resistance movements to Western financial imperialism, and the effects of revolution and warfare. China’s current phase of globalization will be placed against the background of this earlier phase of globalization.
The main aims of this course are that students: (a) acquire the ability to understand intermediate written and spoken Japanese; (b) acquire the ability to express themselves in Japanese in a limited range of topics; (c) increase competence in written skills.
Reading selected twentieth-century Japanese literary and non-literary texts, with attention to style and content, the aim being to gain proficiency in reading, pronouncing, translating, and interpreting modern prose.
Topics in the history of Japan in the 19th and 20th centuries. In order to analyse Japan’s current relations with its Asian counterparts, the course also examines Japan’s shifting self-image and foreign relations over the centuries, with particular focus on China.
An introduction to the grammar of literary, pre-modern Japanese, followed by readings of simple prose and poetry. Some essay work on aspects of classical literature is also required.
An introduction to modern and contemporary Japanese fiction. The course covers a number of topics, including the aesthetics and politics of literary modernity, colonial writing, the development of women’s fiction, or Japanese postmodernity, while studying in some detail works of representative writers from the late Meiji era to recent decades.
An introduction to Japanese society, its current phenomena and their historical and cultural background. Starting from our own images and influential descriptions of Japanese society, this course will investigate family, demography, education, work, and leisure, as well as life stages and different aspects of daily (and nightly) life of the various social groups.
An introduction to post-1945 Japanese politics examining Japan’s political parties and institutions from a comparative perspective. In considering the distinctiveness of the Japanese political system, it addresses a number of central issues including Japan’s economic growth, central-local government relations, the legal system, and the politics of defence and foreign policy. The paper pays particular attention to the nature of domestic political change since the mid 1990s as well as the economic and security policy challenges for a country that is increasingly active both globally and regionally. In analysing Japan’s politics comparatively, the paper also addresses the issues of authorization and democratization in Korea, Korea’s post-1945 political economy, and the security aspects of the Korean peninsula.
The aim of this course is to consolidate students’ understanding of Arabic grammar and expand their vocabulary so that they can confidently read a range of Arabic materials such as newspaper and magazine articles, and to develop their speaking and listening skills and their speaking in one particular dialect of Arabic.
This paper consists of language work, building on the four major language skills of reading, listening, writing, and speaking. In addition, the students read a variety of texts in modern Persian as language exercises, for translation, and vocabulary build-up.
This paper enables students to deepen their knowledge of Hebrew. There will be two sections containing questions on classical Hebrew and Modern Hebrew respectively. Candidates taking the Modern Hebrew option will have an oral as part of their paper.
This paper introduces students to a variety of Arabic literary texts to enhance their understanding of textual analysis and linguistic expression.
This paper provides an introduction to Persian literary texts, using a selection of readings from classical prose writers and poets. The objective is both to introduce major classical Persian authors and to see the written language in action as a vehicle for literary expression.
In this course students have the opportunity to study modern and medieval literary texts. The focus will be on the literary analysis and the historical contextualization of selected texts.
A thematic survey of Islamic history in the first four centuries dealing with key aspects of the religious, political, social, and cultural evolution of classical Muslim societies. The course will include introductions to the Qur’an, Hadith, and Islamic law as well as a variety of historical texts reflecting the world view of Muslims of this era.
This course will enable students to study the special topics of (i) the history of the Hebrew language and (ii) modern Hebrew culture (literature, film, history).
This paper examines key moments in the formation of the modern Middle East and North Africa with an emphasis on developing an understanding of the periods of transition and conflict that have shaped and defined modern societies in the region since the nineteenth century. The course is divided into three sections: the Ottoman empire and the Arab world, Iran, and Israel.
This course introduces anthropological approaches to the Middle East and Islam, and examines the relationship between different forms of knowledge about the Middle East and the modern political history of the region.
This course enables students (a) to use an extensive range of Chinese vocabulary, idioms, and expressions in translation into Chinese and in Chinese essay writing, (b) to produce appropriate degrees of formality in translating and writing, and (c) to write in Chinese on various topics and in different styles.
The course continues the work done in the acquisition of the modern Chinese language in previous years. Students will be presented with various types of texts, ranging from modern and contemporary fiction, newspapers, and articles on contemporary China, to scholarly writings and government documents.
This course introduces advanced selections of poetry, prose, and fiction in literary Chinese. The course draws on texts ranging from early medieval to late imperial times. Students will be introduced to features of grammar and genre as well as the intellectual and historical background of the readings in question.
The main aims of the course are that students: (a) acquire the ability to understand advanced written and spoken Japanese; (b) acquire the ability to discuss, in Japanese, a wide range of topics; (c) increase competence in written skills.
This course consists of reading texts in advanced modern Japanese with much attention given not only to grammar and syntax but also to context. Supplementary reading will also be expected.
This paper aims to develop students’ reading and writing skills in Modern Standard Arabic. Students are introduced to a range of academic and literary texts in order to develop their ability to follow complex discussions and improve their understanding of linguistic structures. Classes run completely in Arabic.
This paper aims to develop students’ reading, writing, speaking, and listening skills. The students will write essays and prepare presentations in Persian.
This paper enables students to develop their skills in writing and translating Hebrew and in critically assessing passages of Hebrew literature. There will be two sections containing questions on classical Hebrew and Modern Hebrew respectively. Candidates taking the Modern Hebrew option will have an oral as part of their paper.
This paper introduces students to a selection of advanced texts to enhance their understanding of textual analysis and linguistic expression and to develop their knowledge of literary historical and critical approaches. One or more types of Arabic writing from one or more periods will be the focus of sustained study.
This paper uses a selection of either classical or contemporary Persian poetry and prose, to study the treatment of particular themes and rhetoric techniques.
This paper focuses on themes of interest and importance in Modern and Medieval Hebrew literature.
The papers available will be drawn from the following lists:
A seminar-based course that extends the comparative approach adopted in EAS.1. It concentrates on thematic and policy issues relevant to understanding Japan, the Korean peninsula, China (broadly defined), and also Southeast Asia, as well as the role of the United States in East Asia. The course runs over two terms and draws explicitly on historical research and social science methodology in addressing how best to conceptualize ‘East Asia’ as a region. Topics addressed will vary from year to year, depending on the research interests of the teaching officers involved, but an indicative list of subjects covered in the course would include some, but not necessarily all of the following issues: the Cold War as a historical phenomenon; conflict and war in East Asia and contemporary security challenges; comparative models of economic development in East Asia and the role of ‘plan-rational’ policy-making; the role of the nation-state and competing models of historical identity; multilateralism, the emergence of trans-national actors and economic integration in East Asia; political legitimacy, contrasting models of authoritarian rule, and democratization as a political movement; demographic change; energy and environmental policy and technological change.
This course examines the contemporary form of East Asian cultural production known as the ‘Korean wave.’ Since the mid-1990s, South Korean pop culture has enjoyed tremendous popularity throughout Asia. This phenomenon marks an unusual moment in East Asian history as the economic rise of China has not led to Chinese cultural hegemony. By studying the Korean wave, it is possible to come to a better understanding of the dynamics of East Asia in the era of globalization and the possibility of the emergence of a pan-Asian identity. This paper focuses on two of the principal genres of the Korean wave, television dramas and cinema. Through a detailed study of representative works, it will examine issues such as Korean national identity, collective memory, melodrama, the Confucian family in the modern world, and the globalization of media cultures. Social and historical contexts, changes in film production and patterns of consumption, and the development of the Korean film industry on the global stage will be considered, as well as the key aspects of genre and film style.
This course involves the intensive study of texts that are specifically linked to the special subject that the student has chosen.
While never constant and always debated, in the course of Chinese history certain fundamental approaches emerged toward government, organizing society, prosecuting warfare, communicating, pursuing personal profit, and thinking about the supernatural. This lecture course will examine these approaches, discuss their historical development, and analyse how they still impact on China today. Topics may include the role of Confucianism in traditional China and its revival today, Chinese attitudes towards human and natural environments, aesthetics and the arts, religious practices, popular mobilizations against authority, attitudes toward poverty, wealth, redistribution and consumption, the organization of commerce, and governmentality.
This is an advanced, seminar-based, course with alternate modules on early and medieval China and late imperial China. The paper engages students in an in-depth study of the central socio-religious, philosophical, and socio-economic paradigms that shaped early and dynastic Chinese society. Students are asked to work with key primary sources of the period concerned and examine related secondary scholarship. The paper seeks to identify the origins of ideas, social practices, and institutions that have permeated traditional Chinese society and have shaped the Chinese tradition up to the present day. Thematic rubrics explored in this paper may vary and cover topics such as cosmology and correlative thought, the Confucian classics, the Buddhist and the Daoist traditions, sacrificial religion, food culture, ritual and law, perceptions of the body and medicine, writing and print culture, agriculture and mercantile culture, urban and local culture.
The course aims to introduce undergraduates to the field of modern Chinese literature as it evolved through the 20th century and up to the present. Literature, whether popular or elite, has had a vital place in modern experience. In the first term students become familiar with some of the major canonical writers and issues. Teaching in the second term is organized around a particular topic: possible examples are post-Mao and contemporary fiction; fiction and film in Republican popular culture; Chinese modernism.
The Taiping Rebellion, the Sino-Japanese War of 1894–95, the Allied Invasion of 1900, the warlord wars of the 1910 and 1920s, the War of Resistance against Japan from 1931 to 1945, the Chinese-Communist Civil War of 1945 to 1946, and the Korean War from 1950 to 1953 all have impacted on China’s historical development in modern times. This course will examine these wars themselves, but will focus on their cultural, social, and political effects. It will also analyse their impact on dominant ideas Chinese have about themselves, their relations with other countries, and their position in the world.
This course is designed to acquaint students with the nature and workings of the Chinese language and to help them establish a linguistic framework for the description and analysis of Chinese. It will enable students to understand and explain typological and syntactic differences between Chinese and English on the basis of linguistic theories, and to introduce them to some contentious issues in the study of the Chinese language.
An introduction to key socio-political and cultural developments in reform-era China (from the early 1980s to the present), while situating them in the historical contexts of the late Imperial and Maoist periods. Topics covered will include Chinese political culture, kinship and marriage, reproduction and family planning, gender and sexuality, urban and rural lives, ethnic minorities, religion, state and society, nationalism, migration, the Chinese diaspora, etc. The analytical approaches are drawn from anthropology, political science, sociology, and cultural studies.
This course involves the intensive study of texts that are specifically linked to the special subject that the student has chosen.
The course focuses on texts of the Tokugawa period and requires previous knowledge of classical Japanese (J.7).
This seminar-style course will explore a range of topics in the sociology, history, and cultural representation of Japan’s minority communities. Particular attention will be paid to Burakumin and Zainichi Korean communities, and to the forms of cultural expression developed by their writers. The seminars will be supplemented by screening and study of both documentary and narrative films. The course may include an optional component covering readings in Japanese.
This paper focuses on early-modern Japanese cultural history. It offers insights on key-aspects of Edo-period visual and literary culture and allows reflections upon aspects of Japanese contemporary society which have roots in early-modern times. The paper does not require any knowledge of classical Japanese, as primary sources available either in modern Japanese or in English translation are selected. Students who know classical Japanese can choose to work on the original texts in critical edition. Secondary sources include materials both in Japanese and in English. The specific topic of the paper may change from year to year, including a vast range of themes such as education, family, leisure, gender, disaster, news, etc.
This course will be run in seminar style with weekly discussions and student presentations. Topics will vary depending on the year but may include: propaganda and social mobilization, Sino-Japanese relations, post-War Japanese political and social development, food and culture, as well as comedy and Japan’s relations within East Asia. The focus will be on primary text readings in English and Japanese.
This is an advanced seminar-based course focusing on Japan’s 20th-century international relations. The precise focus will vary from year to year, but in each instance the emphasis will be on situating the study of Japan within the disciplinary context of International Relations and Diplomatic History, and will involve working with both secondary and primary source material. The course will consider aspects of Japan’s key bilateral relations in East Asia and globally, as well as a number of important thematic issues, including, but not necessarily limited to regional security, alliance relations, political economy, resource and trade policy, and debates over national identity.
This is an advanced seminar-based course focusing on contemporary Japanese society. The focus will vary from year to year, such as questions of learning and education, family, time, space, gender or the like, investigating these topics from a wide range of angles. In each instance the emphasis will be on situating the study of Japan within the disciplinary context of Social Anthropology and Sociology. The course is aimed at deepening students’ understanding of (selected aspects of) Japanese society as well as developing research and writing skills. It will involve working with both secondary and primary source material.
This course will cover the basic grammar of modern written Korean with a view to developing reading fluency. Students will mainly be reading materials in hangul script, but some texts in mixed script (with Chinese characters) will also be used.
This paper examines in some detail aspects of the history of Middle East, either in a particular region and period, or addressing particular themes, with an emphasis on developing an understanding of the evolution of Middle East history and the periods of transition that have shaped and defined the pre-modern societies in the region.
The paper investigates the role language plays in articulating national identity and conflict in the Middle East. The main focus of the paper will be on Arabic, but consideration will also be given to Hebrew, Persian, and Turkish.
This paper provides a focused analysis of a particular subject relating to the pre-modern Middle East.
This paper provides a focused analysis of a particular subject relating to the contemporary Middle East. Students may choose one of two subjects which will be announced by the Faculty Board.
This paper offers the opportunity for students of the Semitic languages to contextualize their language work within the larger field of comparative Semitic linguistics.
The course aims to cover the whole of Sanskrit grammar and introduce the students to some of the essential features and concepts of pre-modern South Asian civilisation and literary culture.
This paper introduces students to contemporary Hindi language through a series of exercises testing grammar, reading, writing, speaking, and listening.
This paper will consider the life, thought, and worship of medieval and modern Judaism. The Faculty Board of Divinity may from time to time prescribe subjects and texts for special study.
This paper will deal with two advanced topics in Islamic studies specified from time to time by the Faculty Board of Divinity. The Board may also from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
The Faculty Board of Divinity may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper consists of a three-hour examination. Candidates answer three questions out of a choice of at least eleven questions.
1. The Chemical Engineering Tripos shall consist of three Parts, Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part.
2. A student who has obtained honours in
may be a candidate for honours in Part I of the Chemical Engineering Tripos in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that nine complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.
3. The Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate may in special circumstances, which they shall themselves determine, give leave to a student who has obtained honours in any Honours Examination to be a candidate for honours in Part I of the Chemical Engineering Tripos in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that the student has kept four terms and that nine complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
4. A student who has obtained honours in Part I of the Chemical Engineering Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIa in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.18
5. A candidate who, under arrangements approved by the Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate, has spent not less than three terms studying at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and has been certified by the President of the Institute after consultation with the Chair of Examiners for Part I of the Chemical Engineering Tripos to have studied diligently during that period, shall be deemed thereby to have obtained honours in that Part of the Tripos. A list containing the names of persons so qualified shall be certified by the Chair of the Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate and published in the Reporter.
6. The Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate may in special circumstances, which they shall themselves determine, give leave to a student who has obtained honours in any Honours Examination to be a candidate for honours in Part IIa of the Chemical Engineering Tripos in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that the student has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
[7. A student who has obtained honours in Part IIa of the Chemical Engineering Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has not proceeded to the B.A. Degree, and provided also that fifteen complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.]28
〈7. A student who has obtained honours in Part IIa of the Chemical Engineering Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb of the Chemical Engineering Tripos in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she:
provided that fifteen complete terms have not passed after the student’s first term of residence.〉28
8. No student shall be a candidate for any Part and also for another Honours Examination in the same term.
9. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
10. The Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate shall nominate such number of Examiners as they think sufficient for each Part of the Tripos, and shall also have power to nominate one or more Assessors for each Part. If required to do so, Assessors shall propose questions in the papers or parts of papers assigned to them by the Examiners, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers or parts of papers, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
11. In each Part of the Tripos, the questions proposed by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted for approval to the whole body of Examiners for that Part. The answers to each question shall, as far as possible, be examined by two at least of the Examiners or Assessors.
12. In each Part the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second class shall be divided into two divisions. The names of those in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence in Part IIa or Part IIb a mark of distinction may be awarded.
13. The Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate shall have power to publish supplementary regulations defining the scope and character of each of the examination papers and to amend such supplementary regulations from time to time as they may think fit. Any alteration of supplementary regulations shall be published before the division of the Easter Term in the academical year before that in which it is to have effect.
14. (a) The examination for Part I shall consist of four written papers, each of which shall be of three hours’ duration. A candidate for Part I shall offer Papers 1, 2, and 3, and either Paper 4(1) or Paper 4(2) as detailed in the supplementary regulations.
(b) The Examiners for Part I shall take into account course-work prescribed by the Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate. Details of the work required shall be published by Notice in the Department of Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology no later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. The Examiners may require each candidate to submit reports on the course-work undertaken. The Examiners may impose such oral or practical tests as they think fit.
15. (a) The examination for Part IIa shall consist of four written papers, each of which shall be of three hours’ duration.
(b) The Examiners for Part IIa shall take into account course-work prescribed by the Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate. Details of the work required shall be published by Notice in the Department of Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology no later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. The Examiners may require each candidate to submit reports on the course-work undertaken. The Examiners may impose such oral or practical tests as they think fit.
16. (a) The scheme of the examination for Part IIb shall be as follows:
Group A: |
Compulsory topics |
Group B: |
Advanced chemical engineering topics |
Group C: |
Broadening material topics |
Group D: |
Research project |
Each candidate shall be required to take all Group A topics, to take a total of eight modules from Group B and Group C topics, and to take a Group D project. The Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate shall have power to announce restrictions on the combination of modules that a candidate may choose to offer.
(b) The examination paper on Group A compulsory topics shall be of two hours’ duration.
(c) Each Group B module on an advanced chemical engineering topic shall be examined either by a written paper of one and a half hours’ duration or by course-work or by a combination of the two. Not later than the end of the Full Easter Term each year, the Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate shall give notice of the modules prescribed for the following academical year, and shall specify the mode of examination for each module. For modules to be examined by course-work, details of the work required shall be published by the Syndicate by Notice in the Department of Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology not later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination.
(d) Each Group C module on a broadening material topic shall be examined by course-work. Not later than the end of the Full Easter Term each year, the Syndicate shall give notice of the broadening material topics prescribed for the following academical year. The Examiners may require each candidate to submit reports on the course-work undertaken. The Examiners may impose such oral or practical tests as they think fit.
(e) Each candidate shall undertake a Group D project, in which they perform original work in one or more of the following forms: a theoretical investigation, an experimental investigation, an essay, a design project. The Examiners shall require each candidate to submit one or more written reports on the work undertaken. The Examiners may impose such oral or practical tests as they think fit.
17. Each candidate for any Part of the Chemical Engineering Tripos shall be required to sign a declaration that the candidate has read and understood the policies and procedures of the Department of Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology and the University on plagiarism. Each candidate submitting a report under Regulation 16(e) shall be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is her or his own work, unaided except as specified in the text, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. If two or more candidates have undertaken work in collaboration, they will each be required to indicate the extent of their contribution.
These papers will each be on Chemical Engineering principles. They may, for example, include questions on fluid mechanics, process calculations (including thermodynamics), heat and mass transfer, equilibrium staged processes, reactor theory, biotechnology, process systems (including economics and safety, health, and the environment), computer aided process engineering, and mathematical methods.
This paper is to be taken by candidates who have previously obtained honours in the Natural Sciences Tripos or the Computer Science Tripos. In addition to a section on Chemical Engineering principles, it will include questions on General Engineering.
This paper is to be taken by candidates who have previously obtained honours in the Engineering Tripos. In addition to a section on Chemical Engineering principles, it will include questions on Chemistry.
An Affiliated Student or a student admitted to the examination for Part I under the provisions of Regulation 3 will take the section prescribed for him or her by the Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology Syndicate.
1. The Classical Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II. A separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
3. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ia or, at the discretion of the Faculty Board, in another Honours Examination, may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that at the time of the examination he or she has kept four terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
4. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part II:
5. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
6. No student who has obtained honours in Part Ia or Part Ib of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos, having offered classical Greek or classical Latin in the examination, shall be a candidate for Part Ia or Part Ib of the Classical Tripos.
7. For each Part of the Tripos the Faculty Board of Classics shall nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to the Examiners for each Part. The Assessors shall, if required, propose questions in the papers or parts of papers assigned to them by the Examiners, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers or parts of papers, shall read theses and participate in the viva voce examinations thereon, and shall report as required to the Examiners.
8. Assessors appointed under Regulation 7 may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote. Every paper in Part II of the Classical Tripos shall be examined by at least two of the whole body of Examiners and Assessors.
9. Before the examination there shall be general meetings of the Examiners for Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II, when the papers set by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for their approval.
10. The Examiners shall have regard to the style and method of the candidates’ answers and shall give credit for excellence in these respects.
11. The Faculty Board shall have power to make supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects set out in the following regulations and to modify, alter, or withdraw such supplementary regulations as they think fit.
12. Public notice of books or subjects prescribed under the following regulations or under any supplementary regulations shall be given by the Faculty Board
provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student’s preparation for the examination is adversely affected. The Board shall also have the power when they first give notice of the books or subjects prescribed for a particular examination to announce any consequential restriction on the combination of papers that a candidate may choose to offer.
13. The examination shall consist of seven papers, each to be set for three hours, as follows:
Paper 1. |
Greek language and texts (also serves as Paper GL 1 of Part Ia of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 2. |
Alternative Greek language and texts (also serves as Paper GL 2 of Part Ia of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 3. |
Latin language and texts (also serves as Paper GL 3 of Part Ia of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 4. |
Alternative Latin language and texts |
Paper 5. |
Classical questions (also serves as Paper GL 5 of Part Ia of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 6. |
Greek prose and verse composition (also serves as Paper GL 6 of Part Ia of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 7. |
Latin prose and verse composition (also serves as Paper GL 7 of Part Ia of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
14. Every candidate shall offer either Paper 1 or Paper 2, either Paper 3 or Paper 4, and Paper 5. Paper 2 is intended for candidates who had little or no knowledge of Greek before entry to the University, and Paper 4 is intended for candidates who had little or no knowledge of Latin before doing so and who have not successfully completed the Preliminary Examination to Part Ia. No candidate may offer Paper 2 and Paper 4. In addition, a candidate may offer one or both of Papers 6 and 7; the Examiners shall give credit for proficiency in these papers.
15. The names of candidates who obtain honours shall be placed by the Examiners in three classes. The names in each class shall be in alphabetical order. In the class-list a mark of distinction may be attached to the name of any candidate whose work in the examination shows special merit. A mark of distinction, G or L respectively, shall be attached to the names of those candidates who, in offering either Paper 6 or Paper 7 acquit themselves with credit in that paper. A mark, g or l respectively, shall be attached to the names of those candidates who, in offering either Paper 6 or Paper 7 satisfy the Examiners in that paper.
16. In arranging the class-list the Examiners shall take into account the standard attained by candidates in each paper as well as the aggregate of marks obtained by them.
17. The examination shall consist of the following papers, each to be set for three hours:
Paper 1. |
Passages for translation from Greek authors (also serves as Paper GL 11 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
Paper 2. |
Alternative passages for translation from Greek authors (also serves as Paper GL 12 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
Paper 3. |
Passages for translation from Latin authors (also serves as Paper GL 13 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
Paper 4. |
Alternative passages for translation from Latin authors. |
Paper 5. |
Greek literature (also serves as Paper GL 15 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
Paper 6. |
Latin literature (also serves as Paper GL 16 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
Paper 7. |
Greek and Roman history (also serves as Paper GL 17 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
Paper 8. |
Greek and Roman philosophy (also serves as Paper GL 18 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos and as Paper 4 of Part Ib of the Philosophy Tripos). |
Paper 9. |
Greek and Roman art and archaeology (also serves as Paper GL 19 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
Paper 10. |
Greek and Latin philology and linguistics (also serves as Paper GL 20 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
Paper 11. |
Translation from English into Greek prose and verse (also serves as Paper GL 21 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
Paper 12. |
Translation from English into Latin prose and verse (also serves as Paper GL 22 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
18. A candidate shall be required to offer six papers as follows:
Paper 1 or Paper 2; Paper 3 or Paper 4; Papers 5 and 6; and two papers chosen from among Papers 7–10.
19. In addition to the papers to be offered under Regulation 18, a candidate may offer Paper 11 or Paper 12 or both these papers.
20. The names of candidates who obtain honours shall be placed by the Examiners in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be in alphabetical order. In drawing up the class-list the Examiners shall have regard in the first place to the work done by the candidates in the six papers which they are required to offer, and no candidate shall be excluded from any class on the ground that he or she has not offered either or both of Papers 11 and 12 in addition. A mark of distinction, an asterisk, shall be attached to the names of candidates whose work in those six papers shows special merit. In determining the place in the class-list of any candidate who has offered either or both the Papers 11 and 12 in addition, the Examiners shall give credit for proficiency in these papers. A mark of distinction, G or L respectively, shall be attached to the names of those candidates who, in offering either Paper 11 or Paper 12, acquit themselves with credit in that paper. A mark, g or l respectively, shall be attached to the names of those candidates who, in offering either Paper 11 or Paper 12, satisfy the Examiners in that paper.
21. In arranging the class-list the Examiners shall take into account the standard attained by candidates in each paper as well as the aggregate of marks obtained by them.
22. The examination shall consist of papers assigned to five groups, A, B, C, D, E, representing five fields of study, and to a sixth group, X, representing a combination of two or more of these fields of study, and certain papers from other Triposes, as set out below.
A1. |
A prescribed Greek author or authors, and a prescribed Latin author or authors (also serves as Paper 31 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)).30 |
A2. |
Prescribed Greek texts (also serves as Paper 32 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)).30 |
A3. |
Prescribed Latin texts (also serves as Paper 33 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)).30 |
A4. |
Greek and Latin textual criticism and transmission of texts. |
B1. |
|
B2. |
|
B3. |
A prescribed subject or period in Greek and Roman philosophy.31 |
C1. |
A prescribed period or subject of Greek history (may also serve as a paper in Part II of the Historical Tripos). |
C2. |
A prescribed period or subject of Roman history. |
C3. |
A prescribed subject taken from ancient history. |
C4. |
A subject in ancient or medieval European history (may also be the same, in whole or in part, as a paper in Part II of the Historical Tripos).30 |
D1. |
Aegean prehistory. |
D2. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art. |
D3. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art.30 |
D4. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art. |
E1. |
Elements of comparative linguistics (also serves as Paper 28 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
E2. |
The Greek language (also serves as Paper 29 of the Linguistics Tripos).30 |
E3. |
The Latin language (also serves as Paper 30 of the Linguistics Tripos).30 |
X1. |
A subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.30 |
X2. |
A subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.30 |
X3. |
A subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
Paper O1. |
History of ideas on language (Paper 12 of the Linguistics Tripos).33 |
Paper O2. |
Introduction to modern Greek language and culture (Paper Gr. 3 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
Paper O3. |
Tragedy (Paper 2 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Paper O4. |
History and theory of literary criticism (Paper 16 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Paper O5. |
Philosophy of mind (Paper 2 of Part II of the Philosophy Tripos). |
Paper O6. |
History of political thought to c. 1700 (Paper 19 of Part I of the Historical Tripos). |
Paper O7. |
A special subject in Neo-Latin literature: selected authors (Paper NL 2 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
Paper O8. |
Judaism and Hellenism (Paper D2(d) of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos). |
Paper O9. |
Early medieval literature and its contexts (Paper 2 of Part I of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Paper O10. |
The Romance languages (Paper CS 1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos). |
Paper O11. |
Ancients and Moderns (Paper 1 set for the subject History and Philosophy of Science in Part II of the Natural Sciences Tripos). |
Paper O12. |
Archaeology in action (Paper ARC2 of Part I of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos). |
23. A student who is a candidate for Part II in the year next after obtaining honours in Part Ib or in another Honours Examination shall offer
provided that
24. A student who is a candidate for Part II in the year next but one after obtaining honours in Part Ib or in another Honours Examination shall offer
provided that
25. A candidate may be examined viva voce on the field of study of a Group from which he or she offers two or more papers, provided that the scope of such an examination shall be restricted to the subjects of the papers which the candidate has offered. Viva voce examinations shall be held at such times as the Examiners may appoint, and the times appointed shall be announced not later than the second day after the beginning of the examination.
26. (a) A candidate who wishes to offer a thesis under Regulation 23 or Regulation 24 shall submit an application, including the title of the proposed thesis, a brief account of its scope, and a statement of the scheme of papers to be offered in the examination. Applications shall be submitted through candidates’ Directors of Studies to the Academic Secretary (Undergraduate) of the Faculty, so as to arrive not later than the second Monday of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
(b) Each candidate must obtain the approval of the proposed title by the Faculty Board not later than the last day of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. When the Faculty Board have approved a title, no change shall be made to it or to the candidate's scheme of papers, without the further approval of the Faculty Board. Any application for a change in title or scheme of papers must be submitted through the candidate's Director of Studies to the Academic Secretary (Undergraduate) as soon as possible, and in any case no later than ten days before the last Faculty Board meeting of the Lent Term. If a candidate decides to offer a paper in place of a thesis, this is deemed to be a change in the scheme of papers and must be notified to the Faculty Board in accordance with the same timetable.
(c) A thesis shall not exceed 10,000 words in length, including notes but excluding bibliography. Candidates will be required to declare that the thesis is their own work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
(d) A thesis shall be submitted in accordance with the detailed arrangements approved by the Faculty Board, to the Academic Secretary (Undergraduate) so as to arrive not later than the first Monday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
(e) Each thesis shall be examined by two Examiners or by an Examiner and an Assessor, and the candidate shall be examined by them upon it viva voce.
27. The names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be placed by the Examiners in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. A mark of distinction shall be awarded for special excellence.
This paper will contain passages for unseen translation and seen passages for analysis and appreciation from prescribed texts.
This paper will contain passages for unseen translation appropriate for candidates who had little or no knowledge of Greek before entry to the University and seen passages for analysis and appreciation from prescribed texts.
This paper will contain passages for unseen translation and seen passages for analysis and appreciation from prescribed texts.
This paper will contain passages for unseen translation appropriate for candidates who had little or no knowledge of Latin before entry to the University and seen passages for analysis and appreciation from prescribed texts.
This paper will contain questions on:
This paper will contain passages for translation into Greek prose and verse, with some specified passages which may be attempted by candidates for Paper 2.
This paper will contain passages for translation into Latin prose or verse, with some specified passages which may be attempted by candidates for Paper 4.
This paper will contain passages for translation, both seen and unseen.
This paper will contain passages for translation, both seen and unseen, and is appropriate for candidates who had little or no knowledge of Greek before entry to the University.
This paper will contain passages for translation, both seen and unseen.
This paper will contain passages for translation, both seen and unseen, and is appropriate for candidates who had a limited knowledge of Latin before entry to the University.
Each of these papers will contain seen passages for analysis and appreciation from prescribed texts, and essay and other questions on these and other prescribed works.
The paper will contain questions on topics in Greek and Roman history to be specified from time to time.
Candidates for the Classical Tripos will be given credit for knowledge of both Greek and Roman history. Candidates for the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos will not be expected to show knowledge of both Greek and Roman history.
A text or texts will be prescribed. The paper will contain questions on the prescribed text or texts, and questions on ancient philosophers and philosophical systems.
The paper will contain questions relating to the Aegean world, Italy and the Roman Empire: questions may require comments on images.
This paper will contain questions on topics in Greek, Latin, and comparative Greek/Latin philology and linguistics to be specified from time to time. Candidates for the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos will not be expected to show knowledge of both Greek and Latin philology and linguistics.
This paper will contain passages for translation into Greek prose or verse, with some specified passages which may be attempted only by candidates taking Paper 2.
This paper will contain passages for translation into Latin prose or verse, with some specified passages which may be attempted only by candidates taking Paper 4.
This paper will contain questions on a Greek author or authors and on a Latin author or authors. The works prescribed here will be taken from among the major works of Greek and Latin literature.
This paper will contain passages for literary comment and essay questions.
This paper will contain passages for literary comment and essay questions.
This paper will contain passages for textual comment, questions on palaeography and essay questions: candidates will be required to answer questions on passages in each of the two languages.
In any year, a text and/or subject for study will be prescribed.
In any year, a text and/or subject for study will be prescribed.
These papers may contain questions on the literary, epigraphical, and archaeological sources for the period or subject prescribed, and questions that involve a knowledge of geography and topography and of the political, legal, and social antiquities of the period or subject prescribed; such questions will not require a technical knowledge of archaeology.
If, in any year, the subject prescribed for Paper D2 is connected with early Hellenic archaeology, the subject prescribed for Paper D3 will be connected with classical (Greco-Roman) art; if the subject prescribed for Paper D2 is connected with early Greek art, the subject prescribed for Paper D3 will be connected with the archaeology of the Greek and Hellenistic world.
This paper will cover the principles of the comparative method and of historical reconstruction and their applications to Indo-European phonology, morphology, syntax, and lexicon. A knowledge of the relevant phenomena in Vedic will be required.
A prescribed subject in the history of the Greek language.
A prescribed subject in the history of the Latin language.
For each of Papers E2 and E3 the Faculty Board will prescribe texts for special study. Each paper will include a compulsory question on the prescribed texts.
There will be not more than three papers in this group, X1, X2, X3, whose subjects will be prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board of Classics. The subjects will be of an inter-disciplinary nature, requiring knowledge related to more than one of the fields of study represented by Groups A, B, C, D, and E.
1. The Computer Science Tripos shall consist of four Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, Part II, and Part III.
2. No student may be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
3. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
4. The Faculty Board of Computer Science and Technology shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the papers for examination. Due care shall be taken that sufficient notice is given of any alteration of such supplementary regulations.
5. For each Part of the Tripos the Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient. They may also nominate for appointment one or more Assessors to the Examiners in such subjects as they consider desirable, and the Assessors so appointed shall, if required to do so, set papers or parts of papers and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in such subjects. The Assessors, when summoned by the Chair, shall attend meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
6. The questions proposed by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to, and approved by, the Examiners collectively.
7. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in each of Parts Ia, Ib, and II shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
8. The papers for Parts Ia, Ib, and II of the Computer Science Tripos shall be as follows:
Paper 1. Computer science 1.34 |
Paper 6. Computer science 6. |
Paper 2. Computer science 2. |
Paper 7. Computer science 7. |
Paper 3. Computer science 3. |
Paper 8. Computer science 8. |
Paper 4. Computer science 4. |
Paper 9. Computer science 9. |
Paper 5. Computer science 5. |
9. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part Ia if he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
10. A candidate for Part Ia shall submit a portfolio of assessed laboratory work as prescribed in Regulation 11, and shall offer:
|
Chemistry |
Physics |
|
Earth Sciences |
Physiology of Organisms |
|
Evolution and Behaviour |
11. A candidate for Part Ia shall submit to the Head of the Department a portfolio of assessed laboratory work. The Head of the Department shall announce not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination the nature of the laboratory work to be undertaken and the dates by which, and the manner in which, the results of such work are to be presented. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the work submitted by each candidate, and shall take these assessments into account when assigning marks for the examination.
12. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ia of the Computer Science Tripos or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept four terms and that nine complete terms have not passed after her or his first term of residence.35
13. A candidate for Part Ib shall offer Papers 3, 4, 5, and 6, and shall submit a portfolio of assessed laboratory work as prescribed in Regulation 14.
14. A candidate for Part Ib shall submit to the Head of the Department a portfolio of assessed laboratory work. The Head of the Department shall announce not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination the nature of the laboratory work to be undertaken and the dates by which, and the manner in which, the results of such work are to be presented. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the work submitted by each candidate, and shall take these assessments into account when assigning marks for the examination.
15. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ib of the Computer Science Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after her or his first term of residence.35
16. A candidate for Part II shall offer Papers 7, 8, and 9, and shall submit a dissertation as prescribed in Regulation 17.
17. A candidate for Part II shall submit the proposed title of her or his dissertation to the Head of the Department by the end of the first quarter of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination, and shall obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the title by the division of the Michaelmas Term. Two copies of the dissertation, which shall be computer-printed and shall not exceed 12,000 words in length, excluding appendices, footnotes, and bibliography, shall be submitted by the candidate to the Head of the Department so as to arrive not later than noon on the third Friday before the first day of the examination. Each candidate will be required to sign a declaration that the dissertation is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose; if two or more candidates have undertaken a dissertation in collaboration, they will each be required to indicate the extent of their contribution. The Examiners shall have power to examine any candidate viva voce on the subject of her or his dissertation and on the general field of knowledge within which it falls.
18. A student who, under arrangements approved by the Faculty Board of Computer Science and Technology, has spent not less than three terms studying at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and has been certified by the President of the Institute after consultation with the Chair of Examiners for Part II of the Computer Science Tripos to have studied diligently during that period, shall be deemed thereby to have obtained honours in that Part of the Tripos. A list containing the names of persons so qualified shall be certified by the Chair of the Faculty Board and published in the Reporter.
19. A student who has obtained honours in Part II of the Computer Science Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part III in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she:
20. A candidate for Part III shall offer a combination of written papers, project dissertations, essays, and demonstrations of research training as duly specified by the notice of the Head of the Department not later than the end of the Easter Term next preceding the examination.
Other than for written papers, each candidate will be required to sign a declaration that each unit of assessment is her or his own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose; if two or more candidates have undertaken a dissertation in collaboration, they will each be required to indicate the extent of their contribution. The Examiners shall have power to examine any candidate viva voce on the subject of such work and on the general field of knowledge within which it falls.
21. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in Part III shall be arranged in alphabetical order in a single class, with distinctive marks attached to the names of those candidates who in the opinion of the Examiners deserve special credit, (d) for a distinguished performance, (m) for a meritorious performance.
1. The Economics Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb. A separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. The scheme of the examination for Part I of the Tripos shall be that defined in Regulations 14 and 15 and for Part IIa of the Tripos that defined in Regulations 16–18 and for Part IIb of the Tripos that defined in Regulations 19–25.
3. The Faculty Board of Economics shall have power to make from time to time supplementary regulations further defining all or any of the subjects of the examination and regulations determining the credit that shall be assigned to such subjects respectively and marking out the lines of study that are to be pursued by the candidates, and to publish lists of books recommended to the candidates and to modify or alter any such supplementary regulations or lists as occasion may require. Sufficient notice of any such modifications or alterations shall be given to avoid hardship to candidates. The Faculty Board shall summon every year a conference of Lecturers on the subjects included in the Tripos, at which these supplementary regulations and lists shall be considered and suggestions for their revision received.
4. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part I if at the time of the examination he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
5. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part IIa, if they have kept four terms:
A student who, under arrangements approved by the Faculty Board, has spent not less than three terms studying at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and has been certified by the President of the Institute after consultation with the Chair of Examiners for Part IIa of the Economics Tripos to have studied diligently during that period, shall be deemed thereby to have obtained honours in that Part of the Tripos. A list containing the names of persons so qualified shall be certified by the Chair of the Faculty Board and published in the Reporter.
6. A student who has obtained honours in any other Honours Examination other than Part I of the Economics Tripos or has been deemed to have obtained Honours in Part IIa of the Economics Tripos under Regulation 5 may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that the student has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.35
7. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
8. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
9. A candidate shall not offer in any Part of the Tripos a paper that he or she has previously offered in another University examination.
10. In each Part the names of the students who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
11. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they may deem sufficient for each Part of the Tripos.
12. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any Part of the Tripos. Assessors shall be responsible for setting the paper or papers in the subject or subjects assigned to them, and for looking over the work of the candidates therein, and shall present a written report to the Examiners. Assessors shall have a right to attend the meetings of the Examiners, but shall not have a vote in determining the class-list.
13. In each Part the questions proposed by the Examiners or Assessors shall be submitted to and approved by the Examiners for that Part collectively.
14. The scheme of examination for Part I of the Tripos shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
Microeconomics |
Paper 2. |
Macroeconomics |
Paper 3. |
Quantitative methods in economics |
Paper 4. |
Political and sociological aspects of economics |
Paper 5. |
British economic history |
15. In Part I every candidate shall offer all the papers specified in Regulation 14.
16. The scheme of examination for Part IIa of the Tripos shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
Microeconomics |
||
Paper 2. |
Macroeconomics |
||
Paper 3. |
Theory and practice of econometrics I |
||
Paper 4. |
Economic development |
||
Paper 5. |
either |
(a) |
Analysis of politics (Paper POL1 of Part I of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos), |
|
or |
(b) |
Introduction to sociology: modern societies (Paper SOC1 of Part I of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos), |
|
or |
(c) |
International relations I (Paper POL2 of Part I of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos). |
Paper 6. |
Mathematics for economists and statisticians |
||
Paper 7. |
Labour |
Each paper shall be set for three hours except Paper 3. The examination for Paper 3 shall consist of a written paper of three hours’ duration and the submission of project work undertaken by the candidate; details of the project work required and the arrangements for its submission shall be prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board.
17. A candidate for Part IIa shall offer
18. If under Regulation 17(b) a candidate offers two papers, the paper of these two on which the Examiners judge the candidate's performance to be least good shall be taken into account only if that would be to the candidate's advantage.
19. The scheme of the examination for Part IIb of the Tripos shall be as follows:
Papers 1, 2. |
Economic principles and problems |
Paper 3. |
A subject in economics1 |
Paper 4. |
Economic theory and analysis |
Paper 5. |
Mathematical economics36 |
Paper 6. |
Banking, money, and finance |
Paper 7. |
Public economics |
Paper 8. |
The economics of developing countries |
Paper 9. |
Industry |
Paper 10. |
Theory and practice of econometrics II |
Paper 11. |
Time series and financial econometrics36 |
Paper 12. |
A subject in economics1 |
Paper 13. |
A subject in economics1 |
Paper 14. |
A subject in economic history |
Paper 15. |
A subject in economic history37 |
Paper 16. |
A subject in sociology II (Paper Soc. 5 of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos in any year that the subject of that paper is ‘Modern Britain’) |
Paper 17. |
A subject in the field of sociology and politics |
Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration.
20. Except as provided in Regulation 22 a candidate for Part IIb shall offer
21. If under Regulation 20(b) a candidate offers three papers, the paper of these three on which the Examiners judge the candidate's performance to be least good shall be taken into account only if that would be to the candidate's advantage, provided that at least one of Papers 3–15 shall always be taken into account.
22. A candidate who takes the examination in the year next after obtaining honours in any Tripos examination other than Part IIa of the Economics Tripos shall offer Papers 1 and 2 and not less than two nor more than three papers chosen from among Papers 3–17, provided that a candidate must offer at least one paper chosen from Papers 3–15. If a candidate offers three such papers, that paper from among the three in which the Examiners judge the candidate's work to be least good shall be taken into account only if that would be to the candidate's advantage, provided that at least one of Papers 3–15 shall always be taken into account.
23. For Papers 12, 13, and 15 the Faculty Board shall announce by the division of the Lent Term of the year preceding the examination a total of not more than three subjects for each paper. In any case where the Faculty Board announce more than one such subject for a paper, a candidate may offer not more than one of the subjects announced. For Paper 17 a candidate may not offer more than one of the subjects specified in the supplementary regulations for this paper.
24. Some choice of questions shall be allowed in all papers.
25. (a) A candidate for Part IIb under Regulation 20 shall submit an application to the Secretary of the Faculty Board, specifying the proposed topic of the dissertation, and the paper or field within which it falls. Applications shall be considered by the Examiners; the approval or rejection of a candidate's proposed topic shall be communicated to the candidate. A candidate whose proposed topic is rejected may submit a revised application.
(b) When a candidate's proposed topic has been approved by the Examiners, no change shall be made in it, except that a candidate may subsequently apply for permission to revise the topic.
(c) The timetable for the submission and the approval of applications under sub-paragraphs (a) and (b) shall be announced by the Faculty Board not later than the end of the Michaelmas Term. All applications shall be submitted in accordance with detailed instructions issued by the Board.
(d) A dissertation shall be in English, and shall be of not less than 6,000 words and not more than 7,500 words in length,38 including notes and appendices but excluding bibliography. Candidates will be required to give full references to sources used.
(e) Two copies of the dissertation, in typewritten or computer-printed form, shall be submitted, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Faculty Board, so as to reach the Secretary of the Faculty Board not later than the first day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held. Together with the dissertation each candidate shall submit
26. The Examiners shall have power to examine a candidate viva voce on the subject of her or his project submitted under Regulations 14 or 16, or on her or his dissertation submitted under Regulation 25.
Both papers will emphasize theoretical issues (some questions may also be set which require knowledge of the history of economic thought).
This paper will deal with the following: the theory of the consumer: choice and demand; the theory of the producer; costs and supply; supply, demand, and market equilibrium; partial and general equilibrium analysis; demand and supply in factor markets; market equilibrium under various forms of industrial structure; market failure and the role of the state; elementary game theory and bargaining.
The paper will provide an introduction to the following topics. National income accounting. Classical theory of output and employment. Elementary neoclassical growth theory. Quantity theory of money. Economic fluctuations and short-run equilibrium. Interaction between goods and financial markets: the IS-LM model; Simple open economy macroeconomics; Aggregate supply and the labour market; Stabilization policy.
This paper will cover the application of simple statistical and mathematical techniques to a range of problems in economics. The written examination for the paper will be set in four sections.
Candidates are required to answer questions from all four sections of the written paper: the marks attached to each section, and the number of questions to be answered, will be shown on the question paper. Sections A and B of the paper will comprise a number of questions on mathematical techniques, and the application of these techniques to simple problems in economic theory. Sections C and D of the paper will deal with the manner in which statistics contributes to the study of economic problems and to the discussion of issues of public policy. The questions in these sections will test candidates’ ability to perform relatively simple statistical derivations, to analyse problems in applied economics, and their knowledge of statistical sources. Sections A and C will each contain four short questions: students will be required to answer all questions in these sections. Sections B and D will each contain two long questions of which students will be required to answer one. The paper will be of three hours’ duration with an additional fifteen-minute reading time prior to the beginning of the examination.
This paper considers the influence of political and sociological factors on economic affairs. It reviews the history of economic and social policy-making in the post-war period in Britain. It examines a variety of influences on policy: the political ideologies that inform the conduct of policy; the domestic and international institutions that provide the context within which policy is formed; the nature of power in government; and the broader social and economic processes that shape the environment in which economic policy is conducted. The paper examines the changing nature of institutions that have regulated the employment relationship and shaped labour standards with the decline of trade unions and the increased role of the law. As background to a wider understanding of the global economy, it introduces the economic analysis of property rights, civil liberties, social capital, income inequality, the family, religion, and terrorism.
This paper will be concerned with three main themes in the industrial development of Britain between 1750 and 1939: the industrial revolution, problems of growth and trade in the mature economy up to 1914, and the inter-war years; it will also cover some of the demographic and social changes associated with this industrial development. The specific topics which will be covered in the course of the analysis of the main themes include the long-run growth of output, productivity, and the standard of living; the costs of growth; demographic changes; capital accumulation and technical progress; entrepreneurship; foreign trade, the export of capital, and the role of the Empire; changes in the industrial structure; the labour market; government economic policies.
The paper covers the following topics in economic theory: consumer theory; producer theory; equilibrium and markets; welfare economics; game theory and industrial organization; introduction to decision-making under uncertainty; asymmetric information; financial markets.
The paper aims to develop a good understanding of macroeconomics at the intermediate level, and to provide a rigorous framework for macroeconomic analysis. The paper covers topics from five areas: intertemporal macroeconomics including the behaviour of consumption, investment, and labour supply; labour markets, unemployment, and inflation; monetary economics, interest rates, and the role of the banking system; open economy macroeconomics including foreign exchange rate fluctuations; macroeconomic policy.
Papers 1 and 2 will contain a number of questions that will involve candidates in manipulating simple mathematical models at a level of mathematical competence no higher than that required in Paper 3 in Part I of the Economics Tripos.
This paper deals with the manner in which statistics contributes to the study of economic and social problems and to the discussion of issues of public policy. Its main purpose is to test candidates’ understanding of the intuition and concepts which underlie elementary statistical techniques, and their ability to analyse problems in applied economics, by bringing to bear on them relevant economic theory, knowledge of statistical sources, and relatively simple statistical derivations. A detailed schedule of the specific statistical techniques covered in this paper will be published by the Faculty Board not later than the start of the Michaelmas Term of the academic year in which the examination is to be held.
The examination for Paper 3 will consist of two components, as follows:
The written paper will carry 60% of the weight for the examination as a whole, and the project 40%.
The paper introduces concepts and theories in development economics and applies them to the comparative development experiences of selected countries or regions. It is designed to provide a useful foundation for candidates proposing to take Part IIb specialist options in development economics or economic history. It also constitutes a self-contained one-year course for those interested in this field but not planning to pursue it further. The concepts and theories covered are: the concept and measurement of ‘development’; models of growth and development, population growth, human and physical capital investment dual economy models; coordination failure and the big push; factor market failures in developing economies including insurance and credit; trade policy issues; inequality and growth; the political economy of development.
The examination will be in two sections. Section (1) will include purely analytical questions. Section (2) will require candidates to relate their analysis of theoretical issues to comparative historical evidence from a small number of countries, the current choice of which will be announced by the Faculty Board early in the academical year. Candidates will be required to answer one question from Section (1) and two questions from Section (2). Each answer will carry equal weight.
The paper covers those aspects of linear algebra, differential and integral calculus, differential and difference equations, probability theory, and statistical theory that are used in various parts of the Tripos. This paper is a pre-requisite for Paper 11 (Time series and financial econometrics) of Part IIb of the Economics Tripos and is recommended for those who plan to take Paper 6 (Banking, money, and finance) of Part IIb of the Economics Tripos.
The paper has the following subject matter: the determination of (the level and structure of) wages and employment by employer demand and household supply; theories of compensating differentials, human capital, internal labour markets, asymmetric information, labour mobility, industrial conflict, discrimination, and collective organization and activity; current issues in industrial relations and the management of the employment relationship; gender issues in, and public policies towards, the labour market. Candidates will be expected to know the main empirical characteristics of the British labour market, and some comparative attributes to other advanced economies. They should be familiar with the main sources of data on the British labour market and modern approaches to the analysis of such data. They should also be able to draw selectively on contributions from sociology and political science.
These papers will deal with the scope and method of economics, with fundamental ideas, and with the application of the methods of economic analysis to economic problems. The papers will be designed to afford scope for the exercise of analytical power in abstract reasoning and in interpreting economic data. A few questions of a more advanced analytical character may be set, but the papers as a whole will be so framed as to be within the competence of those who have not made a study of advanced methods of analysis. A main object will be to test the power of candidates to apply their theoretical reasoning to actual problems. Candidates will, therefore, be expected to show a general knowledge and understanding of the role of the Government in economic affairs and of the working and effects of the principal economic institutions in the fields of production and distribution, of money and banking, of international economics, of employment, labour, and wage determination. Knowledge of the British economy is a basic requirement. Candidates should be able to analyse British problems in their international setting. Some questions will be asked about international economic problems and institutions, and about the problems of different types of economy. The questions set will not require such detailed knowledge as may be appropriate in Papers 3–9, but an understanding of general principles.
In this paper questions will be set of a more advanced character than in Papers 1 and 2, and the emphasis will rest on the theoretical aspects of economics. The paper will provide opportunity for the use of analytical methods including mathematics.
This paper provides an introduction to advanced topics regarding the economic functions of money, credit, banking, financial asset markets, and monetary policy.
The topics to be covered in the paper will include: portfolio theory; valuation of financial assets and options; coordination of monetary and fiscal policy; bank risk management and regulation; and the design and transmission of monetary policy. Questions for this paper will assume knowledge of analytical models, relevant empirical evidence, and recent significant events regarding banking, financial markets, and monetary policy in developed and emerging economies.
The paper studies the following subject matter: optimal taxation, externalities, and environmental policy; empirical evaluation of the effects of taxation and benefits on economic behaviour; social security; political decision-making and political economics; public expenditure and tax systems in practice. The paper will require knowledge of the relevant theories and institutions.
The paper deals with the problems of growth and development in developing countries. Standard analytical tools, microeconomic and macroeconomic, are used to analyse key economic problems. The paper provides a framework for the understanding of how market failures and institutional failures affect economic and institutional development. Candidates are expected to show familiarity with the theoretical issues, to apply theory to the experience of a number of developing countries, and to use basic econometric knowledge to assess empirical evidence.
This paper will have the following subject matter: The modern business enterprise: its internal organization and functioning and their implications for its economic performance; competition, selection, and external constraints on corporate behaviour; law and the corporation; alternative theories of the firm; financial systems, capital structure, and corporate financial choices; multinational corporations; the market for corporate control. The evolution of firms, markets, and industries; standard models of imperfect competition, strategic behaviour; the relationship between industrial structure, behaviour, and performance; information technology and networks; technical change. Deindustrialization and structural changes in UK industry; issues of competition and industrial policies in the context of the international economy.
The Faculty Board will publish a list of prescribed readings for this paper at the beginning of the Michaelmas Term of the academic year in which the examination will be held. Students will be expected to be familiar with these readings, and to develop an understanding of the relevant literature which lies beyond them. The examination for this paper will be set in two sections. Section A will contain not less than three questions which relate closely to the topics covered in the prescribed readings, while Section B will contain not less than eight questions on more general topics associated with the subject matter of the paper. Candidates will be required to answer one question from Section A, and three questions from Section B.
This paper develops and extends the econometric techniques beyond those covered in Paper 3 in Part IIa. It will involve discussion of the empirical application of these techniques to economic problems using examples from the econometric literature. Technical derivations will be kept to a minimum. The examination for this paper consists of a written paper of three hours’ duration.
The paper provides a grounding in econometric theory, particularly as it relates to time series. Proofs and derivations play a more important role than in Paper 10. Candidates will be expected to show an understanding of both the statistical theory and the way in which statistical methods can be used in economics and finance.
Questions may be posed on regression, estimation procedures such as maximum likelihood and generalized methods of moments, test statistics, model selection, simultaneous equations, the properties of time series models and the way in which they are fitted and selected, dynamic models, and cointegration. Financial topics may include predictability of asset returns, volatility, portfolio analysis, CAPM model, factor model, and option pricing.
The use of approved calculators and statistical tables is permitted in the examination. The examination paper will consist of two sections, and students will be required to answer six questions from Section A, and two questions from Section B. Each section will carry equal weight.
This paper will, until further notice, be a paper entitled ‘World Depression in the interwar years’. Its main focus will be on the causes and courses of the Great Depression of the 1930s, but the events of the 1920s including the inflation and deflation of 1919–21 will also receive attention. Topics covered will include the transfer problem and international monetary arrangements, the growth of protection and the development of trading blocs, monopolistic tendencies and changes in income distribution, technology and structural changes, the agrarian depression, and the comparative experience of different countries with regard to unemployment, especially following the trough of the cycle.
The main countries considered will be Britain, France, Germany, the USA, and Japan, but the paper will not be exclusively confined to these, and, in particular, the experience of some of the main primary producing countries will also be studied.
Candidates for this paper who are taking the Economics Tripos shall be examined by written examination.
Until further notice the subjects specified for this paper, from which candidates are required to select one, will be
1. The Education Tripos shall consist of two Parts; a separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for Part I:
3. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part II provided42 that they have kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after their first term of residence:
4. No student shall be a candidate for both Parts, or for either Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
5. No student who has been a candidate for either Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
6. The Faculty Board of Education shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of examination, and to modify, alter, or withdraw such supplementary regulations as occasion may require, provided that due care is taken to give sufficient notice of any change.
7. Public notice of any variable subjects for the examinations in any year shall be given by the Faculty Board before the end of the Easter Term in the year next but one preceding the examination to which they apply; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so, and if they are satisfied that no student’s preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
8. Not later than the first day of Full Michaelmas Term each year the Faculty Board shall publish, by Notice in the Faculty of Education, details of the course-work, performances, workshops, and practical examinations to be undertaken by candidates for each Part of the Tripos during the ensuing academical year.
9. There shall be two separate bodies of Examiners, one for Part I and one for Part II. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they deem sufficient to conduct the examinations. The Faculty Board shall also have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any subject of the Tripos. Assessors shall propose questions in the papers or parts of papers assigned to them by the Examiners, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers or parts of papers, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice.
10. In the class-lists for each Part of the Tripos, the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. In addition the Examiners may affix a mark of distinction to the names of candidates placed in the first class whose work is of special merit. The names in the first and third classes and each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
11. The examination for Part I shall comprise three sections, as set out below. Candidates shall offer:
Section I. Education studies
Section I consists of two written papers, each of three hours' duration.
Paper 1 |
Disciplines of education |
Paper 2 |
Disciplines of education II |
Section II. Globalization, modernity, and education
Section II consists of one written paper of three hours’ duration.
Paper 3 |
Globalization, modernity, and education |
Section III. Subject studies
Candidates may offer two or three papers from one subject area only, as outlined in Schedule 1.
12. The examination for Part II shall comprise four sections, as set out below. Candidates shall offer:
Candidates may not offer more than one dissertation in total under Sections II, III, and IV. Unless otherwise stated in Schedule 2, any dissertation shall be submitted under the conditions set out in Regulation 14.
Section I. Research and investigation in education
Candidates shall submit a dissertation on a topic related to the investigation and analysis of an educational problem. The dissertation shall be submitted under the conditions set out in Regulation 14. At the discretion of the Examiners, the examination may include an oral examination on the dissertation.
Section II. Advanced topics in education studies
Section II consists of three written papers, each of three hours’ duration, and a dissertation.
Paper 1 |
Disciplines of education I |
Paper 2 |
Disciplines of education II |
Paper 3 |
Disciplines of education III (also serves as Paper Soc. 8 of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos) |
Paper 4 |
Dissertation in an education discipline |
Section III. Special subjects in education
Candidates may offer one or more special subjects in education, which shall each count as one paper. The special subjects, and the examination requirements for each special subject, shall be announced by the Faculty Board from time to time, providing that due care is taken to give sufficient notice to all candidates.
Section IV. Subject studies
Candidates may offer up to two papers from one subject area only, as outlined in Schedule 2.
13. For both Parts, no candidate shall offer any paper, dissertation, or other exercise that he or she has previously offered in any University examination.
14. A candidate who intends to submit a dissertation under Section II of Part I, or under Sections I, II, III, and IV of Part II, shall submit the proposed topic to the Secretary of the Faculty Board through her or his Director of Studies, by a date announced by the Faculty Board not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. The Secretary shall communicate the approval or rejection of the proposed topic to the candidate no later than the beginning of the Lent Term preceding the examination.
The submitted dissertation shall be of not less than 8,000 words and not more than 10,000 words, inclusive of notes and appendices. Dissertations shall be submitted by candidates through the Undergraduate Office to the Secretary of the Faculty Board by a date specified by the Faculty Board not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. Each dissertation shall be in typescript, unless previous permission has been obtained from the Faculty Board to present it in manuscript; it shall bear the candidate’s examination number and shall be accompanied by a brief synopsis.
Candidates will be required to declare that the dissertation is their own work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. At the discretion of the Examiners, a candidate may be examined viva voce on his or her dissertation.
15. Candidates intending to offer papers in Modern and Medieval Languages at Part II shall during the academical year next before the year of the examination be required to spend a period studying abroad under the conditions specified for the year abroad in the regulations of Part II of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos, including all conditions relating to the submission of evidence of, and reports on, the period of study abroad and applications for the approval of the candidates’ plans.
Candidates may offer two or three papers chosen from only one subject area, as outlined in the Schedule. Where stated, some papers are examined by means other than a single written paper. Some subject areas may restrict the combinations of papers that may be offered.
All candidates shall offer the equivalent of two or three papers.
The following options shall count as one paper:
Biology of Cells (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Evolution and Behaviour (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Physiology of Organisms (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
The following options shall count as two papers:
Animal Biology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Cell and Developmental Biology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Ecology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Physiology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Plant and Microbial Sciences (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
All candidates shall offer the following two papers:
Passages for translation from Latin authors (Paper 3 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos)
Latin literature (Paper 6 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos)
A candidate who wishes to offer three papers may additionally offer one of Papers 7–10 from Part Ib of the Classical Tripos.
Candidates may offer two or three of the following papers:
Paper Ed.D2 |
Film, culture, and identity |
Paper Ed.D3 |
Drama production II (performance or workshop and submission of a note-book) |
Paper Ed.E3 |
Shakespeare |
English literature and its contexts, 1300–1550 (Paper 3 of Part I of the English Tripos (New Regulations))
English literature and its contexts, 1500–1700 (Paper 4 of Part I of the English Tripos (New Regulations))
English literature and its contexts, 1660–1870 (Paper 6 of Part I of the English Tripos (New Regulations))
English literature and its contexts, 1870 to the present (Paper 7B of Part I of the English Tripos (New Regulations))
Practical criticism and critical practice (Paper 6 of Part I of the English Tripos (Old Regulations))
A candidate may offer a dissertation in place of any of these papers, provided that only one dissertation is offered in total. Any dissertation shall be offered under the conditions specified in Regulation 14.
Candidates may offer two or three papers from Part Ia or Part Ib of the Geographical Tripos, in accordance with the examination requirements as set out in the regulations for that Tripos.
‘Human geography’ (Paper 1) and ‘Physical geography’ (Paper 2) from Part Ia of the Geographical Tripos shall each count as two papers.
Candidates offering two papers shall offer:
Candidates may not offer a paper previously offered in the Preliminary Examination.
Candidates offering three papers shall offer:
Candidates may not offer a paper previously offered in the Preliminary Examination.
Candidates taking papers from Part Ib of the Geographical Tripos will be required to submit a portfolio of course-work under conditions specified by the Faculty Board of Earth Sciences and Geography not later than the division of the Easter Term next preceding the examination.
Candidates may offer two or three of any of the following papers:
Paper ARC1 of Part I of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos
Any of Papers 2–24 of Part I of the Historical Tripos
All candidates shall offer the following paper:
Translation into the foreign language, and test in the foreign language through audio-visual media (Paper B3 from Part Ib of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos), all in the language which he or she has previously offered in the Preliminary Examination for Part I of the Education Tripos
and
one or two additional papers taken from Schedule Ib to the regulations for the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos
Candidates may offer two or three of any of the following papers:
Music analysis (Paper 2 of Part Ib of the Music Tripos)
Composition portfolio (Paper 5 of Part Ib of the Music Tripos), which shall be submitted under conditions specified in the regulations of the Music Tripos
Any of the additional papers from Part Ib of the Music Tripos announced by the Faculty Board of Music, which shall be undertaken under any conditions specified by the Faculty Board of Music when they are announced.
Dissertation (Paper 6 of Part Ib of the Music Tripos) in accordance with Regulation 15 of the Music Tripos.
All candidates shall offer the equivalent of two or three papers.
The following options shall count as one paper:
Chemistry (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Earth Sciences (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Materials Science (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Physics (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
The following options shall count as two papers:
Chemistry A (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Chemistry B (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Physics A (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Candidates may offer two or three papers chosen from Group B in Regulation 18 of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos. Where, under the regulations for that Tripos, a paper may be offered in a form of assessment other than a written paper, the paper offered shall be submitted under conditions specified in the regulations for the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos.
Candidates may offer up to two papers from only one subject area, as outlined in the Schedule. Where stated, some papers are examined by means other than a single written paper. Some subject areas may restrict the combinations of papers that may be offered.
A candidate who wishes to offer one paper may offer either of the two written papers from the subject History and Philosophy of Science from Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos.
A candidate who wishes to offer two papers may offer one of the following options, which shall count as two papers:
Animal Biology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Cell and Developmental Biology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Ecology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Experimental Psychology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
History and Philosophy of Science (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Physiology (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Plant and Microbial Sciences (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Candidates may offer one or two of the papers from Part II of the Classical Tripos.
Candidates may offer one or two of the following papers:
A paper from a list of Part II papers of the English Tripos announced by the Faculty Board of Education at the start of the Michaelmas Term.
Paper Ed.D4 |
Modern drama and theatre |
Paper Ed.A1 |
Arts and performance (written paper and submission of course-work) |
A candidate may offer a dissertation in place of any of the papers above, providing that the candidate may offer only one dissertation in total. Any other dissertation shall be offered under the conditions specified in Regulation 14.
Candidates may offer one or two papers from Part II of the Geographical Tripos, in accordance with the examination requirements as set out in the regulations for the Geographical Tripos.
Candidates may offer one or two of Papers 4–30 of Part II of the Historical Tripos.
Students who have completed the course in Modern and Medieval Languages in Part I of the Education Tripos shall have the following choices for Part II:
(A) A one-year Part II, the equivalent of five papers in Education Studies as set out in Regulation 12.
(B) A two-year Part II, the equivalent of five papers in Education Studies including a period spent abroad as detailed in Regulation 15.
The student having undertaken an intensive study course or similar and gained an acceptable form of certification in a further language (in the country of that language) which shall be one of those normally available within the Education with Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos, other than French:
For the purposes of marking 2 and 3 shall together be considered equivalent to one paper; 4 shall be considered equivalent to one paper.
For the purposes of marking 1, 3, and 4 shall together be considered equivalent to one paper.
And either:
Candidates may offer one or two of the following papers:
Paper 1 of Part II of the Music Tripos, a dissertation which shall be submitted under the regulations of the Music Tripos
Any of Papers 3–6 of Part II of the Music Tripos, all of which shall be submitted or undertaken under the conditions specified in the regulations for the Music Tripos
Any of the additional papers from Part II of the Music Tripos announced by the Faculty Board of Music, which shall be undertaken under any conditions specified by the Faculty Board of Music when they are announced
Paper Ed.A1 |
Arts and performance (written paper and submission of course-work) |
A candidate who wishes to offer one paper may offer either of the two written papers from the subject History and Philosophy of Science from Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos.
A candidate who wishes to offer two papers may offer one of the following options, which shall count as two papers:
Chemistry A (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Chemistry B (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
[Geological Sciences A] 〈Earth Sciences A〉43 (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
[Geological Sciences B] 〈Earth Sciences B〉43 (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
History and Philosophy of Science (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Materials Science (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Physics A (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Physics B (the examination requirements for this subject as set out in the regulations for Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos)
Candidates may offer one or two papers from Group C in Regulation 18 of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos. Where, under the regulations for that Tripos, a paper may be offered in a form of assessment other than a written paper, the paper offered shall be submitted under conditions specified in the regulations for the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos.
1. The Engineering Tripos shall consist of four Parts, Part Ia, Part Ib, Part IIa, and Part IIb.
2. No student who has been a candidate for any Part of the Engineering Tripos shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
3. The Faculty Board of Engineering shall nominate such number of Examiners as they think sufficient for each Part of the Engineering Tripos. They may also nominate for appointment one or more Assessors to the Examiners in such subjects as they consider desirable; the Assessors so appointed shall set papers or parts of papers and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in their subjects. The Assessors, when summoned by the Chair, shall attend meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
4. In each Part of the Engineering Tripos the questions proposed by each Examiner or Assessor shall be approved by the body of Examiners, or by a sub-group of those Examiners as nominated by the Chair of Examiners.
5. The Faculty Board shall have power to define or limit by supplementary regulations all or any of the subjects of examination, to determine the credit that shall be assigned to each subject, and to mark out the lines of study that are to be pursued by candidates. They shall also have power to modify or alter any such supplementary regulations as occasion may require, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any change.
6. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
7. The following papers shall be set in Part Ia:
1. Mechanical engineering
2. Structures and materials
3. Electrical and information engineering
4. Mathematical methods
Every candidate shall offer all four papers. Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration.
8. The Examiners shall take into account such course-work done by candidates as shall from time to time be determined by the Faculty Board. For this purpose the Head of the Department of Engineering shall present to the Examiners detailed reports on the performance of each candidate in this course-work. Details of the work required of candidates shall be published by the Faculty Board by Notice in the Department of Engineering not later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
9. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in Part Ia shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
10. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ib:
11. The following papers shall be set in Part Ib:
1. Mechanics
2. Structures
3. Materials
4. Thermofluid mechanics
5. Electrical engineering
6. Information engineering
7. Mathematical methods
8. Selected topics
Each paper in Part Ib shall be of two hours’ duration, except Paper 8. The examination for Paper 8 shall consist of either a written paper of two and a half hours’ duration, or a written paper of one and a half hours’ duration and the submission of course-work in one foreign language. Every candidate shall offer all eight papers.
12. The Examiners shall take into account such course-work done by candidates as shall from time to time be determined by the Faculty Board. For this purpose the Head of the Department of Engineering shall present to the Examiners detailed reports on the performance of each candidate in this course-work. Details of the work required of candidates shall be published by the Faculty Board by Notice in the Department of Engineering not later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
13. In order to obtain honours in Part Ib a candidate must satisfy the Examiners that he or she has such industrial or equivalent experience as shall be determined from time to time by the Faculty Board.
14. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in Part Ib shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
15. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part IIa of the Engineering Tripos:
16. The scheme of examination for Part IIa of the Engineering Tripos shall be as follows:
Group A: |
Energy, fluid mechanics, and turbomachinery |
Group B: |
Electrical engineering |
Group C: |
Mechanics, materials, and design |
Group D: |
Civil, structural, and environmental engineering |
Group E: |
Management and manufacturing |
Group F: |
Information engineering |
Group G: |
Bioengineering |
Group I: |
Imported modules from other courses |
Group M: |
Multidisciplinary modules |
Group S: |
Modules shared with Part IIb of the Engineering Tripos |
In each of Groups A, B, E, and F the Faculty Board shall prescribe modules whose total duration for written papers shall be nine hours. In each of Groups C and D the Faculty Board shall prescribe modules whose total duration for written papers shall be ten and a half hours. In Group G the Faculty Board shall prescribe modules whose total duration for written papers shall be no more than nine hours. Not later than the end of the Easter Term each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of the modules prescribed for the examination to be held in the academical year next following, and shall specify the mode of examination for each module. In giving such notice the Faculty Board shall announce combinations of modules which satisfy the qualifying conditions for each engineering area specified by the Board and shall have power to announce restrictions on the combination of modules that a candidate may choose to offer.
17. Each module in Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G shall be examined either by a written paper of one and a half hours or by a written paper of three hours. Each module in Groups I, M, and S shall be examined either by a written paper of one and a half hours or by a written paper of one and a half hours, and course-work.
18. Each candidate shall offer modules whose total duration for written papers amounts to fifteen hours, chosen subject to any restrictions announced by the Faculty Board under Regulation 16.
19. The Examiners shall take into account such course-work done by candidates as shall from time to time be determined by the Faculty Board. For this purpose the Head of the Department of Engineering shall present to the Examiners detailed reports on the performance of each candidate in this course-work. Details of the work required of candidates shall be published by the Faculty Board by Notice in the Department of Engineering not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
20. Every candidate submitting course-work under Regulations 18 or 19 shall be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration; if two or more candidates have undertaken work in collaboration, they shall be required to indicate the extent of their collaboration.
21. In order to obtain honours in Part IIa of the Engineering Tripos a candidate must satisfy the Examiners that he or she has such industrial or equivalent experience as shall be determined from time to time by the Faculty Board; a statement of each candidate's experience shall be certified by the Head of the Department of Engineering.
22. For each combination of subjects in Part IIa, announced by the Faculty Board under Regulation 16 as an engineering area, there shall be a separate class-list. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in each engineering area shall be arranged in three classes, the second of which shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence in Part IIa a mark of distinction may be awarded.
23. A candidate who, under arrangements approved by the Faculty Board of Engineering, has spent not less than three terms studying at an institution listed in the Schedule to these regulations and who has been certified by the head of that institution, after consultation with the Chair of Examiners for Part IIa of the Engineering Tripos, to have studied diligently during that period, shall be deemed thereby to have obtained honours in Part IIa of the Engineering Tripos. A list containing the names of persons so qualified shall be certified by the Chair of the Faculty Board of Engineering and published in the Reporter.
24. A student who has obtained honours in Part IIa of the Engineering Tripos or has been deemed to have obtained honours in Part IIa of the Engineering Tripos under Regulation 23 may, in the year after or next but one after so obtaining honours, be a candidate for honours in Part IIb of the Engineering Tripos, provided that he or she
provided always that fifteen complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.44
25. The scheme of examination for Part IIb of the Engineering Tripos shall be as follows:
Group A: |
Energy, fluid mechanics, and turbomachinery |
Group B: |
Electrical engineering |
Group C: |
Mechanics, materials, and design |
Group D: |
Civil, structural, and environmental engineering |
Group E: |
Management and manufacturing |
Group F: |
Information engineering |
Group G: |
Bioengineering |
Group I: |
Imported modules from other courses |
Group M: |
Multidisciplinary modules |
Group R: |
Research modules |
In each group except Groups G, I, M, and R the Faculty Board shall prescribe not fewer than six and not more than twelve modules for examination; each module shall be examined either by a written paper which shall normally be of one and a half hours' duration or by course-work or by a combination of the two. Not later than the end of the Easter Term each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of the modules prescribed for the examination to be held in the academical year next following, and shall specify the mode of examination for each module. In giving such notice the Faculty Board shall announce combinations of modules which satisfy the qualifying conditions for each engineering area specified by the Board and shall have power to announce restrictions on the combination of modules that a candidate may choose to offer. For modules to be examined by course-work, an outline of the work required of candidates shall be published by the Faculty Board by Notice in the Department of Engineering not later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
26. Each candidate
27. With the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate for Part IIb may submit, in place of any one of the modules which he or she would otherwise be required to offer under Regulation 26(b) a dissertation on a subject approved by the Faculty Board which falls within the field of the module concerned.
28. A candidate who wishes to offer a dissertation under Regulation 27 shall submit a statement of the modules that he or she intends to offer under Regulation 26(b), together with details of the project to be undertaken under Regulation 26(a) and the title of the proposed dissertation, to the Secretary of the Faculty Board, in accordance with any instructions issued by the Faculty Board, not later than the fourth Wednesday of Full Michaelmas Term in the year of candidature. A candidate shall obtain the approval of his or her proposed scheme of examination, and of the title of the dissertation, by the Faculty Board not later than the end of the third quarter of the Michaelmas Term.
29. A dissertation offered under Regulation 27 shall contain full references to any sources used in its composition, and shall be of not less than 4,000 words and not more than 5,000 words in length, including footnotes and appendices. Candidates shall submit their dissertations to the Chair of Examiners not later than the end of the first week of Full Easter Term in the year of candidature. Each dissertation shall be in typewritten form (unless previous permission has been obtained from the Faculty Board through a candidate's Tutor to present the dissertation in manuscript).
30. Every candidate submitting project work under Regulation 26(a) or course-work under Regulation 26(b) shall be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration; if two or more candidates have undertaken work in collaboration, they shall be required to indicate the extent of their collaboration. Every candidate submitting a dissertation under Regulation 27 shall be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is his or her own work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
31. For each combination of subjects in Part IIb, announced by the Faculty Board under Regulation 25 as an engineering area, there shall be a separate class-list. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in each engineering area shall be arranged in alphabetical order in a single class, with distinctive marks attached to the names of those candidates who in the opinion of the Examiners deserve special credit, (d) for a distinguished performance, (m) for a meritorious performance.
Institutions approved for the purpose of Regulation 23 (Exchange Programmes)
Massachusetts Institute of Technology |
Ecole Centrale Paris |
Technical University of Munich |
National University of Singapore |
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: kinematics of particles and rigid bodies, and dynamics of particles, in two dimensions; mechanical vibrations; basic concepts of thermodynamics, fluid mechanics, and their applications.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: equilibrium, compatibility and elasticity of structures; buckling phenomena in simple structures; properties and applications of engineering materials; the physical origins of the properties.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: linear circuits and devices; electromagnetics; digital circuits and information processing.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: vectors, functions, and complex numbers; ordinary differential equations; Fourier series, matrices; functions of several variables; probability; computing.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: kinematics and dynamics of particles and rigid bodies; moment of momentum; D’Alembert's principle; accelerations and dynamic stresses in mechanisms; applications to machinery.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: elastic analysis of statically indeterminate beams and frames; stress and strain in thin-walled structures; analysis of stress and strain; the Tresca and von Mises yield criteria; plastic theory of structures.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: the thermal and thermomechanical behaviour of engineering materials; the forming, joining, and heat treatment of engineering materials, and the control of microstructure and properties; the influence of manufacturing processes on design and material selection.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: fluid dynamics, including boundary layers and internal flows: heat transfer by convection; heat exchangers; thermodynamics, including irreversibility, properties of working fluids, non-ideal cycles, and power generation.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: transistors; operational amplifiers with feedback; power in AC circuits; electrical machines; electromagnetic waves.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: control systems; transfer functions; feedback; stability; signal and data analysis; communications; signal and transmission path characteristics; modulation; digitizations of signals.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on: vector calculus and PDEs; probability; linear algebra.
The paper shall consist mainly of questions on topics in professional engineering activities as shall from time to time be determined by the Faculty Board, and divided into sections corresponding to those activities. Candidates will be required to answer questions from two sections or, in the case of candidates offering a foreign language, one section. In addition there will be a section on Introductory Business Economics, from which candidates will be required to answer one question.
1. The English Tripos shall consist of two Parts.
2. The scheme of the examination shall be as defined in Regulations 15–18.
3. Public notice of all the variable subjects and of the texts or portions of subjects specified for special study shall be given by the Faculty Board of English before the end of the Easter Term in the year next but one preceding the examination to which they apply; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected. The Board shall have power when they give notice of the variable subjects selected for a particular examination to announce any consequential restriction on the combination of papers that a candidate may choose to offer.
The Board shall have power to define or limit by supplementary regulations all or any of the subjects of examination, and to modify or alter such supplementary regulations as occasion may require.
4. The following may present themselves for examination in Part I:
5. A student who has obtained honours in Part I of the English Tripos or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for Part II in the year after or next but one after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.46
6. No student shall be a candidate for both Parts, or for either Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
7. No student who has been a candidate for either Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
8. No student who has failed to attain the standard for honours in Part I shall be a candidate for Part II.
9. (a) To conduct the examination in each Part of the Tripos the Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they deem appropriate.
(b) The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate Assessors to assist the Examiners for each Part of the Tripos. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
10. Before the examination there shall be general meetings of the Examiners for Part I and of the Examiners for Part II, when the papers set by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for their approval, and shall be settled by the Examiners for each Part in common.
11. In each Part the answers to the questions in each paper shall be read by two of the whole body of Examiners and Assessors for that Part.
12. The style and method of the candidates’ answers shall be taken into account.
13. The Examiners for Part I and the Examiners for Part II shall hold separate meetings, at which the class-list for each Part shall be drawn up. In each of these lists the names of the candidates who deserve honours shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
14. For special excellence in either Part a mark of distinction may be awarded.
15. The papers in Part I shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
English literature and its contexts, 1300–1550 (also serves as Paper 21 in Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)) |
Paper 2. |
English literature and its contexts, 1500–1700 (also serves as Paper 22 in Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)) |
Paper 3. |
English literature and its contexts, 1688–1847 (also serves as Paper 24 in Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)) |
Paper 4. |
English literature and its contexts, 1830 to the present (also serves as Paper 25 in Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)) |
Paper 5. |
Shakespeare (also serves as Paper 23 in Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)) |
Paper 6. |
Practical criticism and critical practice |
Paper 7. |
European languages and literatures |
Paper 8. |
English language for literature, 1300 to the present |
Paper 9. |
English literature and its contexts, 1300 to the present (open dissertation) |
Paper 10. |
Early medieval literature and its contexts (also serves as Paper 20 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations), as Paper O9 of Part II of the Classical Tripos, and as Paper 11 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 11. |
Insular Latin language and literature (Paper 9 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 12. |
Old Norse language and literature (Paper 6 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 13. |
Medieval Welsh language and literature (Paper 7 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 14. |
Medieval Irish language and literature (Paper 8 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Every paper shall be set for three hours except Papers 1, 6, 7, and 8 which shall be set for three and a half hours, and Paper 9 which shall comprise a dissertation, to be submitted in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 20, the topic of which must fall within the scope of Papers 1–5 but may range across the chronological boundaries of individual papers within this group.
16. Every candidate for Part I shall offer Papers 1 and 5 and
provided that
17. (a) A candidate who intends to offer a portfolio under Regulation 16(ii) shall notify the Director of Undergraduate Studies through his or her Director of Studies, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board. Such notification shall be not later than a date in the Full Lent Term to be promulgated by the Board in the Michaelmas Term.
(b) A portfolio submitted under Regulation 16(ii) shall consist of three essays, each of not fewer than 1,500 words and not more than 2,000 words in length. Portfolio essays must be on subjects of literary interest which fall within the scope of the paper for which they are substituted. The portfolio of essays as a whole should exhibit a range and substance comparable with that required by the examination paper for which it is substituted. It should show knowledge of work before and after the date specified in the rubric for the paper for which it was substituted. Candidates will be required to declare that the essays are their own work and that they do not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. Where appropriate full and proper acknowledgement must be given to the work of others.
(c) The essays shall be typewritten, in English, with proper attention to style and presentation; they shall be submitted through the candidate's Director of Studies to the Director of Undergraduate Studies, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board, so as to arrive not later than the last Thursday of the Full Lent Term next preceding the examination. Candidates may be called for viva voce examination in connection with their portfolios.
18. The papers in Part II shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
Practical criticism |
Paper 2. |
Tragedy (also serves as Paper O3 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
Paper 3. |
Chaucer |
Paper 4. |
Medieval English literature, 1066–1500 (also serves as Paper 13 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 5. |
Special period of English literature (taken from the period after 1500 and before 1700) |
Paper 6. |
Special period of English literature (taken from the period after 1700) |
Paper 7. |
Special subject I |
Paper 8. |
English moralists |
Paper 9. |
History and theory of literary criticism (also serves as Paper O4 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
Paper 10. |
Postcolonial and related literatures |
Paper 11. |
American literature |
Paper 12. |
Special subject II |
Paper 13. |
History of the English language48 |
Paper 14. |
Early medieval literature and its contexts (Paper 10 of Part I of the English Tripos) |
Paper 15. |
Old English language and literature (Paper 5 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 16. |
Insular Latin language and literature (Paper 9 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 17a. |
Old Norse language and literature (Paper 6 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 17b. |
Advanced medieval Scandinavian language and literature (Paper 6 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 18a. |
Medieval Welsh language and literature (Paper 7 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 18b. |
Advanced medieval Welsh language and literature (Paper 7 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 19a. |
Medieval Irish language and literature (Paper 8 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 19b. |
Advanced medieval Irish language and literature (Paper 8 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 20. |
Topics in medieval studies: to be specified by the Faculty Board from time to time (Paper Fr. 7 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 21. |
Living, loving, and dying in Renaissance France (Paper Fr. 8 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 22. |
Reason, experience, and authority: French literature, thought, and history, 1594–1700 (Paper Fr. 9 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 23. |
French literature, thought, and history, from 1690 to 1799 (Paper Fr. 10 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 24. |
Gender, desire, and power in 19th century French culture (Paper Fr. 11 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 25. |
Ethics and experience: literature, thought, and visual culture of the French-speaking world (1900 to the present) (Paper Fr. 12 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 26. |
Dante and the culture of his age (Paper It. 7 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 27a. |
Introduction to Neo-Latin literature, from 1350 to 1700 (Paper NL 1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 27b. |
A special subject in Neo-Latin literature: selected authors (Paper NL 2 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 28. |
A special subject in comparative literature (i) and (ii) (Papers CS 448 and 5 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 29. |
A paper in linguistics (Paper 11 or Paper 13 of Parts IIa and Parts IIb of the Linguistics Tripos)49 |
Paper 30. |
A prescribed Greek author or authors, and a prescribed Latin author or authors (Paper A1 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
Paper 31. |
Prescribed Greek texts (Paper A2 of Part II of the Classical Tripos)48 |
Paper 32. |
Prescribed Latin texts (Paper A3 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
Paper 33. |
English literature and its contexts, 1300–1550 (Paper 1 of Part I of the English Tripos) |
Paper 34. |
English literature and its contexts, 1500–1700 (Paper 2 of Part I of the English Tripos) |
Paper 35. |
English literature and its contexts, 1688–1847 (Paper 3 of Part I of the English Tripos) |
Paper 36. |
English literature and its contexts, 1830 to the present (Paper 4 of Part I of the English Tripos) |
Paper 37. |
Shakespeare (Paper 5 of Part I of the English Tripos) |
Each paper shall be set for three hours except Papers 1 and 33 which shall be set for three and a half hours. The Faculty Board shall announce in every year, subject to the provisions of Regulation 3, not more than four special subjects for Paper 7, and may in addition announce not more than three special subjects for Paper 12; in each case a candidate may offer not more than one of these subjects. A question paper shall be set for each subject so announced and for which there is a candidate. Every candidate who offers a paper in which there is a choice of subjects shall take only one of these question papers; the candidate's examination entry shall state which subject he or she intends to offer.
19. Every candidate for Part II shall offer:
provided that:
20. (a) A candidate who intends to offer either a compulsory dissertation in Part II under Regulation 19(a), or Paper 9, or an optional dissertation in either Part under Regulation 16(i) or Regulation 19(c), shall submit the proposed topic of the dissertation through his or her Director of Studies to the Director of Undergraduate Studies, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board, so as to arrive not later than the penultimate Friday of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
(b) The Director of Undergraduate Studies shall communicate the Board's approval or rejection of the proposed topic to the candidate's Director of Studies. When the Board have approved a topic, no change shall be made in it or in a scheme of work approved by the Board without the further approval of the Board. A candidate may submit a revised topic so as to reach the Director of Undergraduate Studies not later than a date in the Full Lent Term to be promulgated by the Board in the Michaelmas Term; topics submitted after that date will be considered by the Board only in the most exceptional circumstances.
(c) The length of a dissertation shall be as follows:
for Part I, not more than 5,000 words in length;
for Part II, not fewer than 6,000 words and not more than 7,500 words in length.
In each case the prescribed length shall include notes and appendices, although appendices beyond the prescribed limit may be allowed in special circumstances, subject to the approval of the Faculty Board given not later than the division of the Lent Term next preceding the examination. Candidates will be required to declare that the dissertation is their own work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
(d) Every dissertation shall be typewritten, in English, with proper attention to style and presentation in accordance with detailed guidelines issued by the Faculty Board; it shall be sent through the candidate's Director of Studies to the Director of Undergraduate Studies, accompanied by a brief synopsis of its contents and a list of the books and articles used in its preparation, and in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board, so as to arrive not later than the first Tuesday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
(e) A candidate may be called for viva voce examination in connection with his or her dissertation.
21. At the same time as dissertation topics are submitted through candidates’ Directors of Studies to the Director of Undergraduate Studies, each candidate shall submit the whole scheme of work to be offered in the examination. The Director of Undergraduate Studies shall communicate the Board's approval or rejection of the proposed scheme of work to the candidate's Director of Studies.
For the purpose of the regulations and supplementary regulations for Part I of the English Tripos, ‘English literature’ shall be understood to mean the literature in English of the British Isles including Ireland. In Papers 1–5 candidates must answer primarily in relation to English literature thus defined, and questions will not be asked, nor may answers be primarily written, on authors other than those who were born, or have spent a substantial part of their lives working, in the British Isles. This will not however preclude the possibility of comparison, where appropriate, with other literature in English (such as American or Commonwealth), provided that greater weight falls on English literature than on other literature. These rules shall also govern the acceptability of topics for period dissertations substituted for Papers 2, 3, and 4 but not the open dissertation under Paper 9, in which candidates may write on any literature(s) in English irrespective of country of origin. No more than one dissertation may be submitted. Candidates submitting a dissertation under Paper 9 are permitted to offer an examination paper which covers the same period as the topic for the dissertation. Candidates substituting a portfolio for Papers 2–4 may not offer a dissertation under Paper 9 on a topic which falls principally within the scope of the paper for which the portfolio is substituted. More detailed guidance about the acceptability of specific authors as the subjects of examination answers or as the topics of dissertations may be given in a document issued by the Faculty Board of English and revised as necessary from time to time.
Medieval texts shall be prescribed for special study; and passages shall be set from them for translation or comment, or both. The Faculty Board may give notice from time to time of a list of topics on which optional questions will be set. Questions shall be set both on the literature and on the life and thought of the period.
Questions shall be set both on the literature and on the life and thought of the period.50
Questions shall be set both on the literature and on the life and thought of the period.50
Questions shall be set both on the literature and on the life and thought of the period.50
Questions shall be set requiring explanation and discussion of a specified work or specified works. Questions shall also be set on other works of Shakespeare and matters of historical and critical interest relevant to his works.
The paper, which will be set for three and a half hours (including half an hour’s reading time), will consist of questions offering passages of English verse or prose from various periods for critical comment. The passages set may also include extracts from works of literary criticism and theory, some of which may be in translation. The questions will require close critical analysis of the given passages. They will also allow for the raising of general critical and theoretical issues appropriate to the reading of those extracts. Candidates will be required to answer three questions.
The languages within the scope of this paper are: classical Greek; classical Latin; French; German; Italian; Old English. Candidates will not be required to show knowledge of more than one of these languages, though they may do so if they wish. In each language, except in the case of Old English, two texts (or collections of texts) will be prescribed for study. Candidates will be required to show knowledge of two such texts (except in the case of Old English, where only one text is set).
This paper requires candidates to recognize and describe in English writing from 1300 to the present day; linguistic features (such as syntax, lexis, register, elementary phonetics, rhetoric); the relations between spoken and written Englishes; the historical development and study of the language, in its literary and other varieties; contact between English and other languages. The Faculty Board shall, from time to time, prescribe specified topics, with lists of relevant reading. Candidates will be required to answer on at least one of the specified topics.
The topic of a dissertation to be submitted under this paper must fall within the scope of Papers 1–5. It may be comparative across the period boundaries of the individual papers. The dissertation shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with Regulation 20.
The period covered by this paper is 1066–c. 1350. English, French, and Latin texts shall be prescribed for special study, and passages set from them for translation or explanation or both. Questions shall also be set on English, French, and Latin texts of the period. Candidates will be required to show knowledge of one of these three languages, and of work in at least one other of them, which they may, if they wish, have studied in translation. Candidates are expected to show such knowledge of the life and thought of the period as is necessary for the understanding of its literature.
Passages of English prose and verse for critical comment.
Tragedy ancient and modern in connection and comparison with English Tragedy.
Candidates will be expected to show a full and detailed knowledge of the works of Chaucer. Questions shall be set on those works and on Chaucer's relationship to his contemporaries and to the life and thought of his age.
A specific literary subject shall be prescribed for special study. It shall be of a kind to require reading in early as well as in late medieval English literature and may involve the study of related texts from other languages.
Candidates will be required to show a substantial knowledge of the literature of whatever period is prescribed together with its life and thought.
Candidates will be required to show a substantial knowledge of the literature of whatever period is prescribed together with its life and thought.
The work of an author or of a group of authors, or a literary topic or genre, or a period not already prescribed for Paper 5 or Paper 6, within the field of English literature, shall be prescribed for special study. Relevant texts may be recommended for study from time to time. In accordance with Regulation 18 the Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe a number of such special subjects of which one may be offered by candidates for this paper.
Questions will be set on the history and nature of moral thought, broadly interpreted. Candidates will be invited to show knowledge of a range of literary, philosophical, social, and political writings by authors from Plato to the present, but the paper will normally permit concentration on a particular chronological period or selection of authors. Candidates will also be given opportunities to relate the themes of this paper to their existing interests in poetry, drama, and the novel. From time to time a special topic may be specified for study.
The paper shall comprise historical, critical, and comparative questions on works and problems in the history of literary criticism and also of literary theory from the fourth century bc to the present day. A sufficient number of questions will be set to enable candidates to choose questions on a limited chronological period (including the modern period).
The scope of the paper is, subject to the following qualifications, literature in English outside the British Isles and the United States of America. It includes expatriate nationals publishing in those countries (e.g. Rushdie, d’Aguiar, Lessing). Comparative and incidental reference to British, Irish, American, and foreign language texts is welcome but should not form the greater part of any single answer. Answering on texts in translation is permitted but should not constitute the greater part of answers to the paper as a whole.
The paper will be divided into two sections. Section A will consist of passages for comment; Section B will consist of essay questions, enabling comparison between texts from different regions.
The subject covered by this paper is American literature, life, and thought, with special reference to the period from 1820 to the present day. A list of books may be recommended from time to time for special study. All candidates will be expected to show such knowledge of the life and thought of the period as is necessary for understanding its literature.
For a year for which a subject is announced for this paper under Regulation 18, the work of an author or of a group of authors, or a literary topic or genre, or a period not already prescribed for Paper 5, or 6, or 7, shall be prescribed for special study. Relevant foreign texts as well as English texts may be recommended for study from time to time. In accordance with Regulation 18 the Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe a number of such special subjects of which one may be offered by candidates for this paper.
This paper will be concerned with the historical development and structure of the English language and of its internal and extra-territorial varieties. A specified topic will be prescribed for special study.
The paper will be divided into two sections. Section A will contain questions pertaining to the specified topic; Section B will contain essay questions of a more general nature. Candidates will be required to answer one question from Section A and two questions from Section B.
For the purpose of Regulations 19(a) and 19(c) governing the submission of dissertations in Part II of the Tripos, ‘English literature’ shall be understood to mean literature written in the English language (including Old English), works written by authors of the British Isles in other languages, such as Latin or French, and works written in Old Norse and the Medieval Celtic languages. It shall be understood to embrace the English language and such philosophical, historical, and other writing as normally comes within the scope of the English Tripos.
Where a topic is chosen involving comparison with a foreign literature, the dissertation should be primarily on an English literary topic, though there is no objection to comparison with other literature where this is relevant. Where a topic involves comparison between literature and another medium such as music or the visual arts, the weight of the dissertation should likewise fall on literature (which may, for example, include libretti). Discussion of work produced in a medium other than literature is not admissible as the exclusive topic of a dissertation.
More detailed guidance about the acceptability of specific writings as the topic of a dissertation may be given in a document issued by the Faculty Board of English and revised as necessary from time to time.
1. The English Tripos shall consist of two Parts.
2. (a) For the purposes of the Regulations and any Supplementary Regulations, the study of ‘English literature’ shall be understood to mean, in both Parts of the Tripos, the study of literary works written in the English language (including Old English); of literary works of the British Isles including Ireland (whether written in English, or in other languages such as Latin or French); and of literary works written in Old Norse and the Medieval Celtic languages. It shall be understood to embrace the study of the English language.
(b) The study of ‘English literature’ shall normally also embrace, in both Parts of the Tripos, English literary translations of works originally written in other languages, so long as due consideration is given to the fact of translation.
(c) For Part I of the English Tripos, the study of ‘English literature’ shall also embrace such philosophical, historical and other writing as normally comes within the scope of Papers 1 to 8E of that Part as illustrated by reading lists announced by the Faculty Board.
(d) For Part II of the English Tripos, the study of ‘English literature’ shall also embrace such philosophical, historical and other writing, and such products of non-literary media and expressive forms, as normally come within the scope of Papers 1 to 30 of that Part as illustrated by reading lists announced by the Faculty Board.
(e) In both Parts of the Tripos, relevant comparisons with other materials that fall outside the scope of ‘English literature’ thus defined shall be accepted, both in written papers that focus on the study of ‘English literature’ and in dissertations and portfolios of essays that focus on the same; but only so long as greater weight falls, in each answer, dissertation or essay offered in this context, on materials that come within the aforementioned scope.
(f) In addition, in both Parts of the Tripos, the English Tripos shall include certain papers which concentrate on the study of literatures other than ‘English literature’ thus defined. However, it shall not be permissible to make this material the principal basis of any dissertation, any essay within a portfolio of essays, or any answer to a written paper primarily concerned with ‘English literature’.
3. The scheme of the examination shall be as defined in Regulations 14 to 21.
4. Notice of all the variable papers available for examination, and of the variable subjects, texts, or portions of subjects specified for special study, shall be given by the Faculty Board of English before the end of the Easter Term (i) two years prior to the examination in the case of Part I of the Tripos, (ii) one year prior to the examination in the case of Part II of the Tripos; provided that, in both cases, the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student’s preparation for her or his examination will be adversely affected. The Board shall have power when they give notice of the variable subjects selected for a particular examination to announce any consequential restriction on the combination of papers that a candidate may offer. The Board shall have power to define or limit by supplementary regulations all or any of the subjects of examination, and to modify or alter such supplementary regulations as occasion may require.
5. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part I:
6. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part II:
7. No student shall be a candidate for both Parts, or for either Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
8. No student who has been a candidate for either Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
9. (a) To conduct the examination in each Part of the Tripos the Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they deem appropriate.
(b) The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate Assessors to assist the Examiners for each Part of the Tripos. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
10. Before the examination there shall be general meetings of the Examiners for Part I and of the Examiners for Part II, when the papers set by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of each Part’s Examiners for their approval and shall be settled by the Examiners for each Part.
11. The Examiners for Part I and the Examiners for Part II shall hold separate meetings, at which the class-list for each Part shall be drawn up. In each of these lists the names of the candidates who deserve honours shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
12. For special excellence in either Part a mark of distinction may be awarded.
13. In each examination, candidates must not use the same material twice, either within any given paper or across the examination as a whole. Nor should material be repeated from one examination to the next.
14. The papers in Part I shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
Practical criticism and critical practice |
Paper 2. |
Early medieval literature and its contexts, 1066–1350 (also serves as Paper 20 of Part II of the English Tripos, as Paper O9 of Part II of the Classical Tripos, and as Paper 11 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 3. |
English literature and its contexts, 1300–1550 (also serves as Paper 21 of Part II of the English Tripos) |
Paper 4. |
English literature and its contexts, 1500–1700 (also serves as Paper 22 of Part II of the English Tripos) |
Paper 5. |
Shakespeare (also serves as Paper 23 of Part II of the English Tripos) |
Paper 6. |
English literature and its contexts, 1660–1870 (also serves as Paper 24 of Part II of the English Tripos) |
Paper 7A. |
English literature and its contexts, 1830–1945 (also serves as Paper 25A of Part II of the English Tripos) |
Paper 7B. |
English literature and its contexts, 1870–present (also serves as Paper 25B of Part II of the English Tripos) |
Paper 8A. |
Old English language and literature (Paper 5 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos. Also serves as Paper 26 of Part II of the English Tripos) |
Paper 8B. |
Old Norse language and literature (Paper 6 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos. Also serves as Paper 27A of Part II of the English Tripos) |
Paper 8C. |
Medieval Welsh language and literature (Paper 7 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos. Also serves as Paper 28A of Part II of the English Tripos) |
Paper 8D. |
Medieval Irish language and literature (Paper 8 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos. Also serves as Paper 29A of Part II of the English Tripos) |
Paper 8E. |
Insular Latin language and literature (Paper 9 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos. Also serves as Paper 30 of Part II of the English Tripos) |
Paper 9A. |
Greek literature (Paper 5 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos) |
Paper 9B. |
Latin literature (Paper 6 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos) |
Paper 10A. |
Introduction to French literature, linguistics, film, and thought (Paper Fr.1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10B. |
Love, violence, and power in France 1100–1500 (Paper Fr.3 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10C. |
Rethinking the human: French literature, thought, and culture 1500–1700 (Paper Fr.4 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10D. |
Revolutions in writing, 1700–1900 (Paper Fr.5 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10E. |
Innovation and upheaval: deformation and reformulation in the 20th and 21st centuries (Paper Fr.6 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10F. |
Texts and contexts (Paper A3 in Italian of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10G. |
Introduction to German studies (Paper Ge.1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10H. |
The making of German culture, I (Paper Ge.4 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10I. |
Modern German culture, I (Paper Ge.5 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10J. |
Modern German culture, II (Paper Ge.6 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10K. |
Introduction to the language, literatures, and cultures of the Spanish-speaking world (Paper Sp.1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10L. |
Introduction to the language, literatures, and cultures of Portuguese-speaking countries (Paper Pg.1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10M. |
Introduction to Russian culture (Paper Sl.1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10N. |
Russian culture from the Golden Age to the Silver Age (Paper Sl.4 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10O. |
Russian culture after 1880 (Paper Sl.5 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10P. |
Introduction to the language, literature, and culture of Ukraine (Paper Sl.9 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Every paper shall be set for three hours except Papers 1 and 3 which shall be set for three and a half hours.
15. Every candidate for Part I shall offer Papers 3 and 5 and any four papers from among Papers 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10, provided that
16. (a) A candidate who intends to offer a dissertation under Regulation 15(iii) shall submit the proposed topic of the dissertation for formal approval to the Director of Undergraduate Studies of the Faculty Board through her or his Director of Studies in accordance with the arrangements for such notification approved by the Board. Such proposals must be made by the penultimate Friday of the Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. Once a topic has been approved on behalf of the Faculty Board, no change shall be made to it without further formal approval. A candidate may, however, submit a revised topic for approval so as to reach the Director of Undergraduate Studies at any time up until the sixth Wednesday of the Full Lent Term preceding the examination.
(b) The dissertation must be on a topic of ‘English literature’ (as defined by Regulation 2) falling within the scope of the paper for which the dissertation is substituted. Relevant comparisons may be made with other materials, whether those be drawn from elsewhere in Part I or (in accordance with Regulation 2(e)) from beyond Part I, so long as greater weight falls on materials that come within the scope of the relevant paper.
(c) The length of a dissertation shall be not fewer than 4,000 words and not more than 5,000 words. The prescribed length shall include notes and appendices, although appendices beyond the prescribed limit may be allowed in special circumstances, subject to formal approval given on behalf of the Faculty Board not later than the sixth Wednesday of the Full Lent Term preceding the examination. Every dissertation shall be typewritten, in English, paying proper attention to style and presentation.
(d) Candidates shall be required to declare that the dissertation is their own work and that it does not contain material used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose prior to the date of its submission. Where appropriate, full and proper acknowledgement must be given to the work of others via footnotes. The dissertation must be accompanied by a synopsis of its contents of not fewer than 100 words and not more than 150 words, and by a bibliography of the books, articles, and electronic and online resources used in its preparation. The prescribed length detailed under sub-paragraph (c) above shall include neither the synopsis nor the bibliography.
(e) The dissertation shall be submitted to the Director of Undergraduate Studies through the candidate’s Director of Studies, in accordance with arrangements approved by the Faculty Board, so as to arrive at the Faculty not later than 5 p.m. on the first Tuesday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
(f) Candidates may be called for viva voce examination in connection with their dissertations.
17. (a) A candidate who intends to offer a portfolio of essays under Regulation 15(iv) shall notify the Director of Undergraduate Studies of the Faculty Board through her or his Director of Studies in accordance with the arrangements for such notification approved by the Board. Initial such notification must be made by the penultimate Friday of the Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. Notification of any change of intention thereafter must be made no later than the sixth Wednesday of the Full Lent Term preceding the examination.
(b) A portfolio shall consist of three essays. All of the essays must be on topics of ‘English literature’ (as defined by Regulation 2) falling within the scope of the paper for which the portfolio is substituted. Relevant comparisons may be made with other materials, whether those be drawn from elsewhere in Part I or (in accordance with Regulation 2(e)) from beyond Part I, so long as greater weight falls, in each essay, on materials that come within the scope of the relevant paper. It must also demonstrate substantial knowledge of English literature before and after the medial date specified for the paper for which it stands in substitution.
(c) Each essay shall be not fewer than 1,500 words and not more than 2,000 words in length. The prescribed length shall include any notes. The essays shall be typewritten, in English, paying proper attention to style and presentation.
(d) Candidates shall be required to declare that the essays are their own work and that they do not contain material used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose prior to the date of their submission. Where appropriate, full and proper acknowledgment must be given to the work of others, although formal footnoting shall not be a requirement. Each essay must be accompanied by a bibliography of the books, articles, and electronic and online resources used in its preparation. The prescribed length shall exclude these bibliographies.
(e) The portfolio shall be submitted to the Director of Undergraduate Studies through the candidate’s Director of Studies, in accordance with arrangements approved by the Faculty Board, so as to arrive at the Faculty not later than 5 p.m. on the last Thursday of the Full Lent Term preceding the examination.
(f) Candidates may be called for viva voce examination in connection with their portfolios.
18. The papers in Part II shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
Practical criticism |
Paper 2. |
Tragedy (also serves as Paper O3 of Part II of the Classical Tripos)52 |
Paper 3. |
Compulsory dissertation |
Paper 4. |
Optional dissertation |
Paper 5. |
Chaucer52 |
Paper 6. |
Medieval English literature, 1066–1500 (also serves as Paper 13 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 7. |
Early modern drama, 1588–1642 |
Paper 8. |
Material Renaissance |
Paper 9. |
Lyric |
Paper 10. |
English literature, 1847–1872 |
Paper 11. |
Modernism and the short story |
Paper 12. |
Contemporary writing in English |
Paper 13. |
Postcolonial and related literatures52 |
Paper 14. |
American literature |
Paper 15. |
English moralists |
Paper 16. |
History and theory of literary criticism (also serves as Paper O4 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
Paper 17. |
Shakespeare in performance |
Paper 18. |
Literature and visual culture52 |
Paper 19. |
A paper or papers in English literature announced by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
Paper 20. |
Early medieval literature and its contexts, 1066–1350 (Paper 2 of Part I of the English Tripos; also serves as Paper O9 of Part II of the Classical Tripos, and as Paper 11 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 21. |
English literature and its contexts, 1300–1550 (Paper 3 of Part I of the English Tripos) |
Paper 22. |
English literature and its contexts, 1500–1700 (Paper 4 of Part I of the English Tripos) |
Paper 23. |
Shakespeare (Paper 5 of Part I of the English Tripos) |
Paper 24. |
English literature and its contexts, 1660–1870 (Paper 6 of Part I of the English Tripos) |
Paper 25A. |
English literature and its contexts, 1830–1945 (Paper 7A of Part I of the English Tripos) |
Paper 25B. |
English literature and its contexts, 1870–present (Paper 7B of Part I of the English Tripos) |
Paper 26. |
Old English language and literature (Paper 5 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos. Also serves as Paper 8A of Part I of the English Tripos (New Regulations)) |
Paper 27A. |
Old Norse language and literature (Paper 6 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos. Also serves as Paper 8B of Part I of the English Tripos (New Regulations)) |
Paper 27B. |
Advanced medieval Scandinavian language and literature (Paper 6 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 28A. |
Medieval Welsh language and literature (Paper 7 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos. Also serves as Paper 8C of Part I of the English Tripos (New Regulations)) |
Paper 28B. |
Advanced medieval Welsh language and literature (Paper 7 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 29A. |
Medieval Irish language and literature (Paper 8 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos. Also serves as Paper 8D of Part I of the English Tripos (New Regulations)) |
Paper 29B. |
Advanced medieval Irish language and literature (Paper 8 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 30. |
Insular Latin language and literature (Paper 9 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos. Also serves as Paper 8E of Part I of the English Tripos (New Regulations)) |
Paper 31. |
A prescribed Greek author or authors, and a prescribed Latin author or authors (Paper A1 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
Paper 32. |
Prescribed Greek texts (Paper A2 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
Paper 33. |
Prescribed Latin texts (Paper A3 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
Paper 34. |
Topics in medieval studies to be specified by the Faculty Board from time to time (Paper Fr.7 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 35. |
Living, loving, and dying in Renaissance France (Paper Fr.8 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 36. |
Reason, experience, and authority: French literature, thought, and history, 1594–1700 (Paper Fr.9 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 37. |
French literature, thought, and history, from 1690–1799 (Paper Fr.10 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 38. |
Gender, desire, and power in 19th century French culture (Paper Fr.11 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 39. |
Ethics and experience: literature, thought, and visual culture of the French-speaking world (1900–present) (Paper Fr.12 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 40. |
Dante and the culture of his age (Paper It.7 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 41A. |
Introduction to Neo-Latin literature, from 1350 to 1700 (Paper NL.1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 41B. |
A special subject in Neo-Latin literature (Paper NL.2 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 42A. |
A special subject in comparative literature (i) (Paper CS.4 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 42B. |
A special subject in comparative literature (ii) (Paper CS.5 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 43A. |
Historical linguistics (Paper 11 of the Linguistics Tripos)53 |
Paper 43B. |
History of the English language (Paper 13 of the Linguistics Tripos)54 |
Every paper shall be set for three hours except Papers 1 and 21 which shall be set for three and a half hours. Under the provisions of Regulation 4, the Faculty Board shall announce, each year, the variable papers in Group B (Papers 5 to 19) and Group C (Papers 26 to 43) that shall be available for examination in the following year. A question paper shall be set for every paper in the given year’s schedule (other than Papers 3 and 4) for which there is a candidate.
19. Every candidate for Part II shall offer:
20. (a) Every candidate shall submit her or his scheme of work (a list of papers to be offered for examination), together with the proposed topic(s) of her or his dissertation(s), for formal approval to the Director of Undergraduate Studies of the Faculty Board through her or his Director of Studies in accordance with the arrangements for such notification approved by the Board. Submissions must be made by the penultimate Friday of the Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination.
(b) The Director of Undergraduate Studies and the Undergraduate Submissions Committee, acting on behalf of the Faculty Board, shall consider each such submission with respect to two considerations:
(c) Once a scheme of work and topic(s) have been approved on behalf of the Faculty Board, no change shall be made to them without further formal approval. A candidate may, however, submit a revised scheme and/or topic(s) for approval so as to reach the Director of Undergraduate Studies at any time up until the sixth Wednesday of the Full Lent Term preceding the examination.
21. (a) Every candidate, in offering one or more dissertations under Regulation 19, shall submit the proposed topic(s) thereof for formal approval in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 20.
(b) Dissertations must be on topics of ‘English literature’ as defined under Regulation 2, save that (Regulation 2(b) notwithstanding) where Part II ‘English literature’ papers such as Papers 2, 9, 15, and 16 encompass the study of specified musical or foreign-language materials, permission to make these latter materials the primary focus of a dissertation shall be at the discretion of the Undergraduate Submissions Committee, acting on behalf of the Faculty Board. Relevant comparisons may always be made with any foreign-language materials or materials that fall outside the scope of ‘English literature’ without obtaining prior permission, so long as those comparisons are made subject to the terms of Regulation 2(e).
22. (i) The examinations for Part I of the English Tripos shall be held under the Old Regulations for the last time in 2014. They shall be held under the New Regulations for the first time in 2015.
(ii) The examinations for Part II of the English Tripos shall be held under the Old Regulations for the last time in 2013. They shall be held under the New Regulations for the first time in 2014.
1. The Geographical Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
3. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year after obtaining honours either in Part Ia or in another Honours Examination, provided that he or she has kept four terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
4. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part II:
provided that he or she has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.55
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
7. The Faculty Board of Earth Sciences and Geography shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of examination. Due care shall be taken that sufficient notice is given of any alterations of such supplementary regulations.
8. The Faculty Board shall nominate for each Part of the Tripos such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient. There shall be two separate bodies of Examiners, one for Part Ia and Part Ib, and one for Part II. There shall be a separate Chair of Examiners for each body of Examiners.
9. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist each body of Examiners. An Assessor may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
10. The questions proposed by each Examiner and Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for approval.
11. The Examiners shall have regard to the style and method of candidates’ answers, and shall give credit for excellence in these respects.
12. In the class-list for each Part of the Tripos the names of those who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions.
13. For special excellence in each Part of the Tripos a mark of distinction may be awarded.
14. In the examination for each Part of the Tripos the Examiners may take account of the laboratory and field work done by candidates during the courses leading to the examination.
15. Notice of prescribed areas shall be published by the Faculty Board in the Reporter before the end of the Easter Term next preceding the examination to which they apply; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination would be adversely affected.
16. The examination shall consist of two papers as follows:
Paper 1. |
Human geography |
Paper 2. |
Physical geography |
17. Each paper shall be set for three hours. A candidate for Part Ia shall
The Examiners shall have power to examine candidates viva voce on their submitted work.
18. The papers for Part Ib shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
Living with global change |
Paper 2. |
Human geography I |
Paper 3. |
Human geography II |
Paper 4. |
Human geography III |
Paper 5. |
Physical and environmental geography I |
Paper 6. |
Physical and environmental geography II |
Paper 7. |
Physical and environmental geography III |
The paper in Section A and each paper in Section B shall consist of a written paper of two hours’ duration together with the submission of course-work; details of the course-work required of candidates, and the arrangements for the submission of the course-work shall be published by the Faculty Board not later than the division of the Easter Term next preceding the examination.
19. A candidate for Part Ib shall offer:
All items of submitted work in sections (a), (b), and (c) shall be accompanied by a declaration as specified in Regulation 25.
20. The papers for Part II shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
A prescribed topic or topics in human geography I |
Paper 2. |
A prescribed topic or topics in human geography II |
Paper 3. |
A prescribed topic or topics in human geography III |
Paper 4. |
A prescribed topic or topics in human geography IV |
Paper 5. |
A prescribed topic or topics in physical geography I |
Paper 6. |
A prescribed topic or topics in physical geography II |
Paper 7. |
A prescribed topic or topics in physical geography III |
Paper 8. |
A prescribed topic or topics in physical geography IV |
Paper 9. |
A prescribed topic or topics in geography I |
Paper 10. |
A prescribed topic or topics in geography II |
Paper 11. |
A prescribed topic or topics in geography III |
Paper 12. |
A prescribed topic or topics in geography IV |
Each paper shall consist of either a written paper of three hours’ duration or a written paper of two hours’ duration together with the submission of course-work; the mode of examination of each paper, details of the course-work required of candidates, and the arrangements for the submission of the course-work shall be published by the Faculty Board not later than the division of the Easter Term next preceding the examination.
21. A candidate for Part II shall offer any four papers from the papers specified in Regulation 20.
22. Except as provided in (a) and (b) below, every candidate for Part II shall send to the Chair of Examiners so as to arrive not later than the first Tuesday of the Full Term in which the examination is to be held, for submission to the Examiners, a dissertation on some geographical subject. This regulation shall not apply to:
23. Every candidate submitting a dissertation or a critical review essay under Regulation 22(b) shall obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject of the proposed dissertation not later than the end of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
24. A dissertation shall be of not less than 8,000 words and not more than 10,000 words in length, shall be word-processed, unless previous permission has been obtained from the Chair of Examiners through a candidate's Tutor to present the dissertation in manuscript, and shall be accompanied by a declaration as specified in Regulation 25. The dissertation shall be taken into consideration by the Examiners, who shall have power to examine a candidate upon it viva voce.
25. When submitting records of practical exercises for Part Ia (Regulation 17(b)), or course-work, essays and records of practical exercises, and dissertation proposals for Part Ib (Regulations 18 and 19(b)), or course-work or a dissertation for Part II (Regulations 20 and 24), or a critical review essay for Part II (Regulation 22(b)), a candidate will be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration (full and proper acknowledgement being given of the work of others), and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose; if two or more candidates have undertaken practical exercises in collaboration, they will each be required to indicate the extent of their contribution.
1. The Historical Tripos shall consist of two Parts. A separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. The Faculty Board of History shall have power to define or limit by supplementary regulations all or any of the subjects of the examination; to determine the credit that shall be assigned to such subjects respectively; to mark out the lines of study that are to be pursued by candidates; and to modify or alter any such supplementary regulations as occasion may require. They shall also have power to publish from time to time lists of books recommended to the candidates.
3. Before the end of the Easter Term each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of the variable subjects for the examinations to be held in the academical year next but one following; provided that
4. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part I:
5. A student who has obtained honours in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year next after or next but one after so obtaining honours; provided that the student has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
6. An Affiliated Student may be a candidate for honours either in Part I or in Part II as allowed by the Faculty Board in accordance with the regulations for Affiliated Students.
7. No student shall be a candidate for both Parts, or for either Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
8. No student who has been a candidate for either Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
9. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they may deem sufficient for each Part of the Tripos.
10. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in either Part of the Tripos. Assessors shall, if required, set the paper or papers assigned to them, shall look over the work of the candidates therein, and shall present a report to the Examiners. They may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
11. The Examiners shall have regard to the style and method of the candidates’ answers and shall give credit for excellence in these respects.
12. In each Part, the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. A mark of distinction shall be affixed to the names of those candidates placed in the first class whose work either in a part or in the whole of the examination is of special merit. Explanation of the mark shall be limited to the words ‘With distinction’.
13. The scheme of examination for Part I shall be:
Paper 1. |
Themes and sources |
Paper 2. |
British political history, 380–1100 |
Paper 3. |
British political history, 1050–1509 |
Paper 4. |
British political history, 1485–1714 |
Paper 5. |
British political history, 1688–1886 |
Paper 6. |
British political history, since 1880 |
Paper 7. |
British economic and social history, 380–1100 |
Paper 8. |
British economic and social history, 1050–c. 1500 |
Paper 9. |
British economic and social history, c. 1500–1750 |
Paper 10. |
British economic and social history, 1700–1880 |
Paper 11. |
British economic and social history, since c. 1880 |
Paper 12. |
European history, 776 bc–ad 69 |
Paper 13. |
European history, 31 bc–ad 900 |
Paper 14. |
European history, 900–c. 1215 |
Paper 15. |
European history, 1200–1520 |
Paper 16. |
European history, 1450–1760 |
Paper 17. |
European history, 1715–1890 |
Paper 18. |
European history, since 189056 |
Paper 19. |
History of political thought to c. 1700 (also serves as Paper O6 of Part II of the Classical Tripos and Paper POL7 of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos) |
Paper 20. |
History of political thought from c. 1700 to c. 1890 (also serves as Paper POL8 of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos) |
Paper 21. |
Empires and world history from the fifteenth century to the First World War57 |
Paper 23. |
World history since 1914 |
Paper 22. |
North American History, c. 1500 to 1865 |
Paper 24. |
The history of the United States from 1865 |
Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, except Paper 1. The examination for Paper 1 shall consist of the submission of an essay, on a topic chosen from a list of topics announced by the Faculty Board; the length of the essay and the arrangements for its submission shall be prescribed by the Faculty Board from time to time.
14. Candidates for Part I shall offer papers as follows:
provided that
15. The scheme of examination for Part II shall be:
Paper 1. |
Historical argument and practice |
Paper 2. |
Essay Paper |
Paper 3. |
Sources Paper |
Paper 4. |
The history of political thought from c. 1700 to c. 1890 (also serves as Paper Pol. 15 of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos)59 |
Paper 5. |
Political philosophy and the history of political thought since c. 1890 (also serves as Paper Pol. 6 of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos) |
Paper 6. |
States between states: The history of international political thought from the Roman empire to the early nineteenth century |
Papers 7–30. |
A variable number of papers on topics or comparative themes in history specified by the Faculty Board,60 |
provided that within the range of papers listed in Sections B and D, a minimum of one paper in each of the following subject areas shall be offered:
and that no fewer than twelve specified subjects shall be offered in Section D.
16. Candidates for Part II shall offer papers, or papers and a dissertation, as follows:
provided that
17. (a) A candidate for Part II who wishes to offer a dissertation under Regulation 16 shall submit an application, including the title of the proposed dissertation and a statement of the scheme of papers to be offered in the examination. Applications, signed by the candidate's Director of Studies, shall be submitted to the Academic Secretary of the Faculty so as to arrive not later than the division of the Easter Term next preceding the examination. Applications submitted after that date will be considered by the Board only in the most exceptional circumstances.
(b) Each candidate shall obtain the approval of the proposed title by the Faculty Board not later than the last day of August preceding the examination. When the Faculty Board have approved a title, no change shall be made to it without the further approval of the Board. A candidate may submit a revised title so as to reach the Academic Secretary of the Faculty not later than the division of the Lent Term; titles submitted after that date will be considered by the Board only in the most exceptional circumstances.
(c) A dissertation shall be not less than 10,000 words and not more than 15,000 words in length, shall show knowledge of primary sources, and shall give full reference to all sources used. Each dissertation shall be typewritten, with proper attention to style and presentation in accordance with detailed guidelines issued by the Faculty Board. Candidates will be required to provide a brief synopsis of the contents of the dissertation, and to declare that the dissertation is their own original work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
(d) A dissertation shall be submitted through the candidate's Director of Studies to the Academic Secretary of the Faculty, in accordance with arrangements approved by the Board, so as to arrive not later than the first Friday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
(e) A candidate may be called for viva voce examination on his or her dissertation and on the general field of knowledge within which it falls.
The purpose of this paper is to give candidates experience of problems in the interpretation of historical sources within a thematic framework. Each candidate will be required to select an option from a list of options announced by the Faculty Board, and each option will include a number of essay topics. An essay on a topic chosen from a list announced by the Faculty Board will be submitted. Some of the topics may involve the use of sources in a foreign language.
In these papers candidates will be required to show knowledge of political aspects and also of general aspects of English, Irish, Scottish, and Welsh history where relevant to the period studied. Candidates will be expected to show evidence of their ability to use and interpret contemporary documents. In each paper three questions must be answered, but no question will be specified as compulsory.
In these papers candidates will be required to show knowledge of economic, social, and cultural aspects and also of general aspects of English, Irish, Scottish, and Welsh history where relevant to the period studied. Candidates will be expected to show evidence of their ability to use and interpret contemporary documents. In each paper three questions must be answered, but no question will be specified as compulsory.
These papers will survey European history in the periods concerned, in its political, constitutional, cultural, economic, and social aspects. Candidates will also be required to show knowledge of general aspects of European history. In each paper candidates will be required to answer three questions.
Paper 18 will be set in two sections. In one section the major emphasis will be on political and constitutional history; in the other section the major emphasis will be on economic, social, intellectual, and cultural history. Candidates will be required to answer three questions, at least one question to be taken from each section.
These papers will deal with political ideas and arguments in relation to the general historical contexts in which they arose. Each paper will be divided into two sections. Section A will consist of questions on prescribed texts. Section B will be designed to test knowledge of a series of themes of importance in the history of political thought in the period covered by the paper. Candidates will be required to answer three questions, at least one question to be taken from each section.
This paper will deal comparatively with the growth of political, economic, and cultural relations between Europe and the rest of the world since 1400; and with their effects in world history. Candidates will be required to answer three questions.
This paper will concentrate on the history of those parts of North America which now form the United States. Candidates will be required to answer three questions.
The paper will explore the climax and decline of Europe’s older imperial systems during the first half of the twentieth century, the emergence of new forms of imperial power, and the making of the modern ‘postcolonial’ world in the context of world war and global economic shifts. Candidates will be required to answer three questions.
The paper will concentrate on the history of those parts of North America which now form the United States. The paper will be set in two sections. Section A will consist of thematic questions; in Section B questions will be arranged chronologically. Three questions must be answered; one from Section A, two from Section B.
This paper aims to provide an opportunity for candidates to reflect on broad issues of historical argument and practice arising out of their work for all three years of the Historical Tripos, but especially Part II. The paper is a means of enabling candidates to raise and discuss fundamental questions which relate their specialist knowledge to more general themes of historical inquiry and explanation. The focus of this paper, as distinct from other Part II papers, is on understanding the conceptual, historiographical, and methodological dimensions of historical argument and practice. However, the paper also fundamentally requires candidates to develop their understanding of these conceptual, historiographical, and methodological issues in relation to their work for their other Part II papers, for example by critically evaluating the merits of different approaches in relation to the more specific and empirical material that they encounter elsewhere in the Tripos. The questions will be designed to encourage broad discussion of issues derived from, and relevant to, papers set in Part II, and will also allow candidates to draw upon their wider reading, done within and outside Parts I and II. The paper will offer a choice of questions, from which candidates will be required to answer one.
Each candidate shall choose one special subject from a list of special subjects published by the Faculty Board. For each of the subjects primary sources will be specified, some of which may be in a foreign language. A candidate will be required to take one three-hour examination paper and to submit an essay of 6,000 to 7,000 words. The examination paper will include extracts from the specified primary sources and will require commentary by the candidate. For the essay candidates will be required to select an option from a list of options announced by the Faculty Board and to discuss an historical issue with reference to the primary sources, including those specified for the special subject.
This paper will deal with political ideas and arguments in relation to the general historical contexts in which they arose. The paper will be divided into two sections. Section A will consist of questions on prescribed texts. Section B will be designed to test knowledge of a series of themes of importance in the history of political thought in the period covered by the paper. Candidates will be required to answer three questions, at least one question to be taken from each section.
This paper will explore the central texts and key ideas of twentieth-century political thought, looking at both analytical concepts and historical context. It is divided into two parts, Section A which covers historical topics organized around authors and their texts, and Section B which covers a variety of themes in contemporary political philosophy. Students are required to answer three questions, taking at least one from each section.
This paper will explore the history of European thinking about polities in relation to other polities from the Roman empire to the early nineteenth century. It considers a wide range of source texts from different historical contexts and examines the manifold and complex ways in which the ‘international’ arena of politics was theorized in different periods. Candidates will be required to answer three questions.
1. The History of Art Tripos shall consist of three Parts, Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part I:
3. A student who has obtained honours in Part I of the History of Art Tripos or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part IIa in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept four terms and that nine complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.61
4. A student who has obtained honours in an Honours Examination other than Part I of the History of Art Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.61
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
7. The Faculty Board of Architecture and History of Art shall nominate such number of Examiners as they deem sufficient for each Part of the Tripos.
8. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any of the subjects in each Part of the Tripos. If required to do so, Assessors shall set papers in the subject or subjects assigned to them, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers, shall assess essays and dissertations, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
9. The questions proposed by each Examiner and Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for approval.
10. The Faculty Board shall have power:
11. Public notice of subjects, special periods, and books prescribed under the following regulations or under any supplementary regulations for the Tripos shall be given by the Faculty Board (a) for Part I, before the end of the Easter Term of the year next preceding the examination to which they apply, and (b) for Part IIa and Part IIb, before the end of the Easter Term next but one preceding the examination to which they apply; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
12. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part. In each list the names of candidates who deserve honours shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. A mark of distinction may be awarded for special excellence.
13. The scheme of examination for Part I shall be:
|
Paper 1. |
The objects of art history. |
|
Papers 2 and 3. |
The making of art. |
|
Papers 4 and 5. |
The meaning of architecture and art. |
Papers 3 and 5 shall each consist of reproductions of works of art requiring comment and interpretation.
Each candidate shall offer all five papers and shall submit a Part I short dissertation, as prescribed in Regulation 18, on a subject approved by the Faculty Board relating to some aspect of art or architecture in or around Cambridge.
14. The scheme of examination for Part IIa and Part IIb shall be:
|
Paper 1. |
Approaches to the history of art, with reference to works of criticism. |
|
Paper 2. |
The display of art. |
|
Papers 3–24. |
Such number of pairs of papers on special subjects as the Faculty Board shall announce from time to time in accordance with Regulation 10. There shall be not less than eight and not more than eleven pairs of such papers on special subjects. Each pair of papers shall deal with a particular person, subject, or period in the history of art. In each pair of papers, the second paper shall consist of reproductions of works of art requiring comment and interpretation. |
15. A candidate for Part IIa shall offer Paper 1 and two pairs of papers on special subjects.
16. A candidate for Part IIb
17. A candidate shall not offer in any Part of the Tripos a paper that he or she has previously offered in another University examination.
18. (a) Each candidate for Part I shall submit the proposed title of his or her Part I short dissertation for approval by the Faculty Board. Titles shall be submitted to the Secretary of the Department of History of Art so as to arrive not later than the division of the Lent Term next preceding the examination.
(b) Each candidate for Part IIa shall submit a statement of the scheme of papers to be offered in the examination to the Secretary of the Department of History of Art, so as to arrive not later than the second Monday of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
(c) Each candidate for Part IIb shall submit the proposed title of his or her Part IIb dissertation for approval by the Faculty Board. Titles shall be submitted to the Secretary of the Department of History of Art, so as to arrive not later than the last day of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
(d) The Secretary of the Faculty Board shall communicate the Board's approval or rejection of a proposed dissertation title to each candidate. When the Board have approved a title, no change shall be made to it or, in the case of Part IIa or Part IIb, to the candidate's scheme of papers, without the further approval of the Board.
(e) The length of a Part I short dissertation or a Part II dissertation shall be as follows:
A short dissertation submitted by a candidate for Part I shall be of not more than 5,000 words in length. A dissertation submitted by a candidate for Part IIb shall be of not less than 7,000 words and not more than 9,000 words in length.
In each case the prescribed length shall include notes and appendices, but not bibliography. Each dissertation shall be printed or typewritten.
(f) (i) Part I short dissertations shall be submitted to the Secretary of the Department of History of Art, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Faculty Board, so as to arrive not later than the Friday after the division of the Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
(ii) Two copies of the Part IIb dissertation shall be submitted to the Secretary of the Department of History of Art, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Faculty Board, so as to arrive not later than the first day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
Each candidate submitting a dissertation will be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
The course for this paper consists of a survey of Western (and some non-Western) art, which introduces students to the development of the visual arts. It provides an opportunity to study the material covered at first hand, by using the resources of the Fitzwilliam Museum and other Cambridge collections, and in relation to its historical and artistic background.
These papers are concerned with painting and sculpture; the Faculty Board may prescribe specified artists, or specified subjects or periods, for special study. The first half of the course deals with the processes and attitudes which have shaped the world of images, such as methods and materials, the creative process, and notions of quality and taste, as well as the reproduction of images. The course introduces students to such questions, and focuses on specific artists, periods, and traditions. The second half of the course deals with sculpture; it covers various topics, such as techniques and materials, classical sculpture and its legacy, and more modern developments.
The course for these papers is divided into two halves, dealing respectively with traditions of representation and architectural meaning; the Faculty Board may prescribe specified artists or periods for special study. The course aims to provide an awareness of changing attitudes to architecture and art in Western Europe. Emphasis is placed on close critical study of a range of key examples, as well as their context. The first part of the course covers various topics in the study of the visual arts, focusing on the content and interpretation of the figurative arts. The second part covers areas such as the theory and use of classical orders, building typology, and the relationship between design and construction.
This paper will deal with the influence of writers of classical antiquity upon the Renaissance approach to art and architecture; with changing attitudes towards both antiquity and the Middle Ages in the eighteenth century; with nineteenth-century and twentieth-century theoretical and critical approaches to art and architecture; and with recent developments in art historical methods, the growth of connoisseurship, formal and stylistic criticism, and sociological and iconographical interpretations of works of art and architecture.
1. The Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos shall consist of three Parts, Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb. In Part IIa and Part IIb there shall be an examination in each of the following five subjects: Archaeology (including Assyriology and Egyptology), Biological Anthropology, Politics and International Relations, Social Anthropology, Sociology, and there shall be a joint examination in each of the following six pairs of subjects: Archaeology and Social Anthropology, Biological Anthropology and Archaeology, Politics and Sociology, Social and Biological Anthropology, Sociology and Social Anthropology, Social Anthropology and Politics. For Part I there shall be a single class-list; for Part IIa and Part IIb there shall be a separate class-list for each of the five subjects of the examination and for each joint examination.
2. The Faculty Board of Human, Social, and Political Science shall nominate a Senior Examiner and such number of Examiners to conduct the examination for Part I of the Tripos, and a Senior Examiner and such number of Examiners to conduct the examination in each subject for Part IIa and Part IIb, as they shall deem sufficient. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate such number of Assessors as they shall deem sufficient to assist the Examiners for each Part. If required to do so, Assessors shall set papers in the subject or subjects assigned to them, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers, shall assess dissertations, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
3. The Faculty Board may from time to time make supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects and specified texts of examination and may modify, alter, or withdraw such supplementary regulations as they see fit, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any change.
4. Before the end of the Easter Term each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of the variable subjects for the examinations to be held in the academical year next following; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student’s preparation for the examination is adversely affected. The Board shall have power when they give notice of variable subjects to announce any consequential restriction on the combination of papers that a candidate may choose to offer.
5. The questions proposed by each Examiner and Assessor shall be submitted for approval to the whole body of Examiners for Part I or to the Examiners in the particular subject for Part IIa or Part IIb.
6. Separate meetings shall be held of all the Examiners for Part I and of the five bodies of Examiners for Part IIa and Part IIb, at which the respective class-lists shall be drawn up. The five bodies of Examiners for Part IIa and Part IIb shall also draw up class-lists for the following subjects: Archaeology and Social Anthropology (the Examiners for Archaeology), Biological Anthropology and Archaeology (the Examiners for Biological Anthropology), Politics and Sociology (the Examiners for Politics and International Relations), Social and Biological Anthropology (the Examiners for Social Anthropology), Sociology and Social Anthropology (the Examiners for Sociology), and Social Anthropology and Politics (the Examiners for Social Anthropology). In each class-list the names of the candidates who deserve honours shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence a mark of distinction may be awarded. The class-lists for the subject Archaeology in Part IIa and Part IIb shall indicate whether a candidate has offered in the examination the Assyriology and/or Egyptology option.
7. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or any Part and also for another Honours Examination in the same term.
8. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
9. A candidate shall not offer in any Part of the Tripos a paper that he or she has previously offered in another University examination.
10. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part I:
11. The scheme of examination for Part I shall be as follows:
ARC1. |
Introduction to archaeology |
ARC2. |
Archaeology in action (also serves as Paper O12 in Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
ARC3. |
Introduction to the cultures of Egypt and Mesopotamia |
ARC4. |
Akkadian language I (also serves as Paper X.1 of Part Ia of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos) |
ARC5. |
Egyptian language I (also serves as Paper X.2 of Part Ia of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos) |
BAN1. |
Humans in biological perspective |
POL1. |
Analysis of politics (also serves as an optional paper for Paper 5 of Part IIa of the Economics Tripos) |
POL2. |
International relations I (also serves as an optional paper for Paper 5 of Part IIa of the Economics Tripos) |
SOC1. |
Modern societies I: introduction to sociology (also serves as an optional paper for Paper 5 of Part IIa of the Economics Tripos) |
SAN1. |
Social anthropology: the comparative perspective |
PBS1. |
Introduction to psychology |
A candidate for Part I shall be required to offer four papers as follows:
12. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part IIa:
(a) a student who has obtained honours in Part I of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that six complete terms have not passed after her or his first term of residence;
(b) a student who has obtained honours in any other Honours Examination, in the year next after or next but one after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after her or his first term of residence.63
13. A student who has obtained honours in Part IIa of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that:
14. A student who has obtained honours in another Honours Examination other than Part IIa of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos may be a candidate for honours in either Part IIa or Part IIb in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that the student has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after her or his first term of residence. Such students shall offer, subject to the provisions of Regulation 9, four papers chosen from those available in Part IIa and Part IIb, in accordance with the guidelines issued by the Faculty Board, and conditional upon written permission from the relevant Head of Department obtained not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
15. The scheme of examination for Part IIa and Part IIb shall be as follows:64
ARC6. |
Archaeological theory and practice I |
ARC7. |
Archaeological theory and practice II |
ARC8. |
Archaeological science I |
ARC9. |
Archaeological science II |
ARC10. |
The Palaeolithic of the Old World |
ARC11. |
Topics in Palaeolithic archaeology |
ARC12. |
European prehistory |
ARC13. |
Special topics in European prehistory |
ARC14. |
Aegean prehistory (Paper D1 from the Classical Tripos) |
ARC15. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art (Paper D2 from the Classical Tripos) |
ARC16. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art (Paper D3 from the Classical Tripos) |
ARC17. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art (Paper D4 from the Classical Tripos) |
ARC18. |
The historical archaeology of Ancient Egypt I65 |
ARC19. |
The historical archaeology of Ancient Egypt II66 |
ARC20. |
Ancient Egyptian religion I65 |
ARC21. |
Ancient Egyptian religion II66 |
ARC22. |
Mesopotamian archaeology I: prehistory and early states65 |
ARC23. |
Mesopotamian archaeology II: territorial states to empires66 |
ARC24. |
Mesopotamian culture I: literature66 |
ARC25. |
Mesopotamian culture II: religion and scholarship65 |
ARC26. |
The North Sea in the Early Middle Ages |
ARC27. |
Europe in Late Antiquity and the Migration Period |
ARC28. |
The archaeology of medieval Britain (also serves as Paper 11 of Part II of the History Tripos) |
ARC29. |
Ancient India I: the Indus civilization and beyond65 |
ARC30. |
Ancient India II: Early historic cities of South Asia66 |
ARC31. |
Ancient South America66 |
ARC32. |
The archaeology of Mesoamerica and North America65 |
ARC33. |
The archaeology of Africa |
ARC34. |
Akkadian language II (also serves as Paper X.6 of Part Ib of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos) |
ARC35. |
Akkadian language III |
ARC36. |
Sumerian language |
ARC37. |
Egyptian language II (also serves as Paper X.7 of Part Ib of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos) |
ARC38. |
Egyptian language III |
ARC39. |
Mesopotamian history I: states and structures65 |
ARC40. |
Mesopotamian history II: empires and systems66 |
The Faculty Board shall announce before the end of the Easter Term the papers that will be available in the examinations to be held in the next academical year.
BAN2. |
A subject in biological anthropology I |
BAN3. |
A subject in biological anthropology II |
BAN4. |
A subject in biological anthropology III |
BAN5. |
Theory and practice in biological anthropology |
BAN6. |
A subject in biological anthropology IV |
BAN7. |
A subject in biological anthropology V |
BAN8. |
A subject in biological anthropology VI |
BAN9. |
A subject in biological anthropology VII |
POL3. |
International relations II |
POL4. |
Comparative politics |
POL5. |
Conceptual issues in politics and international relations |
POL6. |
Statistics and methods67 |
POL7. |
The history of political thought to c. 1700 (Paper 19 of Part I of the Historical Tripos) |
POL8. |
The history of political thought from c. 1700 to c. 1890 (Paper 20 of Part I of the Historical Tripos) |
POL9. |
Conceptual issues and texts in politics and international relations |
POL10. |
The history of political thought from c.1700 to c.1890 (Paper 4 of Part II of the Historical Tripos) |
POL11. |
Political philosophy and the history of political thought since c. 1890 (Paper 5 of Part II of the Historical Tripos) |
POL12. |
A subject in politics and international relations I |
POL13. |
A subject in politics and international relations II68 |
POL14. |
A subject in politics and international relations III |
POL15. |
A subject in politics and international relations IV |
POL16. |
A subject in politics and international relations V |
POL17. |
A subject in politics and international relations VI |
POL18. |
A subject in politics and international relations VII |
POL19. |
A subject in politics and international relations VIII |
SAN2. |
Kinship and economic anthropology |
SAN3. |
The anthropology of politics and religion |
SAN4. |
Theory, methods, and enquiry in social anthropology |
SAN5. |
Thought, belief, and ethics |
SAN6. |
Political economy and social transformation |
SAN7. |
The anthropology of an ethnographic area |
SAN8. |
A subject in social anthropology I |
SAN9. |
A subject in social anthropology II |
SAN10. |
A subject in social anthropology III |
SAN11. |
A subject in social anthropology IV |
SAN12. |
A subject in social anthropology V |
SOC2. |
Social theory |
SOC3. |
Modern societies II |
SOC4. |
Concepts and arguments in sociology |
SOC5. |
Statistics and methods |
SOC6. |
A subject in sociology I |
SOC7. |
A subject in sociology II |
SOC8. |
A subject in sociology III |
SOC9. |
A subject in sociology IV |
SOC10. |
A subject in sociology V |
SOC11. |
A subject in sociology VI |
SOC12. |
A subject in sociology VII |
SOC13. |
A subject in sociology VIII |
SOC14. |
Disciplines of education III (Paper 3 of Part II of the Education Tripos) |
SOC15. |
Criminology, sentencing, and the penal system (Paper 23 of the Law Tripos) |
16. Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration except POL5, SOC4, ARC6–13, and ARC18–33. The examination for Papers POL5 and SOC4 shall consist of the submission of two essays each of not more than 5,000 words. The Faculty Board shall publish by notice in each Department of the Faculty of Human, Social, and Political Science prescribed titles or subjects for essays by the beginning of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination concerned. The essays for POL5 and SOC4 shall be submitted in printed or typewritten form to the Senior Examiner in the relevant subject as follows: one essay no later than the end of the first week of Full Lent Term, and one essay no later than the end of the first week of Full Easter Term. Papers ARC6–13 and ARC18–33 will be assessed by a three-hour written examination plus mandatory course-work elements, prescribed titles or details of which will be published by the Faculty Board by the end of the Easter Term of the year preceding the examination concerned.
17. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 9, candidates for Part IIa shall offer papers and other exercises as follows:
18. Candidates for Part IIb who have taken Part IIa in the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos may not change their subject track between Parts IIa and IIb, unless changing from a joint track to one of the single subjects within it. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 9, candidates for Part IIb shall offer papers and other exercises as follows:
19. Candidates for Part IIa and Part IIb in Archaeology and Biological Anthropology shall present for the inspection of the Examiners, by a date which the Head of the Department of Archaeology and Anthropology shall announce not later than the division of Michaelmas Term, records of such practical work done during the courses leading to the examination as shall be determined from time to time by the Faculty Board. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of Department with assessments of the candidates’ practical work, and shall take these assignments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
20. (a) A candidate for Part IIb who wishes to offer a dissertation shall submit an application, including the title of the proposed dissertation, a brief account of its scope, and a statement of the scheme of papers to be offered in the examination. A candidate who so wishes may request permission to include a film or filmed material, amounting to not more than twenty minutes in length, as a component part of the dissertation. Applications shall be submitted to the Head of the relevant Department so as to arrive not later than the division of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
(b) Each candidate must obtain the approval of the Head of Department for the proposed title not later than the division of the Lent Term. When the Head of Department has approved a title, no change shall be made to it, or to the candidate’s scheme of papers, without the further approval of the Head of Department.
(c) A dissertation shall be of not more than 10,000 words in length. The inclusion of footnotes, figures, tables, appendices, and bibliography in the word count will be specified by each department. Each dissertation shall be typewritten, with two printed copies submitted in addition to a copy in an approved electronic format.
(d) A dissertation shall be submitted to the Senior Examiner in the relevant subject not later than the second Friday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is held.
A dissertation shall be accompanied by (i) a brief synopsis on a separate sheet of paper of the contents of the dissertation, and (ii) a certificate signed by the candidate stating the word count of the dissertation, that it is her or his own original work, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
21. At the discretion of the Examiners, a candidate for Part IIb may be examined viva voce.
22. The examinations for the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos shall be held for the first time as follows:
Part I in 2014
Part IIa in 2015
Part IIb in 2016
1. The Land Economy Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II.
2. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part Ia if he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.
3. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ia or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept four terms and that nine complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.81
4. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ib or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.81
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for honours in any Part shall again be a candidate for honours in the same Part.
7. There shall be two separate bodies of Examiners, one for Part Ia, and one for Part Ib and Part II. In each case, the Board of Land Economy shall nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient.
8. The Board of Land Economy shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any of the subjects of the Tripos. Each Assessor shall propose questions in the papers assigned to him or her by the Examiners, shall look over the answers of the candidates to those questions, and shall report thereon to the Examiners. An Assessor may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
9. Each body of Examiners shall elect one of their number to act as Chair.
10. The questions proposed by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for approval.
11. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part of the Tripos. In each list the names of those who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence a mark of distinction may be awarded.
12. The papers for the Land Economy Tripos, which shall be divided into Groups I–III, shall be as follows:
Paper 1A. |
Economics I |
Paper 1B. |
Economics II |
Paper 2. |
The public sector: institutional and legal frameworks |
Paper 3. |
Quantitative and legal methods for land economists |
Paper 4. |
Land economy, development, and sustainability |
Paper 5. |
Environmental economics and law |
Paper 6. |
Fundamentals of finance and investment |
Paper 7. |
Regional economics and policy |
Paper 8. |
The law of real property: principles, policy, and economic implications |
Paper 9. |
Private law |
Paper 10. |
The built environment |
Paper 11. |
Land and urban economics |
Paper 12. |
Law and economics |
Paper 13. |
Landlord and tenant law |
Paper 14. |
Planning policy and practice |
Paper 15. |
Advanced techniques in finance and investment for real estate |
Paper 16. |
Land, food, and ecosystem services |
Paper 17. |
Land policy and development economics |
The subject of each paper shall be examined by means of a paper of three hours’ duration, except Papers 1A, 1B, and 4 which shall each be examined by means of a paper of two hours’ duration. Additionally, the examination for each of Papers 4 and 6 shall include submission of a report on a project undertaken by the candidate; the work to be undertaken for the project, its length, and the arrangements for the submission of the report, shall be prescribed from time to time by the Board of Land Economy.
13. A candidate for honours in Part Ia shall offer all four papers from Group I.
14. A candidate for honours in Part Ib shall offer papers as follows:
provided that
15. The Board of Land Economy shall have power to grant exemption from the requirement to offer Paper 3 to any candidate for honours in Part Ib under Regulation 14(b) who satisfies the Board that he or she has passed an examination of an acceptable standard in statistics or quantitative methods. Application for such exemption shall be made in writing through the candidate's Tutor to the Secretary of the Board of Land Economy not later than the end of the second week of the Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination; the candidate shall be notified of the Board's decision not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term.
16. Candidates for honours in Part II shall offer papers and a dissertation as follows:
17. A dissertation offered under Regulation 16 shall be submitted in accordance with the following provisions:
18. The Board of Land Economy shall have power to make supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects of examination, and to modify, alter, or withdraw such supplementary regulations as they see fit, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any change.
An introduction to microeconomics and welfare economics.
An introduction to macroeconomics and macroeconomic policy.
A study of constitutional and administrative law, including the European Union, Parliament, the Executive, next step agencies, quangos and other government agencies, local government, and judicial review.
An introduction to relevant skills required for successful study on the Land Economy Tripos. These include legal skills, mathematics (including refreshing mathematical skills), statistics, and qualitative policy analysis.
Major economic, demographic, institutional, and technological changes and their impact upon the natural and built environments of the United Kingdom. The examination for this paper includes the submission of a report on a project (see below).
Principles of environmental economics and law, environmental policy and policy analysis, urban and rural environmental management.
An introduction to the analytical techniques for identifying risk/return opportunities in real estate and other financial markets, and the different types of funding/investment strategies available to real estate professionals.
The examination for this paper includes the submission of a report on a project (see below).
Theories relating to regional growth and the economic analysis of regional development and policies designed to influence patterns of growth and development. The term ‘region’ is defined broadly to include international trading blocs, nations, and regions within a particular country.
An introduction to land law in England and Wales, including estates, tenure, title, registration systems, mortgages, and other interests in land.
Principles of contract and tort, introduction to company law.
Elements of building design and construction and the impact of social, economic, legal, and technological factors on the built environment.
The economics of land markets and policies for public intervention in land markets, urban economics, the economics of housing and housing policy, and commercial property.
The relationship between the disciplines of law and economics, including economic theories and analysis of law, the part played by economic theory in legal reasoning, the role of law in allocating resources and in correcting market failures, and economic and legal theories of value and of compensation.
The land law of England and Wales of particular relevance to the relationship of landlord and tenant: common law of leases and of the rights and obligations of the parties to leases; the statutory regulation of residential, business, and agricultural tenancies; and homelessness.
The law, administration, practice, and theory of land use planning in Great Britain.
An introduction to advanced methods in the valuation and financing of real estate, mixed asset portfolio allocation, and risk management.
The ownership and use of land for primary production in the United Kingdom and other developed countries. Food production and consumption. Land uses and the provision of ecosystem services. Public policies towards rural land and ecosystem services.
The role of land, agriculture, and natural resources in the growth and development of low income countries and their relationships to richer countries.
The project to be undertaken for each of these papers and the word length shall be specified by the Board of Land Economy and announced not later than the division of the Lent Term. Candidates will be required to submit in typescript, by a date to be announced by the Board, an account of the project in the form of an extended essay. The account should be in English. It should report the statistical and other sources and techniques used by the candidate as well as presenting the candidate's results and conclusions. Each candidate will be required to sign a declaration that the project and the report on it are his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that the report does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose; if two or more candidates have undertaken a project in collaboration, they will each be required to indicate the extent of their contribution.
1. The Law Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II.
2. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part Ia if he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
3. The following may be candidates for honours in Part Ib:
4. The Faculty Board of Law may grant to a student, who has passed with sufficient credit before coming into residence an examination in law the standard and scope of which are approved by the Faculty Board, the privilege of being a candidate for honours in Part Ib earlier than as aforesaid, provided that the student has kept one term.
5. Students who have obtained honours in Part Ib of the Law Tripos and have kept seven terms may be candidates for honours in Part II as follows:
6. In order to be a candidate for Part II under Regulation 5(a) a student shall produce evidence to the Secretary of the Faculty Board to demonstrate that during the academical year next before the year of candidature he or she satisfactorily completed a course of study in a member country of the European Community at a university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board.
7. A student who wishes to study abroad in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 6 shall make application on a form approved by the Faculty Board and obtainable from the Faculty Office. An application shall be submitted through the student's Tutor to the Secretary of the Faculty Board so as to arrive not later than the end of the first quarter of the Michaelmas Term of the academical year next preceding that which the student proposes to spend abroad. The Secretary shall inform each student as soon as possible whether his or her application is approved.
8. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ib under Regulation 4 may be a candidate for honours in Part II,83 provided that he or she has kept four terms.
The Faculty Board may grant to a student, who has passed with sufficient credit before coming into residence an examination in law the standard and scope of which are approved by the Faculty Board, the privilege of being a candidate for honours in Part II earlier than as aforesaid and without having passed any examination after coming into residence, provided that the student has kept one term.
A student who has obtained honours in Part II under this regulation shall be qualified to proceed to the B.A. Degree when he or she has kept six terms, provided that a student who satisfies the Examiners for the LL.M. Examination before completing six terms’ residence, and who elects to proceed to the LL.M. Degree, shall not also be entitled to proceed to the B.A. Degree.
9. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
10. No student who has been a candidate for honours in any Part shall again be a candidate for honours in the same Part.
11. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 9, a student who is not eligible to be a candidate for honours shall be entitled, provided that he or she has kept four terms at least, to take the examination for either Part Ib or Part II as a candidate not for honours.
12. There shall be three separate bodies of Examiners, one for Part Ia, one for Part Ib, and one for Part II. For each Part, the Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient to conduct the examination.
13. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to examine in any of the subjects of the Tripos. Assessors shall be required to set the paper or papers in the subjects assigned to them and to present such written reports to the Examiners as may be required. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
14. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part of the Tripos. In each list the names of the successful candidates shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. In each class-list a mark of distinction shall be affixed to the names of those candidates placed in the first class whose work is of special merit. In the class-list for Part II the symbol (e) shall be placed against the names of those candidates who have taken the examination under Regulation 5(a).
15. The papers for the Law Tripos which shall be divided into Groups I–IV shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
Civil law I. |
Paper 2. |
Constitutional law. |
Paper 3. |
Criminal law. |
Paper 4. |
Law of tort. |
Paper 5. |
Legal skills and methodology (half-paper). |
Paper 10. |
Law of contract. |
Paper 11. |
Land law. |
Paper 12. |
International law. |
Paper 13. |
Civil law II. |
Paper 20. |
Administrative law. |
Paper 21. |
Family law. |
Paper 22. |
Legal history. |
Paper 23. |
Criminology, sentencing, and the penal system (also serves as Paper Int. 6 of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos). |
Paper 25. |
Criminal procedure and criminal evidence. |
Paper 46. |
Comparative law. |
Paper 47. |
Jurisprudence. |
Paper 24. |
Equity. |
Paper 26. |
European Union law. |
Paper 27. |
Competition law. |
Paper 40. |
Commercial law. |
Paper 41. |
Labour law. |
Paper 42. |
Intellectual property. |
Paper 43. |
Company law. |
Paper 44. |
Aspects of obligations. |
Paper 45. |
Conflict of laws. |
Paper 48. |
Prescribed subjects (half-papers). |
The Faculty Board shall have power, not later than the end of the Easter Term in the year preceding the examination to which they apply, to prescribe not more than twelve subjects for Paper 48, or to transfer any paper from Group II to Group III. Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, except Paper 48, for each subject of which the examination shall consist of a half-paper of two hours’ duration.
16. A candidate for honours in Part Ia of the Tripos shall offer Papers 1–5 from Group I.
17. A candidate for honours in Part Ib shall offer five papers chosen from among Papers 1, 2, and 4 and Groups II and III, provided that
18. A candidate for honours in Part II shall
provided that
19. A candidate who under Regulation 18 chooses to substitute for one paper of Part Ib or Part II, respectively, participation in a seminar course together with submission of an essay on a prescribed subject, as provided in those regulations, shall be assessed by the Examiners for Part Ib or Part II, as applicable, after they have considered a report from the lecturer or lecturers appointed by the Faculty Board to conduct the seminar course. Candidates may be called for viva voce examination on the subject or subjects of any seminar course in which they have participated.
The procedure for prescribing the subject or subjects of a seminar course, for notifying a candidate's intention to participate in such a course, and for assessing that participation and the essay submitted in connection with the course, shall be as follows:
20. The Faculty Board of Law shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of examination, and determining the scope, character, and conditions of the papers and the credit that shall be assigned to each, and to amend or withdraw such regulations; provided that due care is taken to give sufficient notice of any supplementary regulation or of any amendment of an existing supplementary regulation.
1. The papers for the examination in Law for European Students shall be the papers set in Groups I–IV of the Law Tripos. Each candidate shall
2. A student may be a candidate for the Examination if he or she
provided that three complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.
3. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient, and shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to the Examiners.
4. The names of candidates who have satisfied the Examiners shall be arranged in alphabetical order in a single class.
1. The Linguistics Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part.
2. A student who has not obtained honours in an Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part I, provided that he or she has kept one term and that three complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
3. A student who has obtained honours in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part IIa,85 in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept four terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
4. A student who has obtained honours in Part IIa of the Linguistics Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb,85 in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept seven terms and that fifteen terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for one Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
7. For each Part of the Tripos, the Faculty Board of Modern and Medieval Languages shall nominate such number of Examiners as they think sufficient to conduct the examination, and shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any of the subjects of the examination. If required to do so, Assessors shall set papers in the subject or subjects assigned to them, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers, shall assess dissertations, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
8. The papers set by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the Chair of the Examiners and one other Examiner for their approval.
9. The Faculty Board shall have power:
10. Before the end of the Easter Term each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of any variable subjects for the examination to be held in the academical year next following; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student’s preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
11. In the class-lists for each Part of the Tripos the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence a mark of distinction may be awarded.
12. The papers set for the Linguistics Tripos shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
Sounds and words (also serves as Paper X.8 of Part Ib of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos and Paper Li. 1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 2. |
Structures and meanings (also serves as Paper X.3 of Part Ib of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos and as Paper Li. 2 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 3. |
Language, brain, and society (also serves as Paper X.13 of Part Ib of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos and Paper Li. 3 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 4. |
History and varieties of English (also serves as Paper Li. 4 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 5. |
Linguistic theory |
Paper 6. |
Phonetics (also serves as Paper Li. 6 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 7. |
Phonological theory (also serves as Paper Li. 7 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos)86 |
Paper 8. |
Morphology (also serves as Paper Li. 8 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos)86 |
Paper 9. |
Syntax (also serves as Paper Li. 9 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 10. |
Semantics and pragmatics (also serves as Paper Li. 10 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 11. |
Historical linguistics (also serves as Paper 15(a) of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos, as Paper 43A of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations), and as Paper Li. 11 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos)87 |
Paper 12. |
History of ideas on language (also serves as Paper O1 of Part II of the Classical Tripos and Paper Li. 12 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos)88 |
Paper 13. |
History of the English language (also serves as Paper 15(b) of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos, Paper Li. 13 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos and as Paper 43B of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations))88 |
Paper 14. |
History of the French language (also serves as Paper Li.14 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos)89 |
Paper 15. |
First and second language acquisition (also serves as Paper Li.15 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 16. |
Psychology of language processing and learning (also serves as Paper Li.16 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 17. |
A subject in linguistics to be specified by the Faculty Board from time to time (also serves as Paper Li. 17 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 18. |
Computational linguistics (also serves as Paper Li.18 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 19. |
A subject in linguistics to be specified by the Faculty Board from time to time90 |
Paper 20. |
The language of Italy (Paper It. 10 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 21. |
The Hispanic languages (Paper Sp. 11 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 22. |
Aspects of the history of the German language (Paper Ge. 11 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 23. |
The history of the Russian language (Paper Sl. 8 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 24. |
The history and structure of modern Greek (Paper Gr. 7 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 25. |
The Romance languages (Paper CS 1 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 26. |
The Slavonic languages (Paper CS 3 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
Paper 27. |
Celtic philology (Paper 12 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 28. |
Elements of comparative linguistics (Paper E1 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
Paper 29. |
The Greek language (Paper E2 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
Paper 30. |
The Latin language (Paper E3 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
Paper 31. |
Germanic philology (Paper 11 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos) |
Paper 32. |
Comparative Semitic linguistics (Paper MES.41 of Part II of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos) |
Paper 33. |
The French language: variation and change (Paper Fr.13 of the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos) |
13. A candidate for Part I of the Linguistics Tripos shall offer Papers 1–4.
14. (i) A candidate who takes the examination for Part IIa after obtaining honours in Part I of the Linguistics Tripos shall offer four papers chosen from Sections C and D.
(ii) A candidate who takes the examination for Part IIa in the year next after obtaining honours in another Honours Examination shall offer:
provided that a candidate who has previously offered one or both of Papers 1 and 2 in a previous Honours Examination shall substitute that paper or both papers by either one further paper or two further papers, respectively, chosen from Sections C and D.
15. A candidate who takes the examination for Part IIb shall offer:
16. The following provisions shall apply to a dissertation offered under Regulation 15:
The examination for this paper will consist of a written paper and a practical component. The practical component will assess competence in impressionistic and quantitative phonetic methods.
1. The Management Studies Tripos shall consist of one Part only.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in the Management Studies Tripos if twelve terms have not passed after their first term of residence:
3. No student shall be a candidate for the Management Studies Tripos and also for another Tripos Examination in the same term, and no student shall be a candidate for the Management Studies Tripos on more than one occasion.
4. The Faculty Board of Business and Management shall nominate such number of Examiners as they think sufficient. They may also nominate for appointment one or more Assessors to the Examiners in such subjects as they consider desirable, and the Assessors so appointed shall set papers or parts of papers and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in those subjects. The Assessors, when summoned by the Chair, shall attend meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
5. The questions proposed by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for approval.
6. The names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence a mark of distinction may be awarded.
7. The Faculty Board of Business and Management shall have power to define or limit by supplementary regulations all or any of the subjects of examination, and to modify or alter any such supplementary regulations as occasion may require. They shall also have power to determine the credit that shall be assigned to each subject of examination, and to mark out the lines of study that are to be pursued by candidates.
8. The following papers shall be set:
M1. |
Marketing and organizational behaviour. |
M2. |
Quantitative methods and operations management. |
M3. |
Economics and finance. |
9. Each candidate shall offer all three papers, and shall submit to the Examiners, not later than the last Monday of Full Easter Term, a report, of not more than 6,000 words, excluding footnotes and bibliography, on a project designed to give evidence of the candidate's industrial, commercial, or equivalent experience. The subject of the project shall be chosen from a list of approved subjects which shall be announced by the Director of Judge Business School not later than the last day of Full Lent Term. Reports shall be in typewritten form (unless a candidate has obtained previous permission from the Faculty Board of Business and Management to present a report in manuscript). Each candidate will be required to sign a declaration that the project and the report on it are his or her own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that the report does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose; if two or more candidates have undertaken a project in collaboration, they will each be required to indicate the extent of their contribution.
10. Candidates shall complete course-work for two elective courses, which shall be chosen from a list published by the Faculty Board of Business and Management. For this purpose the internal Examiner for the course-work shall present to the Examiners a report on the performance of each candidate in this coursework. Details of the work required of candidates shall be published by the Faculty Board by notice not later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination.
The paper will consist mainly of questions on the theory and practice of marketing and the organization and behaviour of people at work.
The paper will consist mainly of questions on the quantitative methods used in management and operations management.
The paper will consist mainly of questions on the economics of firms and markets, the theory of finance, and financial accounting.
1. The Manufacturing Engineering Tripos shall consist of two Parts: Parts IIa and IIb. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part.
2. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ib of the Engineering Tripos or in Part I of the Chemical Engineering Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIa of the Manufacturing Engineering Tripos in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that the student has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
3. The Faculty Board of Engineering may in special circumstances, which they shall themselves determine, give leave to a student who has obtained honours in any Honours Examination to be a candidate for honours in Part IIa of the Manufacturing Engineering Tripos in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has attained a satisfactory standard, as defined by the Faculty Board, in his or her last Honours Examination, and provided also that the student has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
4. A student who, under arrangements approved by the Faculty Board of Engineering, has spent not less than three terms studying at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and has been certified by the President of the Institute after consultation with the Chair of Examiners for Part IIa of the Manufacturing Engineering Tripos to have studied diligently during that period, shall be deemed thereby to have obtained honours in that Part of the Tripos. A list containing the names of persons so qualified shall be certified by the Chair of the Faculty Board of Engineering and published in the Reporter.
5. A student who has obtained honours in Part IIa of the Manufacturing Engineering Tripos or has been deemed to have obtained honours in Part IIa of the Manufacturing Engineering Tripos under Regulation 4 may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb in the year next after or next but one after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she
provided always that fifteen complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.
6. No student shall be a candidate for either Part and also for another Honours Examination in the same term.
7. The Faculty Board of Engineering shall nominate such number of Examiners for each Part of the Tripos as they shall consider sufficient. The Examiners for each Part shall elect one of their number to act as Chair. The Faculty Board may nominate one or more Assessors to the Examiners in each Part of the Tripos. Assessors shall be responsible either for setting the paper or papers or questions assigned to them or for looking over the work of the candidates therein and presenting a report to the Examiners or both, as the Examiners may decide. The Assessors, when summoned by the Chair, shall attend meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
8. In each Part of the Tripos the questions proposed by each Examiner or Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for approval.
9. The Examiners for each Part of the Tripos shall take into account such course-work done by candidates as shall from time to time be determined by the Faculty Board of Engineering. For this purpose the Head of the Department of Engineering shall present to the Examiners a detailed report on the performance of each candidate in this course-work. Details of the work required of candidates for each Part shall be published by the Faculty Board of Engineering by Notice in the Department of Engineering not later than the beginning of the Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination. Every candidate submitting course-work under this regulation shall be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is her or his own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration; if two or more candidates have undertaken work in collaboration, they shall be required to indicate the extent of their collaboration.
10. In Part IIa the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names of those in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. For special excellence in Part IIa a mark of distinction may be awarded. In Part IIb the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in alphabetical order in a single class and distinctive marks shall be attached to the names of those candidates who in the opinion of the Examiners deserve special credit. The mark (d) shall be used to denote a distinguished performance, and the mark (m) a meritorious performance.
11. The Faculty Board of Engineering shall have power to publish supplementary regulations defining the scope and character of each of the examination papers and to amend such supplementary regulations from time to time as they may think fit. Any alteration of supplementary regulations shall be published before the division of the Easter Term in the academical year before that in which it is to have effect.
12. The examination for Part IIa of the Manufacturing Engineering Tripos shall consist of ten modules which shall be examined by either written examination, essays or course-work as specified by the Faculty Board of Engineering.
Not later than the end of the Easter Term each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of the modules prescribed for the examination to be held in the academical year next following, and shall specify the mode of examination for each module. In giving such notice the Faculty Board shall ensure that the examination shall provide for written papers whose total duration shall be at least twelve hours.
13. In order to obtain honours in Part IIa, a candidate must satisfy the Examiners that he or she has such industrial or equivalent experience as shall be determined from time to time by the Faculty Board; a statement of each candidate's experience shall be certified by the Head of the Department of Engineering.
14. The examination for Part IIb shall consist of two written papers.
Paper 1 shall consist mainly of questions on technological aspects of manufacturing.
Paper 2 shall consist mainly of questions on managerial aspects of manufacturing.
1. The Mathematical Tripos shall consist of four Parts, Part Ia, Part Ib, Part II, and Part III.
2. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they think sufficient for each Part of the Tripos, and shall also have power to nominate one or more Assessors for each Part. Assessors shall propose questions in the papers or parts of papers assigned to them by the Examiners, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers or parts of papers, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
3. A candidate shall offer one of the following options:
The examination for Part Ia shall consist of five papers. The Faculty Board of Mathematics shall determine how the questions on the various subjects shall be distributed among the papers.
4. Every candidate shall offer Papers 1, 2, and 3, and one additional paper as follows:
5. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
No student shall be a candidate for Part Ia on more than one occasion.
6. The names of the candidates who have obtained honours shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. The symbol (p) shall be placed against the names of those candidates who have satisfied the Examiners in the option Mathematics with Physics.
7. The examination for Part Ib shall consist of four papers. The Faculty Board shall determine how the questions on the various subjects shall be distributed among the papers.
8. A student who has obtained honours in an Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.92 No student shall be a candidate for Part Ib on more than one occasion.
9. Candidates for Part Ib may submit note-books containing records of practical work done by them. Such practical work shall be prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board of Mathematics, and shall be carried out in accordance with instructions which shall be announced not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination by the Head of the Department in which the work is to be performed. As an indication of good faith, each candidate shall submit, with the records of his or her work, a declaration that these instructions have been observed. The Head of the Department shall present an assessment of this work to the Examiners, and the Examiners shall take account of this assessment in drawing up the class-list. Candidates may be examined viva voce on their submitted work.
10. The names of the candidates who have obtained honours shall be placed in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
11. A candidate who, under arrangements approved by the Faculty Board of Mathematics, has spent not less than three terms studying at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and has been certified by the President of the Institute after consultation with the Chair of Examiners for Part Ib of the Mathematical Tripos to have studied diligently during that period, shall be deemed thereby to have obtained honours in Part Ib of the Mathematical Tripos. A list containing the names of persons so qualified shall be certified by the Chair of the Faculty Board of Mathematics and published in the Reporter.
12. The examination for Part II shall consist of four papers. The Faculty Board shall determine how the questions on the various subjects shall be distributed among the papers.
13. A student who has obtained honours in an Honours Examination other than Part Ia of the Mathematical Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year next or next but one after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept four terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.92 No student shall be a candidate for Part II on more than one occasion.
14. Candidates for Part II may submit note-books containing records of practical work done by them. Such practical work shall be prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board of Mathematics, and shall be carried out in accordance with instructions which shall be announced not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination by the Head of the Department in which the work is to be performed. As an indication of good faith, each candidate shall submit, with the records of his or her work, a declaration that these instructions have been observed. The Head of the Department shall present an assessment of this work to the Examiners, and the Examiners shall take account of this assessment in drawing up the class-list. Candidates may be examined viva voce on their submitted work.
15. The names of the candidates who have obtained honours shall be placed in three classes: Wranglers, Senior Optimes, and Junior Optimes, of which the Senior Optimes shall be divided into two divisions. The names of the Wranglers and of the Junior Optimes and of those in each division of the Senior Optimes shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
16. The examination for Part III shall comprise written papers, each of which shall be set for either two hours or three hours, and topics for an optional essay. The number of papers that the Faculty Board intend to set and the subject and duration of each paper shall be announced by the Board not later than 1 November next preceding the examination. A member of the Faculty may request that a paper or papers be set additional to those announced, provided that such a request is made to the Secretary of the Faculty Board no later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. The member of the Faculty shall take responsibility for preparing a proposal that will contain an outline syllabus and shall agree to set and assess the examination if so requested by the Examiners. The subject and duration of each additional paper that the Faculty Board agree to set shall be announced by them not later than the last day of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
17. Each candidate shall send, through his or her Director of Studies, to the Chair of Examiners, so as to arrive before the end of the second Friday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held, the titles of the papers that he or she wishes to offer. No candidate shall offer papers whose total duration amounts to more than nineteen hours or, if the candidate has submitted an essay in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 19, papers whose total duration amounts to more than sixteen hours.
18. Before the last day of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination the Examiners shall announce a number of topics for an essay. A candidate may request that an essay may be submitted on a topic other than those announced, provided that the request is made, through the candidate's Director of Studies, so as to reach the Secretary of the Faculty Board not later than 1 February next preceding the examination. Any additional topics approved by the Examiners shall be announced by them not later than 1 March next preceding the examination.
19. Each candidate may submit an essay on any one topic that has been announced. A candidate who desires to do so shall, through his or her Director of Studies, so inform the Chair of Examiners before the end of the first quarter of the Easter Term in which the examination is to be held, and shall submit the essay, through his or her Director of Studies, so as to reach the Chair of Examiners not later than the end of the second Friday of the Full Easter Term. Each essay shall state the sources consulted; it shall be prefaced by a declaration signed by the candidate that it represents the candidate's own work unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that the candidate has already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. The Examiners shall have power, at their discretion, to examine a candidate viva voce on the subject of his or her essay.
20. The following may be a candidate for honours in Part III:
always provided that he or she has not proceeded to the B.A. Degree.
21. No student shall be a candidate for Part III on more than one occasion, or for Part III and for another Honours Examination in the same term.
22. The names of the candidates who have obtained honours in the examination for Part III shall be arranged in alphabetical order in one class. Distinctive marks shall be attached to the names of those candidates who in the opinion of the Examiners deserve special credit. The mark (d) shall be used to denote a distinguished performance, and the mark (m) a meritorious performance.
1. The Medical and Veterinary Sciences Tripos shall consist of two Parts: Part Ia and Part Ib.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
3. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ia of the Medical and Veterinary Sciences Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
4. Notwithstanding the provisions of Regulations 2 and 3, a student who is above the standing for honours may be a candidate not for honours in Part Ia and Part Ib for the purpose of becoming qualified to be a candidate subsequently for the Final M.B. Examination or for Part I of the Final Veterinary Examination.
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and another Honours Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
7. The Faculty Board of Biology shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of the examinations for Part Ia and Part Ib. Due care shall be taken that sufficient notice is given of any alteration of such supplementary regulations.
8. There shall be two bodies of Examiners, one for each Part of the Tripos. For each of the two bodies there shall be a Chair of Examiners and an Assistant Chair, appointed on the nomination of the Faculty Board of Biology.
9. In each Part of the Tripos there shall be appointed for each subject a Senior Examiner and such number of Examiners and Assessors as are required to conduct the examination.
The Examiners shall be nominated by the Faculty Board of Biology.
10. The Examiners in each subject shall be jointly responsible for all the questions set in that subject. The work of each candidate in any subject shall be tested by at least two Examiners in the subject, and the Examiners in each subject shall be jointly responsible for the marks in that subject. At least two Examiners or one Examiner and one Assessor shall set and conduct every oral and practical examination. The Examiners shall have regard to the style and method of candidates’ answers, and shall give credit for excellence in these respects.
11. The Assessors shall propose questions in the parts of the subjects assigned to them by the Examiners, shall look over the answers of the candidates to those questions, and shall report thereon to the Examiners. The Assessors may be required to assist the Examiners in setting and conducting every oral and practical examination. The Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
12. The Chair shall communicate the marks of all candidates to the Registrary.
13. The names of candidates who, having presented themselves under Regulation 4, attain the prescribed standard shall be published by the Examiners in lists headed ‘The following (who are not candidates for honours) have attained the honours standard’.
14. In Part Ia the examination shall consist of the following subjects:
|
Functional Architecture of the Body (FAB) |
|
Homeostasis (HOM) |
|
Molecules in Medical Science (MIMS) |
|
Veterinary Anatomy and Physiology (VAP) |
15. The examination in each subject shall consist of either two written papers or one written paper and a practical examination, covering three sections numbered I–III, as specified below. In addition, the examination in Homeostasis shall include the submission of reports of practical work.
16. In each subject the examination shall carry the same maximum marks; the maximum marks allocated to Sections I and II together shall be equal to the maximum marks allocated to the remaining parts of the examination in that subject.
17. Every candidate shall offer the subjects Homeostasis and Molecules in Medical Science, and either Functional Architecture of the Body or Veterinary Anatomy and Physiology.
18. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in Part Ia shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
19. In Part Ib the examination shall consist of the following subjects:
|
Biology of Disease (BOD) |
|
Comparative Vertebrate Biology (CVB) |
|
〈Head and Neck Anatomy (HNA)〉95 |
|
Human Reproduction (HR) |
|
Mechanisms of Drug Action (MODA) |
|
Neurobiology with Animal Behaviour (NAB) |
|
Neurobiology with Human Behaviour (NHB) |
|
Veterinary Reproductive Biology (VRB) |
20. The examination in each subject shall consist of one written paper and a practical examination, covering three sections numbered (I)–(III) as specified below.
(a) The examinations in Biology of Disease and in Mechanisms of Drug Action shall each consist of:
[(b) The examinations in Neurobiology with Human Behaviour, and in Neurobiology with Animal Behaviour shall each consist of:
〈(b) The examination in Neurobiology with Animal Behaviour shall consist of:
(c) The examination in Neurobiology with Human Behaviour shall consist of:
(c) The examinations in Human Reproduction and in Veterinary Reproductive Biology shall each consist of:
(d) The examination in Comparative Vertebrate Biology shall consist of:
21. Every candidate shall offer the following for the examination:
|
Biology of Disease (BOD) |
|
〈Head and Neck Anatomy (HNA)〉100 |
|
Human Reproduction (HR) |
|
Mechanisms of Drug Action (MODA) |
|
Neurobiology with Human Behaviour (NHB) |
|
Biology of Disease (BOD) |
|
Veterinary Reproductive Biology (VRB) |
|
Mechanisms of Drug Action (MODA) |
|
Neurobiology with Animal Behaviour (NAB) |
|
Comparative Vertebrate Biology (CVB) |
22. The maximum marks allocated to the examination in each subject or paper shall be in the following proportions:
|
Biology of Disease (BOD) |
10 |
|
Comparative Vertebrate Biology (CVB) |
8 |
|
〈Head and Neck Anatomy (HNA) |
4〉100 |
|
Human Reproduction (HR) |
8 |
|
Mechanisms of Drug Action (MODA) |
10 |
|
Neurobiology with Animal Behaviour (NAB) |
10 |
|
[Neurobiology with Human Behaviour (NHB) |
10]101 |
|
〈Neurobiology with Human Behaviour (NHB) |
14〉101 |
|
Veterinary Reproductive Biology (VRB) |
8 |
|
Special Options paper |
8 |
For the examinations in each subject, the maximum marks for Sections I and II together shall be equal to the maximum marks allocated to Section III.
[23. Public notice of the topics covered in the Special Options paper shall be given by the Faculty Board not later than the division of the Easter Term of the year next preceding the examination concerned, provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected. The Faculty Board shall have power:
24. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in Part Ib shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
Section I will consist of compulsory short-answer questions on tissue anatomy, aspects of organogenesis, the topographical, functional, and applied anatomy of the human body. Section II will consist of a practical examination and will cover similar aspects. In Section III, candidates will be required to write essays.
Section I will contain computer-marked and short-answer questions on nerve and neuromuscular transmission, muscle, autonomic nervous system, cardiovascular system, respiration, kidney, salt and water balance, digestion, absorption, and temperature regulation. Section II will contain questions on the practical work in experimental physiology and histology. Section III will contain essay questions. Candidates will also be required to submit note-books containing records of practical work (see Regulation 15(a)(iii)).
The examination will test knowledge and understanding of the material contained in the MIMS course. Section I will consist of short-answer questions on the lecture material. Section II will consist of questions on practical aspects, including interpretation and handling of data. Section III will contain essay questions and will consist of three subsections, A, B, and C, each containing a choice of questions. Candidates will be required to answer one question from each subsection. Subsection A will relate principally to the lectures given in the Michaelmas Term, subsection B principally to the lectures given in the Lent and Easter Terms, and subsection C to the entire course of lectures and practicals. The nature of the questions in Section III will be to test integrated understanding rather than detailed factual knowledge.
Section I will consist of computer-marked and short-answer questions on the anatomy of domestic mammals and on the structure and function of the gastrointestinal systems of herbivorous mammals. Section II will consist of questions on associated practical work. In Section III, candidates will be required to write two or three essays chosen from not fewer than eight.
The examination in BOD will be treated from the standpoint of abnormal biology. It will include the variations that may occur in the structure and functions of living cells, tissues, and organs, together with the biology of parasites, bacteria, and viruses. Section I will consist of compulsory short-answer questions on the lecture material. Section III will consist of essay questions. Section II will consist of a two-hour practical examination which will include laboratory work and questions on practical aspects and problem solving.
The examination will require knowledge of the structure and function of birds, fish, amphibians and reptiles, and certain species of laboratory animal.
The examination will require knowledge of the structure and function of the human head and neck.〉103
Section I will consist of compulsory short-answer questions and Section II will consist of practical questions. Section III will consist of a written paper that will contain essay questions on reproductive biology and the social and ethical aspects of reproduction and the effects of reproductive activity on populations.
Sections I and III of the examination in MODA will require knowledge of the actions of drugs on whole organisms and mammalian systems, and also of the mode of drug action at the cellular, sub-cellular, and molecular levels. Section I will include compulsory short-answer questions and Section III will include essay questions. Section II will consist of a practical examination and will include questions on data handling and problem solving; laboratory work will not be involved. Questions that require an elementary knowledge of statistical procedures may be included in all three sections of the examination.
The examination in NAB will require knowledge of the structure and functions of the central nervous system, the special sense organs, neuropharmacology and animal behaviour, with particular reference to domestic animals. Section I will include or consist entirely of compulsory short-answer questions. Section III will consist of essay questions. In Section II, candidates will be examined on practical aspects of neuroanatomy and in experimental neurophysiology; questions may be included which require an elementary knowledge of statistical procedures.
The examination in NHB will require knowledge of the structure and functions of the central nervous system and the special sense organs, neuroanatomy, experimental psychology and some of its applications to medicine. Particular topics will include neuropharmacology; learning and memory; perception and information processing; intelligence and development; emotion and its physiological basis; and social psychology. Section I will include or consist entirely of compulsory short-answer questions. Section III will consist of essay questions. In Section II, candidates will be examined on practical aspects of neuroanatomy and in experimental neurophysiology; questions may be included which require an elementary knowledge of statistical procedures.
Section I of the examination will consist of computer-marked and short-answer questions on the structure and function of the reproductive systems of mammals, with particular reference to domestic mammals. Section II will consist of questions on associated practical work and may include a data-handling exercise. Section III will consist of essay questions.
1. The Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos shall consist of three Parts, Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II.
2. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ia:
3. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ib:
4. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part II:104
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
7. Except as otherwise specified in Schedule A, the written papers in each Part shall be of three hours’ duration.
8. There shall be a separate body of Examiners for each Part, provided that the Faculty Board of Modern and Medieval Languages shall have power to nominate an Examiner to examine in more than one Part. From among the resident Examiners for each Part the Faculty Board shall appoint such number of Senior Examiners as they may deem sufficient.
9. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any of the subjects in any Part of the Tripos. If required to do so, Assessors shall set papers in the subject or subjects assigned to them, shall mark the answers of the candidates in those papers, shall assess dissertations, projects, and course-work, shall set and conduct oral examinations, and shall advise the Examiners on the performance of candidates in the examination. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
10. To conduct the examination in each Part, the Faculty Board shall nominate at least two Examiners for each modern language in which candidates desire to present themselves. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate any Examiner to examine in more than one language.
11. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners for the papers in classical Latin and classical Greek in Part Ia and Part Ib as they shall deem sufficient.
12. For each Part of the Tripos the Chair and Senior Examiners, in consultation, shall approve the questions proposed for each written paper and the subject matter proposed for each oral examination.
13. (a) The Examiners or Assessors shall assess any course-work submitted by the candidate under Regulation 16. Except where otherwise specified a candidate’s answers to the questions in each written paper and other submitted work shall be written in English.
(b) Two Examiners or Assessors shall conduct the oral examination of each candidate in each language.
14. For Part Ia there shall be a separate class-list for each language, which shall be drawn up at a meeting attended by the Examiners (including the Senior Examiner) responsible for that language and by the Chair of Examiners; each list shall indicate whether a candidate has offered Option A or Option B. For each of the other Parts there shall be a single class-list, which shall be drawn up at a meeting attended by all the Examiners for that Part.
15. In each class-list the names of the candidates who have obtained honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. Marks of distinction may be awarded as follows:
In Part Ia, for special excellence in any language.
In Part Ib or Part II, for special excellence in the examination as a whole.
In Part II, for special excellence in the oral examination.105
In determining the place in the class-list of any candidate who has offered one of Papers GL 6, GL 7, GL 21, or GL 22 in addition, the Examiners shall give credit for proficiency in these papers. A mark of distinction, G or L respectively, shall be attached to the names of those candidates who, in offering one of Papers GL 6, GL 7, GL 21, or GL 22 acquit themselves with credit in that paper. A mark, g or l respectively, shall be attached to the names of those candidates who, in offering one of Papers GL 6, GL 7, GL 21, or GL 22 satisfy the Examiners in that paper.
16. The Faculty Board shall have power:
17. The Faculty Board shall give public notice of all the variable subjects selected for the examinations in any year as follows:
provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so, and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected. The Board shall have power when they give notice of the variable subjects selected for a particular examination to announce any consequential restriction on the combination of papers that a candidate may choose to offer, or on the subject areas in which a candidate may offer a dissertation.
18. Examinations shall be held in the following languages:
19. A candidate shall not offer in any Part of the Tripos a paper that he or she has previously offered in another University examination.
20. (a) In each of the modern languages specified in Regulation 18(a) other than French, the examination for Part Ia shall consist of either Option A or Option B, as set out below. In French the examination shall consist of Option B only.
Option A. |
Papers A1, A2, and A3. |
|
Oral examination A. |
||
Option B. |
Papers B1 and B2. |
|
Oral examination B. One paper from Schedule Ia relating to the language concerned. |
(b) In classical Greek or Latin the examination for Part Ia shall consist of either Option A (in Greek only) or Option B (in either Greek or Latin) as follows:
Option A. |
Papers GL 2 and GL 5. |
|
Option B. |
Papers GL 1 or GL 3 and GL 5. |
In Greek a candidate may additionally offer Paper GL 6; in Latin, Paper GL 7.
21. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 19, every candidate for Part Ia shall offer:
A candidate shall offer either Option A in one language and Option B in the other, or Option B in both languages.
22. In order to obtain honours in Part Ia a candidate shall be required to attain the honours standard in each of two languages.
23. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 19, candidates for Part Ib shall offer written papers and other exercises as follows:
provided that a candidate may offer, in place of one of the designated papers from Schedule Ib,110 two long essays, each of not fewer than 3,500 words and not more than 4,000 words in length including footnotes but excluding bibliography. Both essays must be in answer to questions prescribed by the examiners for the paper and advertised by the division of term preceding the submission deadline. The two essays shall be submitted to the Secretary of the Faculty Board, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board, so as to arrive not later than 12 noon on the first Friday of the Full Lent Term and Full Easter Term respectively. Candidates may receive one hour’s supervision devoted to discussion of a plan of each essay but shall receive no further assistance in the writing of the essays. Detailed instructions will be issued by the Faculty and Departments regarding any other requirements for the essays as a whole. Candidates will be required to declare that the essays are their own work, and that they do not overlap in content with material submitted for supervisions. Candidates may be called for viva voce examination in connection with their essays.
24. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 19, candidates for Part II shall offer written papers and other exercises as follows:
provided that a candidate who offers a dissertation under (a)(iii), (b)(ii), (c)(ii), or (d)(iii) may not also offer two papers from Schedule D that are assessed by means other than a written examination, unless the Faculty Board has given special permission for the candidate to do so.
25. A student who is a candidate for Part II under Regulations 4(a) or 4(c) who has not achieved a satisfactory standard, as defined by the Faculty Board, either in Paper B3 or in the aggregated marks of Papers B1 and B2 in any language in the examination for Part Ib, may not offer Papers C1 or C2 in that language.
26. The Faculty Board shall have discretion in exceptional circumstances to grant exemption from the oral examination specified in Regulation 24(a), (b), or (d) to any candidate on the application of his or her Tutor. The Secretary of the Faculty Board shall send to the Registrary, not later than the first day of the Easter Term in which the written examination is to be held, a list of candidates to whom the Faculty Board have granted exemption from the oral examination under this regulation.
27. (i) A year abroad project or dissertation offered under Regulation 24 shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions set out in sub-paragraphs (a)–(h) below.
(ii) (a) A project offered under Regulation 24(d)(ii) shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions set out for year abroad projects in sub-paragraphs (a) and (d)–(h) above.
(b) A student who is required to offer a project under Regulation 24(d) shall give notice to the Secretary of the Faculty Board of the subject of the proposed project and the general area within which it will fall by a date announced by the Faculty Board, which shall be not later than the third Friday of the Full Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination.
After giving notice as required above, a candidate shall submit the proposed title of the project to the Secretary of the Faculty Board, in accordance with any instructions issued by the Board and according to the timetable set out in Schedule E.
28. No student shall be a candidate for Part II under Regulation 4(a) unless evidence has been produced to the Secretary of the Faculty Board that during the academical year next before the year of the examination he or she has spent a period studying abroad under conditions approved by the Faculty Board in a country or countries relevant to the papers to be offered in the examination.116 Such evidence will normally consist of a certificate from a university or employer confirming dates of attendance. Every student shall submit a report on their year abroad to the Faculty Board in the manner prescribed from time to time by the Board. Students shall keep the Secretary of the Faculty Board informed of their address abroad at all times.
29. A candidate proposing to study abroad in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 28 shall apply to the Faculty Board for the approval of his or her plans, using a form issued by the Faculty Board and available in the Year Abroad Office. The application shall be submitted through the candidate's Director of Studies to the Secretary of the Faculty Board so as to arrive not later than the last day of Full Michaelmas Term in the academical year next preceding that which the candidate proposes to spend abroad, and shall indicate the country or countries that the student intends to visit and the way in which he or she will be occupied while abroad.116 If a student subsequently changes his or her plans, he or she must inform the Secretary of the Faculty Board and seek permission afresh.
In each language specified in Regulation 18(a) the following papers and other exercises shall be set:
Paper A1. |
Introduction to the foreign language, 1. |
Paper A2. |
Introduction to the foreign language, 2. (Two hours) |
Paper A3. |
Introduction to the foreign language, 3. |
Oral examination A. |
Paper B1. |
Use of the foreign language. |
Paper B2. |
Translation from the foreign language. (Two hours) |
Paper B3. |
Translation into the foreign language, and test in the foreign language through audio-visual media. |
Oral examination B. |
Paper C1. |
Translation from and into the foreign language. (Two hours) |
Paper C2. |
Foreign language: text and culture. (Two hours) |
Oral examination C. |
Du. |
1. |
Introduction to Dutch literature.117 |
Du. |
2. |
The medieval and sixteenth-century literature and history of the Low Countries, c. 1170 to c. 1585.117 |
Du. |
3. |
The literature, history, and culture of the Republic of the United Netherlands, 1585 to 1700.117 |
Du. |
4. |
Literature, history, and culture of Belgium and the Netherlands from 1830 to the present day.117 |
Du. |
5. |
Introduction to the language and literature of the Low Countries. |
Fr. |
1. |
Introduction to French literature, linguistics, film, and thought. |
Fr. |
2. |
Structures and varieties of French. |
Fr. |
3. |
Love, violence, and power in France, 1100–1500 (also serves as Paper 12 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos). |
Fr. |
4. |
Rethinking the human: French literature, thought, and culture, 1500–1700. |
Fr. |
5. |
Revolutions in writing, 1700–1900. |
Fr. |
6. |
Innovation and upheaval: deformation and reformulation in the 20th and 21st centuries. |
Fr. |
7. |
Topics in medieval studies to be specified by the Faculty Board from time to time (also serves as Paper 18 of Part II of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos and as Paper 34 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Fr. |
8. |
Living, loving, and dying in Renaissance France (also serves as Paper 35 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Fr. |
9. |
Reason, experience, and authority: French literature, thought, and history, 1594–1700 (also serves as Paper 36 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Fr. |
10. |
French literature, thought, and history, from 1690 to 1799 (also serves as Paper 37 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Fr. |
11. |
Gender, desire, and power in 19th century French culture (also serves as Paper 38 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Fr. |
12. |
Ethics and experience: literature, thought, and visual culture of the French-speaking world (1900 to the present) (also serves as Paper 39 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Fr. |
13. |
The French language: variation and change (also serves as Paper 33 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Fr. |
14. |
A special topic in French studies (A) to be specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
Fr. |
15. |
A special topic in French studies (B) to be specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
Fr. |
16. |
A special topic in French studies (C) to be specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. |
Ge. |
1. |
Introduction to German studies. |
Ge. |
2. |
German history and thought since 1750. |
Ge. |
3. |
Introduction to German literary texts.117 |
Ge. |
4. |
The making of German culture, I. |
Ge. |
5. |
Modern German culture I, 1750 to 1914. |
Ge. |
6. |
Modern German culture, II. |
Ge. |
7. |
German: a linguistic introduction. |
Ge. |
8. |
German literature, thought, and history, from 1700 to 1815, including Goethe works to 1832. |
Ge. |
9. |
German literature, thought, and history, from 1815 to 1914. |
Ge. |
10. |
German literature, thought, and history, since 1910. |
Ge. |
11. |
Aspects of the history of the German language (also serves as Paper 22 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Ge. |
12. |
A special period or subject in German literature, thought, or history (i). |
Ge. |
13. |
A special period or subject in German literature, thought, or history (ii). |
Ge. |
14. |
The making of German culture, II. |
Ge. |
15. |
Modern German cultures of performance. |
Gr. |
1. |
Greek literature, thought, and history, since 1880.117 |
Gr. |
2. |
Introduction to the Cretan Renaissance.117 |
Gr. |
3. |
Introduction to modern Greek language and culture (also serves as Paper O2 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
Gr. |
4. |
Crete and Cyprus in the Renaissance period.117 |
Gr. |
5. |
Greek literature, thought, and history, from 1700 to 1900.117 |
Gr. |
6. |
Greek literature, thought, and history, since 1900.117 |
Gr. |
7. |
The history and structure of modern Greek (also serves as Paper 24 of the Linguistics Tripos).117 |
IL. |
1. |
Ibero-American cinema. |
It. |
1. |
Italian texts and contexts. |
It. |
2. |
Structure and varieties of Italian. |
It. |
3. |
Italian modernism.117 |
It. |
4. |
Autobiography and self-representation in Italian culture. |
It. |
5. |
Italian identities: place, language, and culture. |
It. |
6. |
Modern Italian culture. |
It. |
7. |
Dante and the culture of his age (also serves as Paper 40 of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
It. |
8. |
Italian literature, thought, and culture, 1500–1650. |
It. |
9. |
Text and image. |
It. |
10. |
The language of Italy (also serves as Paper 20 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
ML |
1. |
Continuity and change in Latin literature, from 200 to 650.117 |
ML |
2. |
Medieval Latin literature, from 650 to 1300 (also serves as Paper 13 of Part I of the Anglo-Saxon, Norse, and Celtic Tripos).117 |
NL |
1. |
Introduction to Neo-Latin literature, from 1350 to 1700 (also serves as Paper 41a of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
NL |
2. |
A special subject in Neo-Latin literature: selected authors (also serves as Paper O7 of the Classical Tripos and as Paper 41b of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)). |
Pg. |
1. |
Introduction to the language, literatures, and cultures of Portuguese speaking countries. |
Pg. |
2. |
Introduction to Lusophone literature.117 |
Pg. |
3. |
Introduction to the language and literature of Portugal, Brazil, and Portuguese-speaking Africa. |
Pg. |
4. |
Self, family, nation, and Empire in Lusophone culture. |
Pg. |
5. |
Literature and culture of Portugal and Brazil from 1595.118 |
Sl. |
1. |
Introduction to Russian culture. |
Sl. |
2. |
The history and culture of Early Rus. |
Sl. |
3. |
Early modern Russia: literature, history, and visual culture from 1300 to 1725.117 |
Sl. |
4. |
Russian culture from the Golden Age to the Silver Age. |
Sl. |
5. |
Russian culture after 1880.119 |
Sl. |
6. |
Russian culture after 1953. |
Sl. |
7. |
Soviet and Russian cinema. |
Sl. |
8. |
The history of the Russian language (also serves as Paper 23 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Sl. |
9. |
Introduction to the language, literature, and culture of Ukraine. |
Sl. |
10. |
Studies in twentieth-century Ukrainian literature and film. |
Sl. |
11. |
Russia in revolution, from 1861 to 1917. |
Sl. |
12. |
Socialist Russia 1917–1991. |
Sl. |
13. |
Introduction to the language, literature, and culture of Poland. |
Sp. |
1. |
Introduction to the language, literatures, and cultures of the Spanish speaking world. |
Sp. |
2. |
Introduction to Hispanic texts.117 |
Sp. |
3. |
Medieval Iberian and Spanish Golden Age culture. |
Sp. |
4. |
Modern Spanish culture and history. |
Sp. |
5. |
Spanish-American culture and history. |
Sp. |
6. |
Topics in medieval Iberian culture.117 |
Sp. |
7. |
Spanish literature, thought, and history, from 1492 to 1700. |
Sp. |
8. |
Spanish cinema and television.120 |
Sp. |
9. |
Spanish literature, thought, and history, after 1820. |
Sp. |
10. |
Introduction to Catalan language and culture. |
Sp. |
11. |
The Hispanic languages (also serves as Paper 21 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Sp. |
12. |
Latin-American culture. |
Sp. |
13. |
Contemporary Latin-American culture. |
Sp. |
14. |
Spanish literature, life, and history, before 1492. |
Li. |
1. |
Sounds and words (Paper 1 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Li. |
2. |
Structures and meanings (Paper 2 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Li. |
3. |
Language, brain, and society (Paper 3 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Li. |
4. |
History and varieties of English (Paper 4 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Li. |
6. |
Phonetics (Paper 6 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Li. |
7. |
Phonological theory (Paper 7 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Li. |
8. |
Morphology (Paper 8 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Li. |
9. |
Syntax (Paper 9 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Li. |
10. |
Semantics and pragmatics (Paper 10 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Li. |
11. |
Historical linguistics (Paper 11 of the Linguistics Tripos).121 |
Li. |
12. |
History of ideas on language (Paper 12 of the Linguistics Tripos).122 |
Li. |
13. |
History of the English language (Paper 13 of the Linguistics Tripos).122 |
Li. |
14. |
History of the French language (Paper 14 of the Linguistics Tripos).124 |
Li. |
15. |
First and second language acquisition (Paper 15 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Li. |
16. |
Psychology of language processing and learning (Paper 16 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Li. |
17. |
A subject in Linguistics to be specified by the Faculty Board from time to time (Paper 17 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
Li. |
18. |
Computational linguistics (Paper 18 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
CS |
1. |
The Romance languages (also serves as Paper 25 of the Linguistics Tripos, and as Paper O10 of Part II of the Classical Tripos). |
CS |
2. |
The Germanic languages.117 |
CS |
3. |
The Slavonic languages (also serves as Paper 26 of the Linguistics Tripos). |
CS |
4. |
A special subject in comparative literature (i) (also serves as part of Paper 42A of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)).117,126 |
CS |
5. |
A special subject in comparative literature (ii) (also serves as part of Paper 42B of Part II of the English Tripos (New Regulations)).126 |
CS |
6. |
European film.126 |
Papers available in Part Ia
Dutch: |
Du. |
1117. |
French: |
Fr. |
1. |
German: |
Ge. |
1. |
Modern Greek: |
Gr. |
1117. |
Italian: |
It. |
1. |
Portuguese: |
Pg. |
1. |
Slavonic Studies: |
Sl. |
1. |
Spanish: |
Sp. |
1. |
Papers available in Part Ib
Dutch |
Du. |
|
French |
Fr. |
2, 3†, 4†, 5†, 6†. |
German |
Ge. |
1, 2†, 3*117, 4, 5†, 6†, 7. |
Modern Greek |
Gr. |
|
Italian |
It. |
2, 3117, 4†, 5†. |
Medieval Latin |
ML |
|
Neo-Latin |
NL |
1†. |
Portuguese |
Pg. |
|
Slavonic Studies |
Sl. |
|
Spanish |
Sp. |
|
Linguistics |
Li. |
1, 2, 3, 4. |
Comparative Studies |
CS |
1. |
Papers available in Part II
Dutch: |
Du. |
|
French: |
Fr. |
7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16. |
German: |
Ge. |
8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15. |
Modern Greek: |
Gr. |
|
Ibero-Lusophone Studies: |
IL. |
1. |
Italian: |
It. |
6, 7, 8, 9, 10. |
Medieval Latin: |
ML |
|
Neo-Latin: |
NL |
1, 2. |
Portuguese: |
Pg. |
|
Slavonic Studies: |
Sl. |
2, 3117, 4, 5136, 6, 7, 8, 9130,135,137, 10137, 11, 12, 13130,135. |
Spanish: |
Sp. |
|
Linguistics: |
Li. |
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11138, 12139, 13139, 1410124, 15, 16, 17, 18. |
Comparative Studies: |
CS |
GL 1. |
Greek language and texts (Paper 1 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos) |
GL 2. |
Alternative Greek language and texts (Paper 2 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos) |
GL 3. |
Latin language and texts (Paper 3 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos) |
GL 5. |
Classical questions (a modified version of Paper 5 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos) |
GL 6. |
Greek prose and verse composition (Paper 6 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos) |
GL 7. |
Latin prose and verse composition (Paper 7 of Part Ia of the Classical Tripos) |
GL 11. |
Passages for translation from Greek authors (Paper 1 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
GL 12. |
Alternative passages for translation from Greek authors (Paper 2 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
GL 13. |
Passages for translation from Latin authors (Paper 3 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
GL 15. |
Greek literature (Paper 5 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
GL 16. |
Latin literature (Paper 6 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
GL 17. |
Greek and Roman history (Paper 7 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
GL 18. |
Greek and Roman philosophy (Paper 8 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
GL 19. |
Greek and Roman art and archaeology (Paper 9 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
GL 20. |
Greek and Latin philology and linguistics (Paper 10 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
GL 21. |
Translation from English into Greek prose and verse (Paper 11 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
GL 22. |
Translation from English into Latin prose and verse (Paper 12 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos). |
Subject to the provisions of Regulation 24, candidates for the Modern and Medieval Languages Tripos who take any of the papers in this schedule may submit the alternative exercises permitted for those papers.
Paper 2. |
Scandinavian history in the Viking Age |
Paper 5. |
Old English language and literature |
Paper 6. |
Old Norse language and literature |
Paper 7. |
Medieval Welsh language and literature |
Paper 8. |
Medieval Irish language and literature |
Paper 5. |
A subject in Old English literature specified by the Faculty Board of English |
Paper 6. |
Advanced medieval Scandinavian language and literature |
Paper 7. |
Advanced medieval Welsh language and literature |
Paper 8. |
Advanced medieval Irish language and literature |
Paper 11. |
Germanic philology |
Paper 12. |
Celtic philology |
Paper MES.37. |
History of the pre-modern Middle East |
Paper MES.39. |
Special subject in the pre-modern Middle East |
Paper MES.40. |
Special subject in the contemporary Middle East: political anthropology of Islam and the Middle East |
Paper MES.41. |
Comparative Semitic linguistics |
Paper A1. |
A prescribed Greek author or authors, and a prescribed Latin author or authors |
Paper A2. |
Prescribed Greek texts |
Paper A3. |
Prescribed Latin texts |
Paper B1. |
Plato |
Paper B2. |
Aristotle |
Paper C4. |
A subject in ancient or medieval European history |
Paper D3. |
A topic within classical archaeology and/or art |
Paper E2. |
The Greek language |
Paper E3. |
The Latin language |
Paper X1. |
A subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time |
Paper X2. |
A subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time |
Paper 2. |
Tragedy |
Paper 5. |
Chaucer |
Paper 13. |
Postcolonial and related literatures |
Paper 18. |
Literature and visual culture |
Paper 18. |
European history, since 1890 |
Paper 4. |
History of political thought from c. 1700 to c. 1890 |
Papers in European history announced by the Faculty Board of Modern and Medieval Languages from among Papers 7–30 of Part II of the Historical Tripos, in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 17(b).
Paper 11. |
Aesthetics |
Paper Int. 7. |
Society, politics, and culture in Latin America117 |
|
Date by which titles are to be submitted |
Date by which approval is to be obtained |
Date by which projects and dissertations are to be submitted |
Projects |
Third Friday of Full Easter Term next preceding the examination |
End of Easter Term
|
First Friday of Full Michaelmas Term
|
Optional dissertations |
Third Friday of Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination |
Last day of Full Michaelmas Term
|
Monday of the last week of Full Lent Term
|
These papers and the corresponding Oral Examination (Oral Examination A) will be of a standard of difficulty appropriate for candidates who had no knowledge, or relatively little knowledge, of the foreign language before entry to the University.
Papers A1 and A2 (two hours) will consist of exercises designed to test candidates’ knowledge of essential vocabulary and grammatical structures, their ability to comprehend (and in certain cases to translate) authentic material in the foreign language, and their skill in the active use of the foreign language. The exercises set for Papers A1 and A2 in each language will be specified by the Faculty Board from time to time; they will not necessarily be identical in all languages.
The maximum mark allocated to Paper A2 will be two-thirds of the maximum mark allocated to a three-hour paper.
Paper A3 may include questions on literary, cultural, linguistic, or historical topics, some of which may be based on more extensive material in the foreign language, as specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
The examination will consist of (a) reading aloud a passage taken from a text chosen by the Examiners, and (b) a conversation based either on the subject-matter of the text or on a prescribed topic, as specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A copy of the chosen text will be made available to each candidate not less than fifteen minutes before the beginning of his or her examination.
The maximum mark allocated to the oral examination will be one-third of the maximum mark allocated to a three-hour written paper.
This paper will consist of one or more passages in the foreign language. Exercises on the passage(s) may include questions of a grammatical and lexical nature, critical response, précis, and guided writing. Candidates will normally be required to answer in the foreign language. Candidates may be required to translate a passage or passages of continuous prose into the foreign language.
This paper (two hours) will contain exercises in translation from the foreign language, of which one may be a commentary on a passage in the foreign language or a commentary on a translation or an exercise in comparative translation. In Portuguese and in Spanish four questions will be set, of which candidates will be required to attempt two; in all other languages three questions will be set, of which candidates will be required to attempt two. In French, Italian, Portuguese, and Spanish the passages set will be chosen from material in the foreign language not earlier than 1500, in Russian from material not earlier than 1700, and in German from material not earlier than 1800.
The maximum mark allocated to this paper will be two-thirds of the maximum mark allocated to a three-hour paper.
The examination for this paper will consist of two exercises, (a) translation from English into the foreign language (two hours), and (b) test in the foreign language through audio-visual media (one and a half hours).
Section (a) will consist of one or more passages of English prose, amounting to not more than 400 words in total, for translation into the foreign language.
Section (b). In the comprehension test, candidates will be required to watch and listen to prepared audio-visual material in the foreign language, of not less than seven minutes and not more than ten minutes in length, during which they will be allowed to make notes. After an interval during which candidates will be allowed to read the exam questions, the passage will be repeated. Candidates will be required to answer questions in writing on the material presented. This will include comprehension questions, as well as a written summary, a response, or a commentary based on the passage. The questions will be posed, and answers will be required, in the foreign language.
The examination will consist of (a) reading aloud a passage taken from a text chosen by the Examiners, and (b) conversation on the subject-matter of the text. The examination may also include conversation on general topics.
A copy of the chosen text will be made available to each candidate not less than fifteen minutes before the beginning of his or her examination.
The maximum mark allocated to the oral examination will be one-third of the maximum mark allocated to a three-hour written paper.
This paper (two hours) will consist of two exercises: (a) will consist of one passage of English prose, amounting to 250 words in total, for translation into the foreign language; (b) will consist of one passage in the foreign language, amounting to not more than 250 words in total, for translation into English. Both exercises must be attempted.
The maximum mark allocated to this paper will be 70% of the maximum mark allocated to a three-hour written paper.
This paper (two hours) will consist of two passages in the foreign language. Candidates will be required to answer on one passage. Answers must be in the foreign language, showing knowledge of wider contexts as well as responding to the specific text. Passages will relate to a prescribed topic as specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
The examination will consist of a five-minute presentation and ten-minute conversation between the candidate and the Examiners: the subject of discussion shall be the candidate’s Year Abroad Project. The maximum mark allocated to the oral examination will be 60% of the maximum mark allocated to a three-hour written paper.
A candidate who offered one modern language and one classical language in Part Ia, choosing Option A in the modern language and Option B in the classical language, shall offer in Part Ib:
In Greek a candidate may additionally offer Paper GL 21; in Latin, Paper GL 22.
A candidate who offered one modern language and classical Greek in Part Ia, choosing Option A in classical Greek and Option B in the modern language, shall offer in Part Ib:
A candidate may additionally offer Paper GL 21.
A candidate who offered one modern language and one classical language in Part Ia, choosing Option B in both, shall offer in Part Ib:
In Greek a candidate may additionally offer Paper GL 21; in Latin, Paper GL 22.
1. The Music Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II.
2. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part Ia if he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
3. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ia of the Music Tripos or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib141 in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
4. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ib of the Music Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination or the Mus.B. Examination, in the same term.
6. No student who has been a candidate for honours in any Part shall again be a candidate for honours in the same Part.
7. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 5, a student who is not eligible to be a candidate for honours may be a candidate for any Part of the Tripos so as to qualify as a candidate for the Mus.B. Examination, provided that he or she has kept four terms at least.
8. There shall be three separate bodies of Examiners, one for Part Ia, one for Part Ib, and one for Part II. The Faculty Board of Music shall nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient to conduct the examinations.
9. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any of the subjects of the Tripos. Assessors shall be responsible for setting the paper or papers or other tests in the subjects assigned to them, and shall present to the Examiners such written reports as the Examiners may require. Assessors may be summoned, for the purpose of consultation and advice, to meetings of the Examiners, but shall not be entitled to vote.
10. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part of the Tripos. In each list the names of the successful candidates shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in each of the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. In each class-list a mark of distinction may be awarded for special excellence.
11. The names of candidates who have satisfied the Examiners under Regulation 7 shall be placed in an alphabetical list headed ‘The following (who are not candidates for honours) have attained the honours standard’.
12. The scheme of examination for Part Ia shall be:
Paper 1. |
Harmony and counterpoint I. |
Paper 2. |
Harmony and counterpoint II. |
Paper 3. |
Historical subjects. |
Paper 4. |
Historical and cultural studies. |
Paper 5. |
Analysis. |
Paper 6. |
Practical musicianship. |
Papers 1 and 3–5 shall be of three hours’ duration. Paper 2 shall consist of a portfolio of written work; the arrangements for submission of the portfolio shall be prescribed by the Faculty Board. Paper 6 shall consist of an aural test of not more than three hours’ duration, together with a separate keyboard test. A candidate for Part Ia shall offer all the papers for that Part.
13. The scheme of examination for Part Ib shall be:
Paper 1. |
Portfolio of tonal compositions. |
Paper 2. |
Analysis. |
Paper 3. |
Portfolio of free compositions. |
Paper 4. |
Dissertation. |
Paper 5. |
Advanced keyboard skills. |
The Faculty Board shall have the power to prescribe, not later than the division of the Easter Term in the year next before the examination to which they apply, not more than seven additional papers, which will be divided into two sections: (A) Historical topics and (B) Other topics.
Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, with the following exceptions:
14. A candidate for Part Ib shall offer five papers in all: Papers 1 and 2; and three other papers chosen from Papers 3–5 and from the additional papers prescribed by the Faculty Board, provided that at least one paper shall be from Section A of the additional papers. At least two of the papers must be from among those examined by a three-hour written examination.
15. A candidate for Part Ib shall be allowed to present a recital either on an instrument or of singing. Such a recital, if of sufficient merit, may be taken into account by the Examiners.
16. The scheme of the examination for Part II shall be:
Paper 1. |
Dissertation. |
Paper 2. |
Advanced tonal composition. |
Paper 3. |
Portfolio of free compositions. |
Paper 4. |
Analysis portfolio. |
Paper 5. |
Notation portfolio. |
Paper 6. |
Test of performance. |
Paper 7. |
Fugue. |
The Faculty Board shall have the power to prescribe, not later than the division of the Easter Term in the year next before the examination to which they apply, not more than ten additional papers.
Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, with the following exceptions:
17. A candidate for Part II shall offer six papers in all: these shall include at least one and not more than four from Papers 1–5, and at least two from Papers 6–7 and the additional papers announced by the Faculty Board under Regulation 16. A candidate must offer a combination of papers that is examined by at least six hours of written examination.
18. A candidate who offers either Paper 1 or Paper 3 in Part Ib, or Papers 2–5 in Part II, shall submit a portfolio to the Chair of Examiners so as to arrive not later than the following dates: for Paper 3 in Part Ib or Paper 3 in Part II, the fourth day of Full Easter Term in which the examination is held; for Paper 4 in Part II, the eleventh day of Full Easter Term in which the examination is held; for Paper 1 in Part Ib or Papers 2 and 5 in Part II, the fifteenth day of Full Easter Term in which the examination is held. The compositions, analyses, or transcriptions contained in such a portfolio shall be written by the candidate during the current academical year; each separate item shall be initialled by the teacher under whose direction it was written, as an indication that the teacher approves the submission. Candidates will be required to declare that the contents of the portfolio are their own work and that they do not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
19. (a) The examination for Paper 4 in Part Ib and Paper 1 in Part II shall consist of a dissertation on a musical subject of the candidate's own choice approved by the Faculty Board which falls wholly or substantially outside the subject or subjects chosen by the candidate for any other papers. A candidate who wishes to offer such a dissertation shall submit the proposed title to the relevant Chair of Examiners so as to arrive not later than the division of Michaelmas Term preceding the examination.
(b) Each candidate must obtain the approval of the proposed subject by the Teaching Committee of the Faculty Board not later than the division of the Lent Term.
(c) A dissertation for Part Ib shall be of not less than 5,000 words and not more than 7,000 words (excluding bibliography and appendices but including footnotes). A dissertation for Part II shall be of not less than 7,000 words and not more than 10,000 words (excluding bibliography and appendices but including footnotes). Dissertations shall be in typewritten form, unless previous permission has been obtained from the Chair of Examiners to present the dissertation in manuscript.
(d) Each candidate shall submit two copies of her or his dissertation to the appropriate Chair of Examiners so as to arrive not later than the eighth day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held. The Examiners shall have power to request an electronic copy of the dissertation in addition.
20. Each candidate will be expected to sign a declaration indicating that the work submitted for Paper 2 of Part Ia, a dissertation under Regulation 19, or an essay for any other paper, is her or his own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
21. For the purpose of drawing up the class-list the Examiners for Part II shall have the power to call a candidate for interview on matters arising from the examination, but they shall take account of such an interview only if it would be to the candidate's advantage.
22. The Faculty Board may issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects of the examination, and may modify or alter such supplementary regulations as occasion may require, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any alteration.
23. Before the division of the Easter Term in each year the Faculty Board shall give notice of the subjects to be set for Papers 3 and 4 of Part Ia for the examination to be held in the academical year next following, provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
Not less than two weeks before the start of the examination by written papers, the Board shall notify candidates of the works prescribed for Paper 5 of Part Ia and Paper 2 of Part Ib.
24. The examination for the Music Tripos shall be held under the old regulations for the last time
for Part Ia in 2012
for Part Ib in 2013
for Part II in 2014
The paper will consist of an exercise on sixteenth-century counterpoint and the completion of a song accompaniment.
Candidates will be required to prepare a fugal exposition, a set of variations (either for piano or on a ground), and complete a passage for string quartet from a given opening. The paper will be made available between 10 a.m. and noon on the fourth Monday of Full Easter Term and is to be returned by noon on the following day (i.e. after a period of 24 hours).
The paper will be divided into two sections. The first will contain questions on a subject in Western music; candidates will be required to answer two questions. The second will include questions on the principles of editing, using materials related to the period or repertory prescribed for the first section; candidates will be required to answer one question.
The paper will be divided into two sections. The first will contain questions on a subject in Western music. The second will include questions on Western music, ethnomusicology, music and science, or notation. Candidates will be required to answer three questions, at least one from each section.
The paper will be divided into two sections. In the first section, compositions, or extracts from compositions, either from the period 1700–1780 or from the period 1780–1830 will be provided for analysis. In the second section, compositions or extracts from compositions from the period not represented in the first section will be provided for analysis. The compositions or extracts examined in the second section will be drawn from a repertoire prescribed by the Faculty Board at the beginning of the academical year in which the examination takes place. Candidates will be required to answer two questions, one from each section.
Aural tests will include: a memorization test (rhythms); dictation exercises (melodies and three-part counterpoint); a mistake-spotting test; timbre recognition and scoring exercises; recognition of set pieces; and aural analysis.
Keyboard tests will include: reading the score of a string quartet; transposition of a chorale; harmonization of a melody (in a style from the period before 1830); realization of a figured bass at the keyboard; and reading three-part sixteenth-century counterpoint using C3, C4, and F4 clefs.
Candidates will be required to submit a portfolio comprising two tonal compositions and a fugue in three or four parts, together with a recording, on conventional instruments, of one of the two compositions. The compositions shall be in different forms chosen from the following: binary, ternary, scherzo and trio, ritornello, rondo, theme and variations, sonata. The fugue must demonstrate knowledge of invertible counterpoint, and may be scored for any traditional combination of instruments; it should not exceed seventy bars in length.
In place of one of the two compositions, candidates may submit a through-composed song or group of songs, each of which must possess a clear and appropriate formal structure, for solo voice and piano accompaniment, or for solo voice and accompaniment by a group of instruments. One of the two non-fugal compositions shall be of not more than about eight minutes’ duration, excluding repeats, and the other two compositions shall be of not more than about five minutes’ duration, excluding repeats. Each composition or group of songs shall be for an ensemble of not more than five players. One composition may be for solo keyboard (including organ) or other polyphonic instrument, but melody instruments may be used only in ensemble. The fugue may also be for a keyboard instrument. Candidates will be responsible for providing a recording of an acceptable quality, but the quality of recorded sound will not contribute to the final mark.
The paper will be divided into two sections. In the first, compositions, or extracts from compositions, either from the period 1830–1914 or from the period 1914 to the present day will be prescribed not less than two weeks before the start of the examination by written papers. The choice of period for the prescribed works will be at the Examiners’ discretion. Candidates will be permitted to bring unmarked copies of the relevant scores into the examination, and will be required to answer questions on the works. In the second section, compositions or extracts from compositions from the period not represented by the prescribed works will be provided for analysis. Candidates will be required to answer two questions, one from each section.
Candidates will be required to submit a portfolio of three compositions. One should be a setting of words, and one should include either fugal elements or incorporate the techniques of groundbass and/or chaconne. Normal staff notation will usually be expected, but electro-acoustic submissions are also acceptable. In addition, each candidate must submit a recording of at least one of the three pieces.
The examination will consist of five components. Three will be examined after a total of ten minutes’ preparation by the candidate: (i) harmonization of a melody; (ii) orchestral score-reading; and (iii) vocal score-reading (C1, C3, C4, and F4 clefs). The other two components – (iv) figured bass and (v) transposition of a song accompaniment – will be given out two days before the examination. The instrumentalist and singer with whom to perform, respectively, (iv) and (v) will be supplied by the Examiners.
The examination will consist of a recital of not more than ten minutes’ duration either on an instrument or of singing. Candidates should inform the Chair of Examiners not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination of the instrument chosen or the type of voice (this information must be supplied in written form, and initialled by the candidate's Director of Studies). Candidates must provide an accompanist or page turner (or both) if required.
Candidates will be required to submit a portfolio comprising one substantial composition, which should be either an instrumental work in four movements or an extended song cycle. The tonal idiom should be appropriate to a period and place in Europe between 1780 and 1900; the duration of the composition should be between twenty-five and thirty-five minutes. Candidates will be required to submit a recording of the composition on conventional instruments. The composition should be scored for a maximum of five performers (including a singer, in the case of a song cycle). The instruments are to be chosen from the following: flute, oboe, clarinet, bassoon, French horn, piano, violin, viola, cello, double bass. Melody instruments may be used either in a duo with piano or in an ensemble of at least three instruments; the piano may be used on its own.
Candidates will be required to submit a portfolio of three compositions. One should be a setting of words, and one should include fugal elements and/or incorporate the techniques of ground bass and/or chaconne. One piece should be for orchestra (with or without voices) or ensemble of no fewer than ten players. One piece should be no shorter than eight minutes in duration. Normal staff notation will usually be expected, but electro-acoustic submissions are also acceptable. In addition, each candidate must submit a recording of at least one of the three pieces.
Candidates will be required to submit two essays involving the use of analytical techniques, to a maximum total length of 8,000 words.
Candidates will be required to submit three projects involving the study of notations and of original source material, to a maximum total length of 6,000 words in addition to transcriptions.
The examination for this paper will consist of a test of performance.
The test of performance, which may take place before an audience consisting of staff, students, and others, including External and Internal Examiners, will consist of a recital of not more than twenty-three minutes’ playing time, on an instrument or in accompaniment of an instrument or of singing. Details of the complete programme must be sent to the Secretary of the Faculty Board for approval by the Faculty Board, so as to arrive not later than the fourth day of Full Lent Term next preceding the examination. Candidates must provide an accompanist or page turner (or both) if required. Candidates must provide the Examiners with two copies of each piece they are performing, in the edition being used. In addition candidates should provide the Examiners with two copies of a programme setting out the pieces in the order in which they are to be performed.
Candidates will be required to compose a fugue in not more than four parts from a choice of subjects.
1. The Music Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II.
2. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part Ia if he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after her or his first term of residence.
3. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ia of the Music Tripos or in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after her or his first term of residence.
4. A student who has obtained honours in Part Ib of the Music Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part II in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after her or his first term of residence.
5. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term. No student who has been a candidate for honours in any Part shall again be a candidate for honours in the same Part.
6. There shall be three separate bodies of Examiners, one for Part Ia, one for Part Ib, and one for Part II. The Faculty Board of Music shall nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient to conduct the examinations.
7. The Faculty Board shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any of the subjects of the Tripos. Assessors shall be responsible for setting the paper or papers or other tests in the subjects assigned to them, and shall present to the Examiners such written reports as the Examiners may require. Assessors may be summoned, for the purpose of consultation and advice, to meetings of the Examiners, but shall not be entitled to vote.
8. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part of the Tripos. In each list the names of the successful candidates shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in each of the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. In each class-list a mark of distinction may be awarded for special excellence.
9. The scheme of examination for Part Ia shall be:
Paper 1. |
Music and musicology today |
Paper 2. |
Music history 1 |
Paper 3. |
Music history 2 |
Paper 4. |
Introduction to music analysis |
Paper 5. |
Tonal skills 1 |
Paper 6. |
Tonal skills 2 |
Paper 1 will consist of a two-hour examination and the submission of an extended essay or equivalent exercise to be chosen from a specified list, or a composition in accordance with Regulation 17, or an instrumental or vocal recital in accordance with Regulation 18; each element will attract equal weighting. Papers 2–4 will each consist of a three-hour examination. Papers 5 and 6 will be examined through a three-hour examination (counting for two-thirds of the marks for Paper 5), a 28-hour takeaway paper (counting for one-third of the marks for each of Papers 5 and 6), and a practical examination comprising an aural test and keyboard test (each counting for one-third of the marks for Paper 6). A candidate for Part Ia shall offer all the papers for that Part.
10. The scheme of examination for Part Ib shall be:
Paper 1. |
Historical studies |
Paper 2. |
Music analysis |
Paper 3. |
Applied tonal skills |
Paper 4. |
Introduction to performance studies |
Paper 5. |
Composition portfolio |
Paper 6. |
Dissertation |
The Faculty Board shall have the power to prescribe, not later than the division of the Easter Term in the year next before the examination to which they apply, not more than six additional papers. Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, with the following exceptions:
11. A candidate for Part Ib shall offer six papers in all: Papers 1, 2, and 3; and three other papers. Subject to the approval of the Faculty Board, a candidate at Part Ib may be permitted by the Faculty Board to offer not more than one Part II paper.
12. The scheme of the examination for Part II shall be:
Paper 1. |
Analysis portfolio |
Paper 2. |
Composition portfolio |
Paper 3. |
Notation portfolio |
Paper 4. |
Advanced performance |
Paper 5. |
Dissertation |
The Faculty Board shall have the power to prescribe, not later than the division of the Easter Term in the year next before the examination to which they apply, not more than twelve additional papers. Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, with the following exceptions:
13. A candidate for Part II shall offer six papers in all. A candidate must offer a combination of papers that is examined by at least six hours of written examination. Subject to the approval of the Faculty Board, a candidate for Part II may be permitted by the Faculty Board to offer not more than one Part Ib paper.
14. A candidate who offers either Papers 3 or 5 in Part Ib, or Papers 1–3 in Part II, shall submit a portfolio to the Chair of Examiners so as to arrive not later than the following dates: for Paper 5 in Part Ib or Paper 2 in Part II, the fourth day of Full Easter Term in which the examination is held; for Paper 1 in Part II, the eleventh day of Full Easter Term in which the examination is held; for Paper 3 in Part Ib or Paper 3 in Part II, the fifteenth day of Full Easter Term in which the examination is held. The compositions, analyses, or transcriptions contained in such a portfolio shall be written by the candidate during the current academical year; each separate item shall be initialled by the teacher under whose direction it was written, as an indication that the teacher approves the submission. Candidates will be required to declare that the contents of the portfolio are their own work and that they do not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
15. (a) The examination for Paper 6 in Part Ib and Paper 5 in Part II shall consist of a dissertation on a musical subject of the candidate’s own choice approved by the Faculty Board which falls wholly or substantially outside the subject or subjects chosen by the candidate for any other papers. A candidate who wishes to offer such a dissertation shall submit the proposed title to the relevant Chair of Examiners so as to arrive not later than the division of Michaelmas Term preceding the examination.
(b) Each candidate must obtain the approval of the proposed subject by the Faculty Board not later than the division of the Lent Term.
(c) A dissertation for Part Ib shall be of not less than 5,000 words and not more than 7,000 words (excluding bibliography and appendices but including footnotes). A dissertation for Part II shall be of not less than 7,000 words and not more than 10,000 words (excluding bibliography and appendices but including footnotes). Dissertations shall be in typewritten form.
(d) Each candidate shall submit an electronic copy and two hard (paper) copies of her or his dissertation to the appropriate Chair of Examiners so as to arrive not later than the eighth day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
16. Each candidate will be required to sign a declaration indicating that the work submitted for Paper 1 in Part Ia, Papers 3–6 in Part Ib, or Papers 1–3 or 5 in Part II, is her or his own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
17. A candidate who offers Paper 1 in Part Ia, or Paper 4 in Part Ib, shall submit the following materials to the Chair of Examiners so as to arrive not later than the following dates: for Paper 1 in Part Ia, an essay, extended exercise or composition by the fourth day of Full Easter Term in which the examination is held; for Paper 4 in Part Ib, an essay by the eleventh day of Full Easter Term in which the examination is held.
18. A candidate who offers the recital option of Paper 1 in Part Ia, the recital option of Paper 4 in Part Ib, or Paper 4 in Part II shall give a recital of a length specified by Faculty Board. Each candidate must obtain the approval of the proposed programme by the Teaching Committee of the Faculty Board not later than the end of Michaelmas Term (for Parts Ia and Ib) or the division of the Lent Term (for Part II).
19. For the purpose of drawing up the class-list the Examiners for Part II shall have the power to call a candidate for interview on matters arising from the examination, but they shall take account of such an interview only if it would be to the candidate’s advantage.
20. The Faculty Board may issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining all or any of the subjects of the examination, and may modify or alter such supplementary regulations as occasion may require, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any alteration.
21. The Board shall notify candidates of the work or works prescribed for Paper 4 of Part Ia not later than the first day of Full Michaelmas Term preceding the examination, and for Paper 2 of Part Ib not less than two weeks before the start of the examination by written papers.
22. The examination for the Music Tripos shall be held under the new regulations for the first time
for Part Ia in 2013
for Part Ib in 2014
for Part II in 2015
1. The Natural Sciences Tripos shall consist of four Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, Part II, and Part III.
2. The following may present themselves as a candidate for honours in Part Ia:
3. A student who has obtained honours in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part Ib in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that the student has kept four terms and that six complete terms have not passed after her or his first term of residence.143
4. A student who not earlier than the fourth term after her or his first term of residence has obtained honours in an Honours Examination other than Part Ia of the Natural Sciences Tripos or Part Ia of the Medical and Veterinary Sciences Tripos, may be a candidate for honours in Part II after so obtaining honours144; provided that the student has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after her or his first term of residence.1
A student who, under arrangements approved by the Committee of Management for the Natural Sciences Tripos, has spent not less than three terms studying at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and has been certified by the President of the Institute after consultation with the Chair of Examiners for Part II of the Natural Sciences Tripos to have studied diligently during that period, shall be deemed thereby to have obtained honours in that Part of the Tripos. A list containing the names of persons so qualified shall be certified by the Chair of the Committee of Management and published in the Reporter.
5. The following may present themselves as a candidate for honours in Part III, provided that he or she has not proceeded to the B.A. Degree:
6. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
7. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
8. The Committee of Management for the Natural Sciences Tripos in consultation with the Faculty Board or comparable authority concerned shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of the examination. Due care shall be taken that sufficient notice is given of any alteration of such supplementary regulations.
9. Faculty Boards or comparable authorities shall be identified as nominating bodies, as specified below, and shall be responsible for nominating a Senior Examiner and such number of Examiners and Assessors as they may deem sufficient. An Examiner may be appointed to examine in more than one Part of the Tripos in any year.
Nominating bodies |
Subjects |
Part Ia |
|
Faculty Board of Biology |
Biology of Cells Elementary Mathematics for Biologists Evolution and Behaviour Physiology of Organisms Mathematical Biology |
Faculty Board of Earth Sciences and Geography |
Earth Sciences |
Faculty Board of Mathematics |
Mathematics |
Faculty Board of Physics and Chemistry |
Chemistry Physics |
Faculty Board of Physics and Chemistry |
Materials Science |
Faculty Board of Biology |
Animal Biology Biochemistry and Molecular Biology Cell and Developmental Biology Ecology Experimental Psychology Neurobiology Pathology Pharmacology Physiology Plant and Microbial Sciences |
Faculty Board of Earth Sciences and Geography |
[Geological Sciences A] 〈Earth Sciences A〉146 [Geological Sciences B] 〈Earth Sciences B〉146 |
Board of History and Philosophy of Science |
History and Philosophy of Science |
Faculty Board of Mathematics |
Mathematics |
Faculty Board of Physics and Chemistry |
Chemistry A Chemistry B Materials Science Physics A Physics B |
Faculty Board of Biology |
Biochemistry Biological and Biomedical Sciences Genetics |
|
Neuroscience |
|
Pathology |
|
Pharmacology |
|
Physiology, Development, and Neuroscience |
|
Physiology and Psychology |
|
Plant Sciences Psychology Zoology |
Faculty Board of Earth Sciences and Geography |
[Geological Sciences] 〈Earth Sciences〉146 |
Board of History and Philosophy of Science |
History and Philosophy of Science |
Faculty Board of Physics and Chemistry |
Astrophysics |
|
Chemistry |
|
Materials Science |
|
Physics |
Faculty Boards of Earth Sciences and Geography, and Physics and Chemistry, jointly |
Physical Sciences
|
Faculty Board of Biology |
Biochemistry Systems Biology |
Faculty Board of Earth Sciences and Geography |
[Geological Sciences] 〈Earth Sciences〉147 |
Board of History and Philosophy of Science |
History and Philosophy of Science |
Faculty Board of Physics and Chemistry |
Astrophysics Chemistry Materials Science Physics |
10. There shall be three bodies of Examiners, one for Part Ia, one for Part Ib, and one for Part II and Part III. For each of the three bodies there shall be a Chair of Examiners, provided that the same person may be appointed Chair for two or more of the bodies. For each body there may also be one or more Assistant Chairs of Examiners. Chairs and Assistant Chairs of Examiners shall be appointed on the nomination of the Committee of Management for the Natural Sciences Tripos; nominations shall be made not later than the last day of Full Easter Term in the calendar year next preceding that in which the examination is to be held.
11. The Examiners in each subject shall be jointly responsible for all the questions set and for the marks awarded in that subject. At least two Examiners or one Examiner and one Assessor shall set and conduct every oral and practical examination.
12. The Examiners shall have regard to the style and method of candidates’ answers, and shall give credit for excellence in these respects.
13. The Assessors shall propose questions in the parts of the subjects assigned to them by the Examiners, shall look over the answers of the candidates to these questions, and shall report thereon to the Examiners. The Assessors may be required to assist the Examiners in setting and conducting every oral and practical examination. The Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
14. The Chairs of Examiners shall communicate the marks of all candidates to the Registrary.
15. The subjects of examination in Part Ia, which shall be divided into two groups, A and B, shall be as follows:
Group A |
||
|
Biology of Cells |
Evolution and Behaviour |
|
Chemistry |
Materials Science |
Computer Science148 |
Physics |
|
|
Earth Sciences |
Physiology of Organisms |
Group B |
||
|
Elementary Mathematics for Biologists Mathematics |
Mathematical Biology |
The maximum marks allocated to each subject shall be: |
||
|
Each subject in Group A |
100 |
|
Elementary Mathematics for Biologists |
70 |
|
Mathematics |
75 |
|
Mathematical Biology |
75 |
16. Each candidate shall offer three subjects from Group A and one subject from Group B providing that no candidate shall offer both Biology of Cells and Computer Science. A candidate taking the examination under the provisions of Regulation 2(b) shall not offer Biology of Cells, Evolution and Behaviour, or Physiology of Organisms, if he or she has previously obtained honours in the Medical and Veterinary Sciences Tripos.
17. (a) There shall be separate examinations set for each subject, as specified below:
(i) one written paper of three hours:
|
Chemistry |
Materials Science |
|
Computer Science148 |
Physics |
|
Elementary Mathematics for Biologists |
Mathematical Biology |
|
Evolution and Behaviour |
(ii) two written papers of three hours:
|
Mathematics |
(iii) one written paper of three hours and a practical examination:
|
Biology of Cells |
Physiology of Organisms |
Earth Sciences |
The practical examination (where such exists) may include a viva voce examination.
(b) In addition to the written and practical examinations, for all subjects except Biology of Cells and Physiology of Organisms, candidates shall be required to submit records of practical work and/or fieldwork for each subject. Such records shall be presented for inspection on the request of the Examiners as follows: in Computer Science, on a date or dates announced by the Head of the Computer Laboratory no later than the division of Michaelmas Term; in Materials Science, on a date or dates announced by the Head of the Department of Materials Science and Metallurgy not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term; in Mathematics, on a date or dates to be announced by the Examiners not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term; in other subjects, on the day after the last written examination in that subject. The records shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed.
(c) In assigning marks for the examination in Earth Sciences, the Examiners may, at their discretion, take account of the note-books submitted by candidates. In assigning marks for the examination in all other subjects, except Biology of Cells and Physiology of Organisms, the Examiners shall take account of the records of practical work and/or fieldwork submitted by candidates. Assessment shall be undertaken by the Examiners or, for the following subjects, be provided to the Examiners from the following persons:
Subject |
Provider of assessment |
Chemistry |
Head of the Department of Chemistry |
Computer Science |
Head of the Computer Laboratory |
Elementary Mathematics for Biologists |
Chair of the Faculty Board of Biology |
Evolution and Behaviour |
Chair of the Faculty Board of Biology |
Materials Science |
Head of the Department of Materials Science and Metallurgy |
Physics |
Head of the Department of Physics |
Mathematical Biology |
Chair of the Faculty Board of Biology |
18. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in Part Ia shall be arranged in three classes. The names in each class shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
19. In arranging the class-list the Examiners shall take into account the absolute number of aggregate marks obtained and may further take into account the standard obtained by candidates in each subject.149
20. The subjects of examination in Part Ib shall be as follows:
Animal Biology |
Materials Science |
|
Biochemistry and Molecular Biology |
Mathematics |
|
Cell and Developmental Biology |
Neurobiology |
|
Chemistry A |
Pathology |
|
Chemistry B |
Pharmacology |
|
Ecology |
Physics A |
|
Experimental Psychology |
Physics B |
|
[Geological Sciences A] 〈Earth Sciences A〉150 |
Physiology |
|
Geological Sciences B] 〈Earth Sciences B〉150 |
Plant and Microbial Sciences |
|
History and Philosophy of Science |
21. Each candidate shall offer three subjects, provided that:
22. No candidate shall offer Mathematics if he or she has previously obtained honours in Part Ib of the Mathematical Tripos, or unless he or she:
23. (a) There shall be separate examinations set for each subject, as specified below:
(i) two written papers of three hours:
|
*Animal Biology |
*Materials Science |
|
*Chemistry A |
*Mathematics |
|
*Chemistry B |
*Physics A |
|
*Ecology |
*Physics B |
*History and Philosophy of Science |
(ii) two written papers, one of two hours and one of three hours and a practical examination:
|
Physiology |
|
(iii) two written papers of three hours and a practical examination:
|
Biochemistry and Molecular Biology |
*[Geological Sciences A] 〈Earth Sciences A〉150 |
|
Cell and Developmental Biology |
*[Geological Sciences B] 〈Earth Sciences B〉150 |
|
*Experimental Psychology |
*Plant and Microbial Sciences |
(iv) two written papers, one of one hour and one of three hours, and a practical examination:
|
Neurobiology |
*Pharmacology |
(v) two written papers, one of one and a half hours and one of three hours, and a practical examination:
|
Pathology |
The practical examination (where such exists) shall be as follows: in Plant and Microbial Sciences it shall be of one and a half hours' duration; in Physiology it shall be of one hour and twenty minutes' duration; in Experimental Psychology and Neurobiology, it shall be of one and a half hours’ duration; in [Geological Sciences A and Geological Sciences B] 〈Earth Sciences A and Earth Sciences B〉150, it shall be in two parts, one of three hours’ duration and one of one and a half hours’ duration; in all other subjects, it shall be of three hours’ duration.
(b) A candidate who offers one or more of the subjects marked with an asterisk shall, in addition to the written and practical examinations, be required to submit records of practical work and/or fieldwork for each subject. Such records shall be presented for the inspection of the Examiners on a date or dates to be announced by the Head of the Department concerned; they shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was carried out.
(c) In assigning marks for the examinations in [Geological Sciences A and Geological Sciences B] 〈Earth Sciences A and Earth Sciences B〉150, the Examiners may, at their discretion, take account of the records of practical work and/or fieldwork (where such exist) submitted by candidates. In assigning marks for the examination in all other subjects, the Examiners shall take account of the records submitted by candidates (where such exist). Assessment shall be undertaken by the Examiners or, for the following subjects, be provided to the Examiners from the following persons:
|
Subject |
Provider of assessment |
|
Animal Biology |
Head of the Department of Zoology |
|
Chemistry A |
Head of the Department of Chemistry |
|
Chemistry B |
Head of the Department of Chemistry |
|
Experimental Psychology |
Head of the Department of Psychology |
|
Materials Science |
Head of the Department of Materials Science and Metallurgy |
|
Physics A |
Head of the Department of Physics |
Physics B |
Head of the Department of Physics |
24. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in Part Ib shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
25. In arranging the class-list the Examiners may take into account the standard attained by candidates in each subject as well as the aggregate of marks obtained by them.
26. The subjects of examination in Part II shall be as follows:
|
Astrophysics |
Pathology |
|
Biochemistry |
Pharmacology |
|
Biological and Biomedical Sciences |
Physical Sciences |
|
Chemistry |
Physics |
|
Genetics |
Physiology, Development, and Neuroscience |
|
Geological Sciences 〈Earth Sciences〉150 |
Physiology and Psychology |
|
History and Philosophy of Science |
Plant Sciences |
|
Materials Science |
Psychology |
|
Neuroscience |
Zoology |
27. Each candidate for Part II shall offer one of these subjects, and shall satisfy the requirements set out in Regulation 30 for the subject offered.
28. Each candidate submitting a dissertation, essay, critical review, thesis, project report, or similar exercise under Regulation 30 shall be required to sign a declaration that the exercise submitted is her or his own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose; if two or more candidates have undertaken work in collaboration, they shall each be required to indicate the extent of their contribution. The Examiners shall have power if they consider that a piece of work submitted for the examination is not sufficiently legible, to require that it be resubmitted in typescript.
29. For each subject in Part II the Examiners may, at their discretion, examine a candidate viva voce.
30. Examination requirements for the particular subjects shall be as follows:
The practical, project, or other work and their examination requirements shall be prescribed from time to time by the Director of the Institute of Astronomy, and shall be carried out in accordance with instructions which shall be announced not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. As an indication of good faith, each candidate shall submit, with the records of her or his work, a declaration that these instructions have been observed. The records of practical, project, or other work shall be submitted to the Director of the Institute of Astronomy not later than a date announced by the Director not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
The Examiners shall be provided by the Director with assessments of the work submitted by the candidates, and shall take account of this work in drawing up the class-list.
The essay shall be on a subject chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department of Biochemistry not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. The essay shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the eighth day of Full Lent Term.
The thesis shall give an account of an investigation undertaken by the candidate, the subject of which shall be chosen by the candidate in consultation with staff of the Department of Biochemistry. Each candidate shall inform the Head of the Department of Biochemistry of the subject chosen before the end of Full Michaelmas Term. The thesis shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the ninth day of Full Easter Term.
In assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of candidates’ essays and theses.
The Major and Minor Subjects and their examination requirements shall be announced by the Faculty Board of Biology not later than the division of the Lent Term in the year next preceding the examination. When giving notice of the Subjects to be offered, the Faculty Board of Biology shall have power, in consultation with the Board of Examinations, to announce restrictions on the combinations of subjects that any candidate may offer in the examination.
The subject of the dissertation shall be on a topic related to either the Major or Minor Subject offered by the candidate. The subject shall be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Chair of the Faculty Board of Biology, or chosen by the candidate from a list of subjects announced by the Chair of the Faculty Board. Each candidate shall obtain the approval for her or his subject not later than the division of Michaelmas Term. Dissertations shall be prepared in accordance with guidelines which shall be issued by the Faculty Board of Biology not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. The dissertation shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the first Friday of Full Easter Term.
The types of further work and their examination requirements shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Chemistry not later than the division of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. The records of further work shall be submitted to the Head of the Department not later than the first Monday of Full Easter Term and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the work submitted by candidates, and shall take these assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
In drawing up the class-list the Examiners shall take account of the standard attained by a candidate in each part of the examination as well as the aggregate of marks obtained.
At the discretion of the Examiners a candidate may be called for a viva voce examination on the candidate’s project work and on general aspects of the Earth Sciences.
The practical work and examination requirements associated with each course shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term.
The report of a research project shall be on a subject which may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department by the beginning of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list not later than 30 June in the year next preceding the examination. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the second day of Full Lent Term.
The records of classwork and fieldwork shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the last day of the written examinations and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The types of classwork and fieldwork shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term.〉151
The subject of the essay shall be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Examiners, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Examiners. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Examiners for the subject proposed or notify the Examiners of the subject chosen from the list not later than the end of Full Michaelmas Term. The essay shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the first day of Full Lent Term and shall contain a critical review of an area of genetics or related to genetics.
The subject of the thesis shall be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Examiners, or chosen by the candidate, subject to the approval of the Examiners, from a list of subjects announced by the Examiners. Each candidate shall obtain the approval of the Examiners for her or his subject not later than the end of Full Michaelmas Term. The thesis shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the seventh day after the last day of Full Lent Term.
In assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of the submitted essay and thesis.
The practical work and examination requirements associated with each paper shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the continually assessed practicals; in assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of the assessments.
The report of a research project shall be on a subject which may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department by the beginning of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list not later than 30 June in the year next preceding the examination. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the second day of Full Lent Term.
The records of classwork and fieldwork shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the last day of the written examinations and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The types of classwork and fieldwork shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term.]151
A candidate who chooses option (A) shall offer
A candidate who chooses option (B) shall offer
The written papers shall be chosen from a list published by the Board of History and Philosophy of Science not later than the end of Full Easter Term in the year preceding the examination.
The two essays shall each be on a source chosen from a list of prescribed sources which shall be published by the Board of History and Philosophy of Science not later than the end of Full Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. A candidate shall obtain the approval of the Board for the subjects proposed for the essays not later than the last day of Full Michaelmas Term. The essays shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the division of the Lent Term.
The dissertation shall be on a topic proposed by the candidate and approved by the Board of History and Philosophy of Science not later than the division of the Lent Term. The dissertation shall show evidence of reading, judgement, criticism, and power of exposition, and shall give full references to sources used. The dissertation shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the first Monday of Full Easter Term.
The further work and its examination requirements and submission arrangements shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Materials Science and Metallurgy not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term and shall comprise course-work and practical work. Records of further work shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed.
The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the work submitted by candidates, and shall take the assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
The critical review shall be on a published scientific paper chosen from a list of papers announced by the Chair of the Faculty Board of Biology not later than the second Friday of Full Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall notify the Chair of the paper that he or she has chosen for review not later than the end of Full Michaelmas Term. The review shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the second Friday of Full Lent Term.
The report of a research project shall be on a subject either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Chair of the Faculty Board of Biology, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Chair, not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Chair for the subject proposed, or notify the Chair of the subject chosen from the list, not later than the end of Full Michaelmas Term. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the fifth day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
During Full Easter Term, on a day specified by the Chair of the Faculty Board of Biology, each candidate shall be required to give a brief oral presentation of her or his project to an audience consisting of staff and students and including internal Examiners.
In assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of the candidates’ research projects (both the report and the presentation).
The project report shall be on a subject either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Pathology, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed, or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list, not later than the second Friday of Full Michaelmas Term. The report or essay shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the end of Full Lent Term, in a format specified by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term.
The report of the research project shall be on a subject chosen from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department of Pharmacology not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list not later than the end of Full Michaelmas Term. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the tenth day of Full Easter Term.
During the second or third week of Full Easter Term, each candidate is required to give a brief oral communication to an audience consisting of staff and students of the Department and including the internal Examiners.
In assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of the written and oral reports of the research projects.
(i) The examination requirements for Half Subject Chemistry shall consist of three written papers, each of one and a half hours’ duration, and the submission of note-books of further work. The types of further work and their examination requirements shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Chemistry not later than the division of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. The records of further work shall be submitted to the Head of the Department not later than the first Monday of Full Easter Term and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the work submitted by candidates, and shall take these assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
Half Subject Chemistry may not be offered unless the candidate has previously offered either Chemistry A or Chemistry B in Part Ib of the Tripos.
(ii) The examination requirements for Half Subject Physics shall consist of:
Each paper shall be of two hours’ duration.
The types of further work and their examination requirements shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Physics not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. Records of further work shall be submitted to the Head of the Department not later than the fourth Monday of Full Easter Term and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the work submitted by candidates, and shall take these assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
Half Subject Physics may not be offered unless the candidate has previously offered Physics A or Physics B in Part Ib of the Tripos.
(iii) The examination requirements for Half Subject [Geological Sciences] 〈Earth Sciences〉153 shall consist of:
The practical work and examination requirements associated with each paper shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the continually assessed practicals; in assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of the assessments.
The records of classwork and fieldwork shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the last day of the written examinations and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The types of classwork and fieldwork shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term.
Half Subject [Geological Sciences] 〈Earth Sciences〉153 may not be offered unless the candidate has previously offered either [Geological Sciences A or Geological Sciences B] 〈Earth Sciences A or Earth Sciences B〉154 in Part Ib of the Tripos.
Each paper shall be of two hours’ duration.
The types of further work and their examination requirements shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Physics not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. The records of further work shall be submitted to the Head of the Department not later than the fourth Monday of Full Easter Term and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the work submitted by candidates, and shall take these assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
If a candidate offers four papers in (b) the Examiners will take into account the three components which they judge to be the best.
If a candidate offers more than three units of further work in (c) the Examiners will take into account the three components which they judge to be the best.
In drawing up the class-list the Examiners shall take account of the standard attained by a candidate in each part of the examination as well as the aggregate of marks obtained.
The report of a research project shall be on a subject which may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Physiology, Development, and Neuroscience or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department not later than the end of the Easter Term in the year preceding the examination. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of Department for the subject proposed, or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list, not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the third day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
A candidate who offers a project in the field of Physiology shall submit a report on a subject which may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Physiology, Development, and Neuroscience or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department by the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list not later than the end of the Michaelmas Term. The two copies of the report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the third day of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
A candidate who offers a project in the field of Psychology shall submit a report on a subject chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department of Psychology by the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject chosen from the list not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. The two copies of the report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the tenth day of Full Easter Term.
The essay shall be on a subject chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department of Plant Sciences and shall be submitted to the Examiners. The dates of announcement of subjects and submission of essays shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the second Friday of Full Michaelmas Term.
The report of a research subject shall be on a subject chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department of Plant Sciences and shall be submitted to the Examiners. The dates of announcement of subjects and submission of essays shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the second Friday of Full Michaelmas Term.
The title of the dissertation shall be on a subject chosen by the candidate and approved by the Senior Examiner not later than the end of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. Two copies of the original dissertation, if it is offered, shall be submitted to the Senior Examiner not later than the fifth Monday of Full Lent Term.
The report of a research project shall be on a subject either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of Department of Psychology or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department at the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject chosen not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the tenth day of Full Easter Term.
If a candidate offers four papers and a dissertation, the Examiners shall assess her or his performance on (i) Paper 1 and (ii) three of the following: Papers 2, 3, 4, or the dissertation, discounting the one component out of the four in which they judge the candidate’s work to be least good, providing that no component out of Papers 2, 3, or 4 shall be discounted if it is not of at least second-class standard.
The critical review shall be on a subject chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department of Zoology not later than the end of the first quarter of the Michaelmas Term. The critical review shall be submitted to the Examiners on a date which the Head of the Department shall announce not later than the end of the first quarter of the Michaelmas Term.
The records of project work, or practical work, or both may be either chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department of Zoology not later than the end of the first quarter of the Michaelmas Term, or proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department by not later than the end of the first quarter of the Michaelmas Term. The records shall be submitted to the Examiners on the first day of the written examination and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed.
The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department of Zoology with assessments of the work submitted by candidates under (c) and (d), and shall take the assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
31. For each subject in Part II there shall be published a separate class-list, which shall be signed by the Examiners in that subject, provided that the class-list for the subject Physiology and Psychology shall be signed by the Examiners in both those subjects.
The names of the candidates who obtain honours in each subject or combination of subjects shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
32. The subjects of examination in Part III shall be as follows:
|
Astrophysics |
History and Philosophy of Science |
|
Biochemistry |
Materials Science |
|
Chemistry |
Physics |
[Geological Sciences] 〈Earth Sciences〉155 |
Systems Biology |
33. Every candidate for Part III shall offer one of these subjects, and shall satisfy the requirements set out in Regulation 36 for the subject offered. In addition to the requirements set out in Regulation 36, the Committee of Management for the Natural Sciences Tripos may authorize no more than ten additional interdisciplinary papers which shall be included in the examination requirements of one or more subjects. Public notice of the interdisciplinary papers shall be given not later than the end of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination, provided that the Committee of Management shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no candidate’s preparation for the examination is adversely affected. The Committee of Management shall have power:
34. Every candidate submitting a dissertation, essay, thesis, project report, or similar exercise under Regulation 36 shall be required to sign a declaration that the exercise submitted is her or his own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose; if two or more candidates have undertaken work in collaboration, they shall each be required to indicate the extent of their contribution. The Examiners shall have power if they consider that a piece of work submitted for the examination is not sufficiently legible, to require that it be resubmitted in typescript.
35. For each subject in Part III the Examiners may, at their discretion, examine a candidate viva voce.
36. Examination requirements for the particular subjects shall be as follows:
The number of written papers to be set and the subject and duration of each paper shall be announced by the Director of the Institute of Astronomy not later than 1 November next preceding the examination.
The subject of the research project shall be chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Director of the Institute of Astronomy not later than the end of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. Each candidate shall notify the Director of the subject chosen from the list not later than the second Friday of Full Michaelmas Term. The report of a research project shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the second Monday of Full Easter Term.
The subject of the research project may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Biochemistry, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects, which shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the end of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed, or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list, not later than 31 August next preceding the examination. The report of a research project shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the ninth day of Full Easter Term.
In assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of candidates’ research reports.
The subject of the research project may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Chemistry, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department not later than the division of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed, or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list, not later than the end of the Full Easter Term in the academical year preceding the examination. The report of a research project shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department not later than the Friday following the last day of Full Lent Term.
In assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of the written reports of the research projects.
At the discretion of the Examiners a candidate may be called for a viva voce examination on the candidate’s project work and on general aspects of the Earth Sciences.
The examination requirements and any practical work associated with each paper shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences with assessments of any assessed practicals; in assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of the assessments.
The report of a research project shall be on a subject which may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department by the beginning of the Lent Term in the year next preceding the examination. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list not later than the division of the Lent Term next preceding the examination. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the first Friday of Full Lent Term.
The records of classwork and fieldwork shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the last day of the written examinations and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The types of classwork and fieldwork shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term.〉156
The practical work and examination requirements associated with each paper shall be announced by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term. The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences with assessments of the continually assessed practicals; in assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of the assessments.
The report of a research project shall be on a subject which may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department by the beginning of the Lent Term in the year next preceding the examination. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list not later than the division of the Lent Term next preceding the examination. The report shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the first Friday of Full Lent Term.
The records of classwork and fieldwork shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department of Earth Sciences not later than the last day of the written examinations and shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed. The types of classwork and fieldwork shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term.]156
All pieces of work must be approved by the Board of History and Philosophy of Science.
The literature review shall be submitted on the last day of Michaelmas Full Term. The list of short essay titles, from which candidates will choose two titles from eight, shall be issued by the Head of the Department of History and Philosophy of Science shortly after the division of Lent Term and students will have one week in which to prepare the two essays for submission to the Examiners. The title of each candidate’s research paper, which must be on a different topic from all other pieces of work, shall be approved by the Board of History and Philosophy of Science at its meeting in the second half of Lent Term. The research paper shall be submitted on the last day of Lent Full Term. The title of the dissertation and supervisor shall be approved by the Board of History and Philosophy of Science at its meeting in the second half of Lent Term. The dissertation shall be submitted at the beginning of the final week of Easter Full Term.
The subject of the research project may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Materials Science and Metallurgy, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department not later than the end of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed, or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list, not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term.
Details of the course-work and other exercises and their examination requirements shall be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the beginning of Michaelmas Term. The records of course-work and associated exercises shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of the Department on a date to be announced by the Head of the Department not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term.
The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department with assessments of the course-work and other exercises, and shall take the assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
The Head of the Department of Physics shall announce not less than five major topics and ten minor topics, and the types of further work for the examination, including the form of assessment for each topic or piece of further work, not later than the beginning of the Michaelmas Term.
Records of further work shall be submitted to the Examiners through the Head of Department not later than the fifth Monday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held: they shall bear the signatures of the teachers under whose direction the work was performed.
The report of a project undertaken in the Long Vacation, if it is offered, shall be submitted not later than the first Monday of Full Michaelmas Term. Such a project shall be on a subject proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Physics; candidates shall submit proposals to the Head of the Department during the preceding Easter Term, and shall obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed not later than the last day of that term.
The subject of the research project may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Head of the Department of Physics, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects announced by the Head of the Department not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Head of the Department for the subject proposed, or notify the Head of the Department of the subject chosen from the list, not later than the end of Full Michaelmas Term. The report of a research project shall be submitted to the Head of the Department not later than the third Monday of Full Easter Term.
The Examiners shall be provided by the Head of the Department of Physics with assessments of the reports or further work submitted by candidates under (b) and (c), and shall take the assessments into account in assigning marks for the examination.
The subject of the research project may be either proposed by the candidate and approved by the Chair of the Course Management Committee, or chosen by the candidate from a list of approved subjects, which shall be announced by the Chair of the Course Management Committee not later than the end of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination.
Each candidate shall either obtain the approval of the Chair of the Course Management Committee for the subject proposed, or notify the Chair of the Course Management Committee of the subject chosen from the list, not later than the first Friday of Full Michaelmas Term. The report of a research project shall be submitted to the Examiners not later than the ninth day of Full Easter Term.
In assigning marks for the examination the Examiners shall take account of project reports.
37. For each subject in Part III there shall be published a separate class-list, which shall be signed by the Examiners in that subject. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in each subject shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. In arranging the class-list the Examiners for the subject Chemistry in Part III shall take into account the candidate's performance in Part II, where that candidate has been classed in that examination.
Unless otherwise stated, the written papers and practical examinations in a subject shall cover all aspects of the course.
This paper is appropriate for candidates who do not have an advanced qualification in Mathematics before entry to the University.
All candidates will offer Paper 1. Paper 2A is to be offered by candidates not offering Mathematics in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos. Paper 2B is to be taken by candidates offering Mathematics in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos.
The maximum marks allocated to each component shall be as follows:
Major Subject |
65 |
Minor Subject |
15 |
Dissertation |
20 |
All candidates shall offer Paper 2 and Paper 3. Candidates who have previously offered Chemistry A and Chemistry B in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos shall also offer Paper 1A and Paper 4A; candidates who have previously offered only one out of Chemistry A and Chemistry B in that examination shall also offer either Paper 1A and Paper 4A or Paper 1B and Paper 4B.
The papers set for the Half Subjects shall either be those set for the Part II subject of the same name, or contain a subset of questions from those papers. The maximum marks allocated to each component shall be as follows:
Half Subject |
60 |
Part Ib Subject |
25 |
Dissertation |
15 |
Candidates will offer two psychology papers from Papers 2, 3, and 4, taken by candidates offering the subject Psychology Option A (Psychology).
The examination shall comprise two alternative options, (A) and (B). Option (A) is for students wishing to obtain accreditation with the British Psychological Society, and will be known as Psychology (Psychology); option (B) is for students who do not require accreditation with the Society, and will be known as Psychology (Cognitive Neuroscience).
1. The Philosophy Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part Ia, Part Ib, and Part II. A separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they may deem sufficient to examine in each Part of the Tripos. The Faculty Board may also nominate one or more Assessors for each Part of the Tripos. Assessors shall be responsible for setting the questions in the subjects assigned to them by the Examiners, and for advising the Examiners on the performance of candidates in those questions. An Assessor may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
3. The questions proposed for each Part by each Examiner or Assessor for that Part shall be submitted to and approved by the Examiners for that Part collectively; and the answers to each question shall be examined, as far as possible, by two at least of the Examiners or Assessors. The Examiners and Assessors shall take account of the style and method of the candidates’ answers and shall give credit for excellence in these respects.
4. The papers for Part Ia shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
Metaphysics |
Paper 2. |
Ethics and political philosophy |
Paper 3. |
Logic157 |
Paper 4. |
Set texts |
Paper 5. |
General paper |
Every candidate shall offer Papers 1–5.
5. (a) The papers for Part Ib shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
Metaphysics and epistemology |
Paper 2. |
Logic |
Paper 3. |
Ethics |
Paper 4. |
Greek and Roman philosophy (Paper 8 of Part Ib of the Classical Tripos) |
Paper 5. |
Early modern philosophy |
Paper 6. |
Philosophy of science |
Paper 7. |
Political philosophy |
Paper 8. |
Experimental psychology (the subject Experimental Psychology in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos) |
Paper 9. |
General paper |
(b) Subject to the provision of sub-paragraphs (c) and (d) of this regulation, a candidate for Part Ib shall offer papers as follows:
The weighting of Paper 8, for those who offer it, shall be double that of other papers.
(c) No candidate who has previously offered Experimental psychology in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos shall offer Paper 8.
(d) In place of any one of the Papers 1–3, and 5–7 a candidate may submit two essays, each of not less than 3,000 words and not more than 4,000 words in length, including footnotes and appendices but excluding bibliography, on two topics approved by the Chair of Examiners, which shall both fall within the syllabus of that paper; provided that a candidate who chooses to submit essays under the provisions of this sub-paragraph shall not write in Paper 9 an essay on a subject that overlaps significantly with either of the submitted essays.
6. The papers for Part II shall be as follows:
Paper 1. |
Metaphysics |
Paper 2. |
Philosophy of mind (also serves as Paper O5 of Part II of the Classical Tripos) |
Paper 3. |
Ethics |
Paper 4. |
European philosophy from Kant |
Paper 5. |
Philosophy in the Long Middle Ages158 |
Paper 6. |
Philosophy of science |
Paper 7. |
Mathematical logic |
Paper 8. |
Philosophical logic |
Paper 9. |
Special subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time |
Paper 10. |
Political philosophy |
Paper 11. |
Aesthetics159 |
Paper 12. |
General paper |
7. Except as provided in Regulation 8 below, a candidate for Part II shall offer papers as follows:
provided that a candidate who has previously obtained honours in Part II of the Classical Tripos or Part IIb of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos shall not offer any paper that he or she offered in that examination.
provided that a candidate who has previously obtained honours in Part II of the Classical Tripos or Part IIb of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos shall not offer any paper that he or she offered in that examination.
8. In place of any one of Papers 1–11 and the papers from the Classical Tripos specified in the Schedule to these regulations, a candidate for Part II of the Philosophy Tripos may submit two essays, each of not less than 3,000 words and not more than 4,000 words in length, including footnotes and appendices but excluding bibliography, on two topics approved by the Chair of Examiners, which shall both fall within the syllabus of that paper, provided that
9. (a) A candidate for Part Ib who chooses to offer two submitted essays under the provisions of Regulation 5(d), or a candidate for Part II who chooses to offer a dissertation under the provisions of Regulation 7 and/or two submitted essays under the provisions of Regulation 8 shall submit the proposed title of the dissertation or the proposed titles of the essays, together with a statement of the papers to be offered in the examination, and in the case of essays a statement of the paper which they are intended to replace, to the Chair of Examiners so as to arrive not later than two weeks before the last day of Full Michaelmas Term. A candidate must obtain the approval of the Chair of Examiners for the proposed title or titles not later than the last day of Full Michaelmas Term.
(b) Essays shall be submitted to the Chair of Examiners, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Faculty Board, so as to arrive not later than the last day of the Lent Term next preceding the examination.
(c) Dissertations shall be submitted to the Chair of Examiners, in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Faculty Board, so as to arrive not later than the second Friday of the Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
(d) Every candidate submitting a dissertation or a pair of essays will be required to sign a declaration that the work submitted is her or his own work, unaided except as may be specified in the declaration, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. The Examiners shall have power to examine any candidate viva voce on the dissertation or the essays.
(e) A dissertation, which shall be on a topic of philosophical interest approved by the Chair of Examiners, shall be of not more than 8,000 words and (except with the permission of the Chair of Examiners) not less than 6,000 words in length, including footnotes and appendices but excluding bibliography.
10. The Faculty Board shall have power to publish supplementary regulations for the topics included in the several subjects before mentioned, and to issue a list of books in relation to which questions shall be set. They shall also have power to modify or alter the supplementary regulations and the list from time to time as they see fit, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any change. Public notice of all the variable subjects and texts prescribed for special study shall be given by the Faculty Board before the end of the Easter Term in the year next preceding the examination to which they apply; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
11. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part Ia if at the time of the examination he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
12. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part Ib:
13. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part II:
14. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part in the same year. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
15. In each Part, the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. Each class-list may show, by some convenient mark, whether a candidate has passed with special distinction.
Papers from other Triposes that may be taken in Part II
A candidate for Part II of the Philosophy Tripos may take one or two of the following papers:
Classical Tripos, Part II Group B (Philosophy) |
|
B1. |
Plato |
B2. |
Aristotle |
B3. |
A prescribed subject or period in Greek and Roman philosophy |
Theological and Religious Studies Tripos, Part IIb Group C |
|
C11. |
Metaphysics |
1. The Politics, Psychology, and Sociology Tripos (Social and Political Sciences Tripos)161 shall consist of three Parts: Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb. A separate class-list shall be published for each Part.
2. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part I if at the time of the examination he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after the student's first term of residence.
3. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part IIa;
4. A student who has obtained honours in any other Honours Examination other than Part I of the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology (Social and Political Sciences) Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that the student has kept seven terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.160
5. No student shall be a candidate for any Part and also for another Honours Examination in the same term.
6. No student shall be a candidate for any Part on more than one occasion.
7. The Faculty Board of Human, Social, and Political Science shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of examination. Due care shall be taken that sufficient notice is given of any alteration of such supplementary regulations. The Faculty Board shall also have power to publish from time to time lists of books recommended to the candidates.
8. The Faculty Board shall give notice of any variable subjects for Parts IIa and IIb of the Tripos, before the division of the Easter Term of the year next but one preceding the examination concerned, provided that the Faculty Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for so doing and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
9. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they deem sufficient for each Part of the Tripos. The Faculty Board shall also have power to nominate one or more Assessors to assist the Examiners in any Part of the Tripos. The Assessors shall propose questions in the parts of the examination assigned to them by the Examiners, shall look over the answers of the candidates to these questions, and shall report thereon to the Examiners. The Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purposes of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
10. In each Part of the Tripos, the questions proposed by each Examiner and Assessor shall be submitted for approval to the whole body of Examiners.
11. A candidate shall not offer in any Part of the Tripos a paper that he or she has previously offered in another University examination.
12. The scheme of examination for Part I shall be as follows:
Section A
Paper 1. |
Analysis of politics I (also serves as Paper 4C of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos and as Paper 5(a) of Part IIa of the Economics Tripos) |
Paper 2. |
Introduction to sociology: modern societies I (also serves as Paper 4B of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos and as Paper 5(b) of Part IIa of the Economics Tripos) |
Paper 3. |
Introduction to psychology (also serves as Paper 4D of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos and as a paper in Part Ia of the Computer Science Tripos) |
Section B
Paper 4. |
Introduction to research methods and statistics for social scientists162 |
Paper 5. |
International relations I (also serves as Paper 5(c) of Part IIa of the Economics Tripos) |
Paper 6. |
The development of human society (Paper 1 of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos) |
Paper 7. |
Humans in biological perspective (Paper 2 of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos) |
Paper 8. |
Human societies: the comparative perspective (Paper 3 of Part I of the Archaeological and Anthropological Tripos) |
Paper 9. |
Computer Science 1: Introduction to computer science (Paper 1 of Part Ia of the Computer Science Tripos) |
Paper 10. |
British economic history (Paper 5 of Part I of the Economics Tripos) |
Paper 11. |
Language, communication, and literacy (Paper 2 of the preliminary examination for Part I of the Education Tripos) |
A candidate for Part I shall be required to offer four papers as follows:
13. The names of the candidates who obtain honours in Part I shall be placed by the Examiners in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order.
14. The scheme of examination for Parts IIa and IIb163 shall be as follows:
Pol. 1. |
The history of political thought to c. 1700 (Paper 19 of Part I of the Historical Tripos) |
Pol. 2. |
The history of political thought from c. 1700 to c. 1890 (Paper 20 of Part I of the Historical Tripos) |
Pol. 3. |
The analysis of modern politics II164 |
Pol. 4. |
The analysis of modern politics III |
Pol. 6. |
Political philosophy and the history of political thought since c. 1890 (Paper 5 of Part II of the Historical Tripos) |
Pol. 7. |
A subject in politics and international studies II |
Pol. 8. |
A subject in politics and international studies III |
Pol. 9. |
A subject in politics and international studies IV |
Pol. 10. |
A subject in politics and international studies VII165 |
Pol. 11. |
A subject in politics and international studies V166 |
Pol. 12. |
A subject in politics and international studies VI |
Pol. 13. |
Conceptual issues and texts in politics and international studies |
Pol. 14. |
The history of political thought to c. 1700165 |
Pol. 15. |
The history of political thought from c. 1700 to c. 1890 (Paper 4 of Part II of the Historical Tripos) |
Psy. 1. |
Social psychology164 |
Psy. 2. |
Experimental psychology (the subject Experimental Psychology in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos) |
Psy. 3. |
Biological and cognitive psychology |
Psy. 4. |
Development and psychopathology |
Psy. 5. |
A subject in psychology I167 |
Psy. 6. |
A subject in psychology II |
Psy. 7. |
A subject in psychology III |
Soc. 1. |
Social theory164 |
Soc. 2. |
Contemporary societies and global transformations164 |
Soc. 3. |
Concepts and arguments in sociology165 |
Soc. 4. |
A subject in sociology I |
Soc. 5. |
A subject in sociology II168 |
Soc. 6. |
A subject in sociology III |
Soc. 7. |
A subject in sociology IV168 |
Soc. 8. |
Disciplines of education III (Paper 3 of Part II of the Education Tripos) |
Soc. 9. |
A subject in sociology V |
Soc. 10. |
A subject in sociology VI |
Int. 1A. |
Inquiry and analysis I165 |
Int. 1B. |
Inquiry and analysis I165 |
Int. 2. |
Inquiry and analysis II |
Int. 3. |
An interdisciplinary subject I |
Int. 4. |
An interdisciplinary subject II |
Int. 5. |
An interdisciplinary subject III167 |
Int. 6. |
Criminology, sentencing, and the penal system (Paper 23 of the Law Tripos) |
Int. 7. |
Society, politics, and culture in Latin America167, 168, 169 |
Int. 8. |
A specified subject in South Asian Studies168 |
Int. 9. |
An interdisciplinary subject IV168 |
Int. 10. |
An interdisciplinary subject V167 |
Not more than one subject shall be specified for each of Pol. 4, 7–9, 11, 12, Psy. 5–7, Soc. 4–7, 9, 10, and Int. 3–5, 9, 10.
15. (a) Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, except Psy. 2, Soc. 3, and Int. 1A and Int. 1B, provided that Pol. 7–9, 11, Soc. 4–7, 9, 10, and Int. 3–9 may be examined by an alternative mode of assessment, which shall consist of the submission of two essays, each of not more than 5,000 words. The examination for Soc. 3 shall consist of the submission of two essays, each of not more than 5,000 words. The examination for Int. 1A and Int. 1B shall consist of the submission of a research project, a statistical assignment, and one methodological essay.
(b) The Faculty Board shall publish by notice in each Department of the Faculty of Human, Social, and Political Science prescribed titles or subjects for essays by the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination concerned. The work to be undertaken for the research project shall be prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board.
(c) The essays, the statistical assignment, and the report of the research project, shall be submitted in printed or typewritten form to the Secretary of the Faculty Board as follows: essays for all papers except Int. 1A and Int. 1B (that is, Pol. 7–9, Pol. 11, Soc. 3–7, Soc. 9–10, Int. 3–9), one essay no later than the end of the first week of Full Lent Term, and one essay no later than the end of the first week of Full Easter Term; for Int. 1A and Int. 1B the statistical assignment shall be submitted before the division of the Lent Term, the methodological essay before the end of the Lent Term, and the report before the division of the Easter Term. Each essay, the assignment, and the report shall bear the candidate's examination number but not the candidate's name. Candidates may be called for viva voce examination in connection with their essays, statistical assignment, or research project.
16. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 11 a candidate for Part IIa shall offer one of the following options:
17. Subject to the provision of Regulation 11, a candidate for Part IIb who has taken option (a) in Part IIa shall offer:
A candidate who chooses any of Papers Pol. 7–9, 11, Soc. 4, 5, 7, 9, Int. 3–9 under (a) or (c) option (i), and who does not include Paper SOC5 from the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos among the papers offered, may offer two essays in place of one of those papers, in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 15.
18. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 11 a candidate for Part IIb who has taken option (b) in Part IIa shall offer:
Candidates may not offer extended essays in place of any of these papers.
19. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 11 a candidate for Part IIb who has taken option (c) in Part IIa shall offer:
A candidate who chooses any of Papers Soc. 4–7, 9, 10, Pol. 7, 8, 11, Int. 3–9 under (a) or (b) option (i) may offer two essays in place of one of those papers, in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 15.
20. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 11 a candidate for Part IIb who has taken option (d) in Part IIa shall offer:
A candidate who chooses any of Papers Soc. 4–7, 9, 10, Int. 3–9 under (a) or (b) option (i) may offer two essays in place of one of those papers, in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 15.
21. Subject to the provisions of Regulation 11 a candidate for Part IIb who has not previously obtained honours in Part IIa shall offer, with the approval of the Faculty Board, on application by the candidate's Tutor not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination, four papers chosen from the papers available in Part IIa and Part IIb; provided that a candidate who does not include Int. 1 among the papers chosen may offer two essays of not more than 5,000 words in place of one of Pol. 7–9, 11, Soc. 4–7, 9–10, Int. 3–9 in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 15. Candidates taking a paper from among Psy. 1–7 may substitute one Part II paper with Paper PBS2 from Part I of the Psychological and Behavioural Sciences Tripos, subject to the approval of the Faculty Board.
22. (a) A candidate who wishes to offer a dissertation under Regulations 17–20 shall submit an application, including the topic of the proposed dissertation, a brief account of its scope, and a statement of the scheme of papers to be offered in the examination. A candidate may not choose for the dissertation a topic in the same field as that of Pol. 1 or Pol. 2, or Pol. 14 or Pol. 15. Applications shall be submitted to the Secretary of the Faculty Board, in accordance with any instructions issued by the Faculty Board, so as to arrive not later than the second Friday of Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination.
(b) Each candidate must obtain the approval of the Faculty Board for the proposed topic not later than the last day of the Michaelmas Term. After the Faculty Board have approved a topic no substantial change may be made in it without the further approval of the Faculty Board.
(c) A dissertation shall contain full references to any sources used in its composition, and shall be of not less than 6,000 words and not more than 10,000 words in length, including footnotes and appendices but excluding any bibliography.
(d) A dissertation shall be submitted in printed or typewritten form to the Secretary of the Faculty Board not later than the end of the second week of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held. Each dissertation shall bear the candidate's examination number but not the candidate's name and shall be accompanied by a certificate signed by the candidate that it is his or her own original work, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
(e) The Examiners shall have power to examine a candidate viva voce on the subject of the dissertation and in the general field of knowledge within which it falls.
23. There shall be separate class-lists for Parts IIa and IIb of the Tripos. The names of the candidates in each class-list shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. In each class-list a mark of distinction may be attached to the name of any candidate whose work in the examination shows special merit.
24. Examinations for the Politics, Psychology, and Sociology (Social and Political Sciences) Tripos will be held for the last time as follows:
Part I in 2013
Part IIa in 2014
Part IIb in 2015
The course for this paper provides an introduction to some central questions about the nature of modern politics through an examination of a set of political thinkers and some consideration of their work in relation to a range of examples from practical politics.
An introduction, through the work of Marx, Weber, and Durkheim, to key concepts and theories in sociology. An examination of core institutions and characteristics of modern societies including power and the modern state; the rise of nationalism; citizenship and social welfare; culture and the media; class and inequality; gender and the family; globalization and social change.
The scope of social psychology. Methods and levels of analysis. Selected topics from the following:
The self in social context. Personality and personality traits. Nature-nurture issues in socialization. Cognitive and affective bases of social behaviour. Parent–child relationships. The family, marriage, and divorce. Gender and gender roles. Social interaction processes. Small group processes. Attitudes and ideologies. Learning about society. The social psychology of work. Social aspects of mental illness. Cross-cultural variations in perception, thinking, and social behaviour.
The course for this paper provides an introduction to the subject of International Relations, whose main focus is the nature of politics at the international level. It does so by focusing on the concept of the ‘international society’ of states, which refers to the set of institutions and common procedures generated over the last three and a half centuries in various attempts to manage co-existence, but which now includes many non-state actors and a number of different levels of interaction. The four principal themes of the course are: the historical evolution of the international system; the causes and consequences of war; the sources of such order as exists in international life; and the ethical dilemmas arising from the interaction of competing political systems.
This paper examines questions about ethics and world politics normatively and in a variety of concrete political contexts. The examination will be divided into two sections. Candidates will be required to answer two questions from the first section of the examination and one from the second.
The paper examines a range of issues, substantive and methodological, in comparative politics. A candidate will be required to take a two-hour written examination and to submit an essay of not more than 5,000 words. The examination will require the candidate to answer two questions, taking each question on a different region or case study. For the essay, a candidate will be required to select an option from a list of questions announced by the Faculty Board. The essay and the examination will each carry 50% of the mark for the paper.
Conceptual questions that arise in the study of modern politics. This paper is examined by two 5,000-word essays.
The course for this paper explores the central texts and key ideas of twentieth-century political thought, looking at both analytical concepts and historical context. It is divided into two parts, Section A covers historical topics organized around authors and their texts, and Section B which covers a variety of themes in contemporary political philosophy.
A subject in modern politics and international studies specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in modern politics and international studies specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in modern politics and international studies specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in modern politics and international studies specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in modern politics and international studies specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
General issues, theoretical, conceptual and practical, in modern politics.
The scope of this paper will include all those aspects of psychology which are relevant to an understanding of human social behaviour and its development. In any single year the paper will offer students the opportunity to study a number of individual and interpersonal processes from within this range (e.g. aggression, altruism, applied social psychology, attitudes, attribution theory, communication, conflict, conformity, co-operation, emotion, group processes, identity, impression formation, inter-group relations, interpersonal attraction, personality, prejudice, pro-social behaviour, relationships, social cognition, social influence, social psychiatry, stereotyping, trust), and alternative frameworks within which the study of human social behaviour has been conceptualized (e.g. discursive psychology, experimental social psychology, psychoanalysis, social representations theory). The relationship between social psychology and other parts of psychology will also be addressed.
The paper is assessed by two three-hour papers, a written practical of an hour-and-a-half, and practical reports.
This paper covers biological and cognitive topics involving the connection of brain, body, and behaviour, and will do so from a social sciences perspective. Specific content includes neuroanatomy, neuroendocrinology, and neurophysiology, as well as learning, memory, judgement, decision making, intelligence, and cognition and emotion. Topics are presented in the context of the complete individual, and in interaction with the social environment. Lectures include relevant methodologies and methodological issues, and integrative examples will be provided on topics such as executive function, sex differences in the brain, social neuroscience, and autism. Practicals will serve to further illustrate the links between theoretical foundations and experimental methods. Students are expected to read in depth, as well as broadly, and to bring their independent perspective and insight to the material at hand.
The course for this paper considers children’s development from infancy to adolescence, with a focus on the interface between typical and atypical development. Topics considered include infancy, prematurity, early theory of mind and autism, early executive function and conduct disorder, the transition to school, adolescence and associated problems (e.g. self-harming), parenthood, and abuse.
A subject in psychology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in psychology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in psychology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
This paper provides an account of the main intellectual traditions and key contributions of contemporary social theory. The time period extends from c. 1920 to the present day, but the paper concentrates on recent (post-1960) literature and developments. A limited number of traditions and orientations are selected for detailed discussion; these traditions and orientations are situated in their social and intellectual contexts, and the writings of key thinkers are examined in some depth.
Theories of global scale, political and economic transformation: Marxist theories of capitalism and imperialism; world systems theory; development theory; modernity; globalization. The evolution of a global economy: Fordism and post-Fordism; multi- and trans-national corporations: the information and knowledge economy; convergence and diversity in capitalism; global finance. The development of the modern state: the interstate system and new forms of ‘geo-governance’; economic globalization and state power. Post-communist societies and the problem of ‘transition’. Global communication and information networks: communication and development; cultural identity and the information age. Globalization and social change: health, the family.
Conceptual and explanatory issues that arise in the study of modern societies. The paper is examined by two 5,000-word essays.
A subject in sociology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in sociology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in sociology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in sociology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in sociology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A subject in sociology specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
This paper introduces candidates to the concepts and methods of social research. It will give candidates the conceptual and methodological knowledge to evaluate different styles of social inquiry and provide the necessary skills to design and implement an empirical inquiry. Candidates will be introduced to the basic philosophical ideas that underpin social research and will be instructed in the appropriate use of basic descriptive and inferential statistical techniques. The paper will be examined by one 2,500-word methodological essay, one 3,500-word statistical assignment, and a project report of 5,000 words.
This course extends students’ understanding of the theory and practice of social inquiry and analysis. Students will be encouraged to tackle the challenges posed by combining quantitative and qualitative approaches. Students will also be introduced to the various approaches used in studies of social and individual change, including advanced multivariate techniques and longitudinal design and analysis.
An interdisciplinary subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
This course explores the emergence of modern notions of race and ethnicity, contemporary forms of racism, processes of racialization, and the social and political forces that have shaped them. Key questions will include: How are racial ideas conceptualized and justified through a variety of biological, social, and cultural discourses? How did race and ethnicity come to be defined and embedded in the context of colonial and post-colonial rule? What are the often complex relations between ideas of race, the production of difference and identity, and the pervasiveness of social exclusion? Why does race remain such a powerful determinant of individual and collective identities? What is the specificity of ethnicity in contemporary society? Why and how does race and ethnicity matter?
An interdisciplinary subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
A key aim of this paper is to allow students to gain a critical and informed understanding of patterns of crime, pathways into and out of crime, and critical issues regarding law, policy and practice in relation to criminal justice and sentencing. The first section will look at the social construction of criminal statistics and the influence of the media in shaping popular understandings of crime, individual, family and situational factors in relation to pathways into crime as well as resilience and desistance and offender rehabilitation in regard to pathways out of crime. The second section involves a focus on theories of punishment and the part that different forms of punishment can play in reducing crime. The third part turns to sentencing issues, the legal framework, and dilemmas in theory and practice, whilst the fourth part concentrates on specific groups of offenders: young offenders, sex offenders, dangerous offenders, and women, for example, and the particular challenges in dealing with those groups of offenders. The final element turns to community penalties, prisons, parole, and to the broad issues of fairness, discretion, gender, and race in late modern criminal justice. The paper will be examined by either (a) a three-hour paper consisting of 4 questions, or (b) two long essays of 5,000 words each.
Using a range of approaches drawn from sociology, political science, political economy, social anthropology, and cultural studies, the course for this paper covers the history of Latin America in the period since the Second World War. Particular attention is paid to structural change in the region's economy and its relationship with the international economy, to the resulting transition from a state-led inward-looking model of development to the more outward-looking neo-liberal model adopted at the end of the century, and to variations in the concomitant process of democratization. The consequences and corollaries of these changes are traced in the fields of culture and religion, in the changing patterns of popular mobilization, and in the proliferation of ‘informal’ economic activities.
An interdisciplinary subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
An interdisciplinary subject specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
1. The Psychological and Behavioural Sciences Tripos shall consist of three Parts: Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb.
2. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for any Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
3. No student shall be a candidate for any Part on more than one occasion.
4. No student shall offer any paper which he or she has previously offered in another University examination.
5. There shall be three separate bodies of Examiners, one for Part I, one for Part IIa, and one for Part IIb. For each of the three bodies there shall be a Chair of Examiners, provided that the same person may be appointed Chair for two or more bodies. For each body there might also be one or more Assistant Chairs of Examiners. Chairs and Assistant Chairs of Examiners shall be appointed on the nomination of the Committee of Management of the Psychological and Behavioural Sciences Tripos; nominations shall be made not later than the last day of Full Easter Term in the calendar year next preceding that in which the examination is to be held. For each of the three bodies, the Committee of Management shall, in consultation with Faculty Boards or comparable authorities, nominate such number of Examiners as they shall deem sufficient to conduct the examination. An Examiner may be appointed to examine in more than one Part of the Tripos in any year.
6. The Chairs of Examiners shall communicate the marks of all candidates to the Registrary.
7. The Committee of Management shall have power to nominate one or more Assessors to examine in any of the subjects of the Tripos. Assessors shall be required to set the paper or papers in the subjects assigned to them and to present such written reports to the Examiners as may be required. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
8. There shall be a separate class-list for each Part of the Tripos. In each list the names of the successful candidates shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes, and in each division of the second class, shall be arranged in alphabetical order. In each class-list a mark of distinction shall be affixed to the names of those candidates placed in the first class whose work is of special merit.
9. Before the end of the Easter Term the Committee of Management shall give notice of the Optional Papers for the examinations to be held in the next academical year provided that the Committee shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student’s preparation for the examination is adversely affected. The Committee shall have power when they give notice of Optional Papers to announce any consequential restriction on the combination of papers that a candidate may choose to offer.
10. The Committee of Management in consultation with a Faculty Board or comparable authority concerned shall have power to issue from time to time supplementary regulations or Notices defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of examination, and determining the scope, character, and conditions of the papers and the credit that shall be assigned to each, and to amend or withdraw such regulations and Notices; provided that due care is taken to give sufficient notice of any supplementary regulation or of any amendment of an existing supplementary regulation.
11. The scheme of examination for Part I shall be as follows.
PBS 1. |
Introduction to psychology (also serves as a paper in Part Ia of the Computer Science Tripos) |
PBS 2. |
Psychological enquiry and methods |
Optional Papers announced by the Faculty Board in accordance with Regulation 9.
12. A student may be a candidate for honours in Part I if he or she has kept one term, provided that three complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
13. A candidate for honours in Part I of the Tripos shall offer four written papers as follows:
14. There shall be separate examinations of three hours’ duration set for each paper specified in Section A. Papers in Section B will be examined in accordance with the regulations set down by the Faculty or comparable authority concerned.
15. A student who has obtained honours in Part I of the Tripos or in another Honours Examination, in the year next after so obtaining honours, provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after her or his first term of residence, may be a candidate for honours in Part IIa.177
16. The scheme of examination for Part IIa shall be as follows:
PBS 3. |
Social psychology (also serves as a paper in Part II of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos) |
PBS 4. |
Biological and cognitive psychology (also serves as a paper in Part II of the Human, Social, and Political Sciences Tripos) |
PBS 5. |
Experimental psychology (the subject Experimental Psychology in Part Ib of the Natural Sciences Tripos) |
PBS 6. |
Research project, as prescribed in Regulation 19 |
PBS 1. |
Introduction to psychology (Paper PBS 1 from Part I of the Tripos) |
PBS 2. |
Psychological enquiry and methods (Paper PBS 2 from Part I of the Tripos) |
Optional Papers from the list published in accordance with Regulation 9.
17. A candidate for Part IIa shall offer four papers as follows:
subject to Regulation 4, and provided that any candidate who has not previously completed Part I of the Tripos must, except with the permission of the Committee of Management, offer PBS 1 and PBS 2 if he or she has not previously offered either paper within another Tripos.
18. There shall be separate examinations of three hours’ duration set for Papers PBS 3 and PBS 4. Other papers will be examined in accordance with the regulations set down by the Faculty or comparable authority concerned.
19. Candidates offering PBS 6 shall submit a research project of not more than 5,000 words including footnotes and appendices but excluding any bibliography, in an area approved by the Committee of Management not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term, in printed or typewritten form to the Secretary of the Committee of Management not later than the end of the second week of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held.
20. A student who has obtained honours in Part IIa of the Tripos and has kept seven terms may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb provided that twelve complete terms have not passed after her or his first term of residence.177
21. The scheme of examination for Part IIb shall be as follows.
PBS 7. |
Research dissertation as prescribed in Regulation 24 |
PBS 8. |
Development and psychopathology |
PBS 9. |
Cognitive psychology (Paper 2 for the subject Psychology in Part II of the Natural Sciences Tripos) |
PBS 10. |
Behavioural and clinical neuroscience (Paper 3 for the subject Psychology in Part II of the Natural Sciences Tripos) |
PBS 11. |
Social and developmental psychology, and individual differences (Paper 4 for the subject Psychology in Part II of the Natural Sciences Tripos) |
PBS 12. |
A paper in psychology 1 |
PBS 13. |
A paper in psychology 2 |
PBS 14. |
A paper in psychology 3 |
Optional Papers from the list published in accordance with Regulation 9.
22. A candidate for honours in Part IIb shall be required to offer PBS 7, the research dissertation, and three further papers, provided that no candidate shall offer more than two papers out of PBS 9, PBS 10, and PBS 11.
23. There shall be separate examinations of three hours’ duration for each paper specified. Candidates may be called for viva voce examination.
24. Candidates for Part IIb shall submit a research dissertation in an area of Psychology.
(a) Each candidate must obtain the approval of the Committee of Management for the proposed topic not later than the division of the Michaelmas Term. The application shall be in accordance with any instructions issued by the Committee of Management and will include the topic of the proposed dissertation and a brief account of its scope. After the Committee of Management have approved a topic no substantial change may be made in it without the further approval of the Committee of Management.
(b) The research dissertation shall contain full references to any sources used in its composition, and shall be of not less than 6,000 words and not more than 10,000 words in length, including footnotes and appendices but excluding any bibliography.
(c) The research dissertation shall be submitted in electronic or printed form to the Secretary of the Committee of Management not later than the end of the second week of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held. Each dissertation shall bear the candidate’s examination number but not the candidate’s name and shall be accompanied by (i) a brief synopsis on a separate sheet of paper of the contents of the dissertation, and (ii) a certificate signed by the candidate that it is her or his own original work, and that it does not contain material that has already been used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose.
25. The examinations for the Psychological and Behavioural Sciences Tripos shall be held for the first time as follows:
Part I in 2014
Part IIa in 2015
Part IIb in 2016
1. The Theological and Religious Studies Tripos shall consist of three Parts, Part I, Part IIa, and Part IIb.
2. In any year in which candidates for honours in the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos and candidates for honours in some other Tripos desire to offer papers common to both Triposes, the timetables for the examinations shall be arranged accordingly.
3. Public notice of all the variable subjects selected for the examinations in any year shall be given by the Faculty Board of Divinity before the end of the Easter Term of the year next preceding the examination concerned; provided that the Board shall have the power of subsequently issuing amendments if they have due reason for doing so and if they are satisfied that no student's preparation for the examination is adversely affected.
4. The Faculty Board of Divinity shall have power to issue supplementary regulations defining or limiting all or any of the subjects of the examinations and to publish lists of books or of documents. Such lists of books or documents and other reading lists for papers shall be made available in the Faculty Library by the end of the Full Easter Term of the year next preceding the examination. The Faculty Board shall also have power to alter such supplementary regulations and such lists, due care being taken that sufficient notice is given of any change.
5. The following may present themselves as candidates for honours in Part I:
6. A student who has obtained honours in another Honours Examination may be a candidate for honours in Part IIa,179 in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept four terms and that twelve complete terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
7. A student who has obtained honours in any Honours Examination other than Part I of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos may be a candidate for honours in Part IIb,179 in the year after so obtaining honours, provided that he or she has kept seven terms and that fifteen terms have not passed after his or her first term of residence.
8. No student shall be a candidate for more than one Part, or for one Part and also for another Honours Examination, in the same term.
9. No student who has been a candidate for any Part shall again be a candidate for the same Part.
10. A candidate shall not offer in any Part of the Tripos a paper that he or she has previously offered in another University Examination.
11. The Faculty Board shall nominate such number of Examiners as they may deem sufficient for each Part of the Tripos.
12. The Faculty Board may also nominate such number of Assessors as they may deem necessary for either Part of the Tripos. Assessors shall be responsible for setting the paper or papers in the subjects assigned to them by the Examiners, for looking over the work of the candidates therein, and for presenting such reports to the Examiners as may be required by them. Assessors may be summoned to meetings of the Examiners for the purpose of consultation and advice, but shall not be entitled to vote.
13. The questions proposed by each Examiner and Assessor shall be submitted to the whole body of Examiners for approval.
14. The Examiners and Assessors shall have regard to the style and method of a candidate's answers, and shall give credit for excellence in these respects.
15. The Examiners shall take account of a candidate's performance in an additional paper, or in the weaker of two papers either of which may be deemed to have been taken as an additional paper, only in so far as it is to the candidate's advantage. They shall not exclude a candidate from any class on the ground that he or she has not offered an additional paper.
16. (a) A candidate who, in accordance with Regulation 26(b) or Regulation 27(b), wishes to offer a dissertation shall apply, giving the title of the proposed topic, to the Secretary of the Faculty Board not earlier than the beginning of the Easter Term and not later than the first Monday of the Full Michaelmas Term in the calendar year next preceding the examination. A dissertation may be on any topic relating to the subject of any paper in the Tripos, but the Board may, when giving approval for a particular topic, impose the condition that a candidate who offers a dissertation on that topic may not offer a particular paper or a particular prescribed subject in a paper. The Secretary shall inform the candidate as soon as possible, and in any case before the end of Full Michaelmas Term, whether the topic has been approved by the Faculty Board.
(b) No change shall be made in the topic of a candidate's dissertation after the end of Full Michaelmas Term, but the Faculty Board shall have power to approve minor changes of wording in the title which clarify or define more precisely the scope of a topic previously approved, provided that such changes are submitted to the Secretary of the Faculty Board by the division of the Lent Term.
(c) A dissertation, which shall be of not more than 10,000 words (inclusive of notes and footnotes used to convey information, comment, or analysis, but exclusive of bibliography and footnotes which act simply as references), shall be sent to the Secretary of the Faculty Board so as to arrive not later than the third Monday of the Full Easter Term in which the examination is to be held, together with a written declaration that it is the candidate's own original work and that it does not contain material already used to any substantial extent for a comparable purpose. A dissertation should show evidence of reading, judgement, and criticism, and of a power of exposition, but not necessarily of original research, and should give full references to sources used. It must be written in English unless the candidate has received permission from the Board to use some other specified language; a request for such permission must be made when the original application is submitted.
(d) The dissertation shall be submitted under detailed arrangements approved by the Faculty Board. The Examiners shall have power to examine a candidate viva voce on his or her dissertation and on the general field of knowledge in which it falls.
17. There shall be separate class-lists for each Part. In each list the names of the candidates who obtain honours shall be arranged in three classes, of which the second shall be divided into two divisions. The names in the first and third classes and in each division of the second class shall be arranged in alphabetical order. The Examiners may affix a special mark to the names of those candidates whose work is in their opinion of special distinction.
18. The papers for the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos, which shall be divided into Groups A–D, shall be as follows:
Paper A1. |
Scriptural languages and texts: |
A. Hebrew I (Elementary Hebrew) B. New Testament Greek C. Sanskrit D. Qur’anic Arabic |
|
Paper A2. |
David: Israel's greatest hero? |
Paper A3. |
Jesus and the origins of the Gospel |
Paper A4. |
Christianity and the transformation of culture |
Paper A5. |
Who is Jesus Christ? |
Paper A6. |
Understanding contemporary religion |
Paper A7. |
World religions in comparative perspective |
Paper A8. |
Philosophy of religion and ethics |
Paper B1. |
Intermediate languages and texts: |
A. Hebrew B. New Testament Greek C. Sanskrit D. Qur’anic Arabic |
|
Paper B2. |
The literature, history, and theology of the exilic age |
Paper B3. |
Judaism in the Greek and Roman periods |
Paper B4. |
The letters of Paul |
Paper B5. |
The Johannine tradition |
Paper B6. |
Christianity in Late Antiquity (to circa 600) |
Paper B7. |
Themes in world Christianities: context, theology, and power |
Paper B8. |
Study of theology I |
Paper B9. |
God and the imago Dei180 |
Paper B10. |
Philosophy of religion: God, freedom, and the soul |
Paper B11. |
Ethics and faith |
Paper B12. |
Theology and the natural sciences I |
Paper B13 |
Religious themes in literature |
Paper B14. |
Life, thought, and worship of modern Judaism (also serves as Paper X.4 of Part Ib of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos) |
Paper B15. |
Introduction to Islam (also serves as Paper X.5 of Part Ib of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos) |
Paper B16. |
Life and thought of religious Hinduism and of Buddhism |
Paper B17. |
Logic (Paper 3 of Part Ia of the Philosophy Tripos) |
Paper C1. |
Advanced language and texts: |
A. Hebrew B. Greek C. Sanskrit D. Arabic |
|
Paper C2. |
Creation and covenant |
Paper C3. |
New Testament Christology |
Paper C4. |
Topic in the history of Christianity181 |
Paper C5. |
Study of theology II |
Paper C6. |
Disputed questions in the Christian tradition |
Paper C7. |
Topics in the study of religion |
Paper C8. |
Judaism II (also serves as Paper X.9 of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos) |
Paper C9. |
Islam II (also serves as Paper X.10 of the Asian and Middle Eastern Studies Tripos) |
Paper C10. |
Hinduism and Buddhism II |
Paper C11. |
Metaphysics182 |
Paper C12. |
Theology and the natural sciences II |
Paper D1. |
Special subjects, specified by the Faculty Board |
Paper D2. |
Interdisciplinary subjects, specified by the Faculty Board |
19. Each paper shall be of three hours’ duration, provided that the Faculty Board shall have power to specify by supplementary regulation a paper or papers from any group which shall be examined by an alternative mode of assessment, in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 20.
20. The alternative mode of assessment for any paper specified by the Faculty Board under Regulation 19 shall consist of either (a) the submission of two essays or (b) the submission of a portfolio of six essays on topics chosen by the candidate from a list of topics published by the Faculty Board not later than the first Friday of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination. Where two essays are submitted under (a), the length of each essay shall be, for a candidate in Part I, not more than 3,000 words in length and, for candidates in Parts IIa and IIb, not more than 5,000 words in length. Where a portfolio of six essays is submitted under (b), the length of each essay shall be not fewer than 1,500 words and not more than 2,000 words in length. In all cases, word limits shall include notes and footnotes used to convey information, comment, or analysis, but exclude bibliography and footnotes which act simply as references. Candidates shall be required to declare that the essays are their own work. The essays shall be typewritten, in English, and shall be submitted through the candidate’s Director of Studies to the Secretary of the Faculty Board in accordance with detailed arrangements approved by the Board, so that the first essay submitted under (a) or the portfolio of essays submitted under (b) arrive not later than 1 p.m. on the first Monday of Full Easter Term and the second essay under (a) not later than 1 p.m. on the third Monday of Full Easter Term.
21. (a) Every candidate who offers a paper in which there is a choice of subject shall take only one of these question papers (except as provided for in Regulations 23(i), 24(i), 24(ii), 26(i), and 27(ii)); the candidate's examination entry shall state which subject he or she intends to offer.
(b) For Papers D1 and D2 the Faculty Board shall from time to time prescribe subjects as follows:
For Paper D1, not more than seven subjects.
For Paper D2, not more than seven subjects.
A separate question paper shall be set for each subject so prescribed for which there is a candidate.
(c) The Board may also prescribe that a candidate who offers a particular subject in one of Papers D1 and D2 may not also offer another particular paper.
22. A candidate for Part I shall offer:
23. A student who is a candidate for Part IIa in the year next after obtaining honours in Part I of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos shall offer four papers chosen from Group B, provided that
24. A student who is a candidate for Part IIa in the year next after obtaining honours in an Honours Examination other than Part I of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos or who is an Affiliated Student183 shall offer four papers, including:
provided that
25. A student who is a candidate for Part IIa in the year next after obtaining honours in an Honours Examination other than Part I of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos and who has kept seven terms shall offer four papers chosen from Group B, provided that
26. A student who is a candidate for Part IIb in the year next after obtaining honours in Part IIa under Regulations 23 or 24 shall offer:
provided that
27. A student who is a candidate for Part IIb in the year next after obtaining honours in an Honours Examination other than Part I or Part IIa of the Theological and Religious Studies Tripos or who is an Affiliated Student183 shall offer:
provided that
28. The Faculty Board shall have power to exempt from the requirement to offer a language from Paper A1 any candidate for Part IIa under Regulation 24 who produces evidence that he or she has done work of a satisfactory standard in Greek or in Hebrew or in Sanskrit or in Arabic, whether in Cambridge or elsewhere. Such a candidate shall not offer in Part IIa Paper A1 in the language in which he or she has gained exemption. Any application for exemption shall be sent through the candidate's Director of Studies to the Secretary of the Faculty Board so as to arrive not later than the first Monday of the Full Michaelmas Term next preceding the examination, and shall include details of the applicant's qualifications. The Secretary shall inform the candidate's Director of Studies as soon as possible, and in any case by the division of the Michaelmas Term, whether the application has been approved.
This paper will comprise four sections, Section A, Hebrew I (Elementary Hebrew), Section B, New Testament Greek, Section C, Sanskrit, and Section D, Qur’anic Arabic; candidates will be required to confine their answers to a single section. Section A will contain (i) questions on Hebrew grammar, and (ii) passages for translation, linguistic comment, pointing, and retranslation from a portion or portions of the Old Testament prescribed by the Faculty Board. Section B will contain passages for translation, and for exegetical and grammatical comment, from one or more portions of the New Testament which the Board shall from time to time prescribe. Copies of a Greek lexicon will be available in the examination for those who wish to make use of them. Section C will contain (i) questions on Sanskrit grammar, and (ii) passages for translation, linguistic and exegetical comment, from a portion or portions of the Hindu and Buddhist scriptures prescribed by the Board. Section D will contain (i) questions on Arabic grammar, and (ii) passages for translation, linguistic and exegetical comment from a portion or portions of the Qur’an, the Hadith, and early Islamic theological literature prescribed by the Board.
This paper will provide an introduction to the critical study of the Old Testament literature, history, and religion, focussing on the figure of David. Texts for special study will be prescribed by the Faculty Board.
This paper will, until further notice, be entitled ‘Jesus and the origins of the Gospel’. It will be concerned with central issues (arising from the primary sources and critical scholarship) in the study of the Gospels and the Historical Jesus. The Board may also prescribe a particular text or texts for special study.
This paper will introduce students to the history of Christianity by considering key periods and issues in the interaction of Christianity with the culture in which it is set. The topic of the paper will be announced annually by the Faculty Board.
This paper will introduce some of the major themes and disciplines of Christian theology through a focus on Jesus Christ. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper will offer a broad introduction to the sociological study of religion with a particular focus on understanding developments in Britain since 1945 including secularization, charismatic religion, the New Age, new religious movements, and multiculturalism.
This paper will approach at least two religions through the study of a topic or topics specified annually by the Faculty Board, in the context of the history, beliefs, and practices of the main religions of the world. This paper shall be examined by the submission of two essays in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 20.
This paper will introduce students to the philosophy of religion and to ethics. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper will contain (i) passages for translation, linguistic, and exegetical comment, and retranslation from portions of text which the Faculty Board will from time to time prescribe, and (ii) essay questions on literary and theological aspects of the prescribed texts. Candidates may not offer in this paper any prescribed text which they have previously offered in Paper A1.
This paper will contain passages for translation, textual, exegetical, and theological comment from such portions of text as the Faculty Board will from time to time prescribe.
This paper will contain passages for translation from a number of texts which the Faculty Board shall from time to time prescribe, together with questions on the language and content of those texts.
This paper will contain passages for pointing, for translation, and for linguistic and exegetical comment from portions of the Qur’an, Qur’anic commentaries, and other Islamic literature which the Faculty Board shall from time to time prescribe. The paper will also contain a passage for translation from English into Arabic.
This paper will be concerned with Old Testament history from the reign of Hezekiah to the conquest of Babylon by Cyrus and with theological and literary responses to the Babylonian invasions and their consequences in the literature of the time, with particular reference to relevant sections of Genesis-Numbers; Deuteronomy; Joshua-2 Kings; Job; exilic elements in the Psalter; Isaiah 40–55; Jeremiah; Lamentations; Ezekiel. The Faculty Board will prescribe a portion of the Old Testament for special study.
This paper will be concerned with an essential period for our understanding of the formation of Judaism (and of nascent Christianity). It will examine the social, historical, and political contexts in which ancient Jews shaped their identity from the rise, after Persian rule, of Alexander the Great (332 bce) up to and including the series of Roman revolts that culminated in the one named after Bar-Kokhba (132–5 ce).
This paper will study the Pauline ‘corpus’, including Ephesians and the Pastoral epistles. There will be questions on historical, literary, and critical problems, but the emphasis will be on the theological thought and practice of the apostle Paul. The Faculty Board may also prescribe a particular text or texts for special study.
This paper will be concerned with central issues (arising from the primary sources and critical scholarship) in the study of the Fourth Gospel and Johannine Epistles. Although students will be expected to read the full text of the Gospels and Epistles, specific texts for more detailed study will be announced by the Faculty Board.
This paper is concerned with the main historical and theological developments in Christianity in Antiquity set within the social, historical, political, and cultural contexts of the Roman Empire and its immediate successors.
This paper will be concerned with both the common themes and the diversity of contemporary Christianity in its global setting. Particular emphasis will be given to the contextual character of Christian theological reflection outside Europe and the USA since 1914 in relation both to indigenous cultures and to structures of global political and economic power.
This paper is concerned with the Christian understanding of God and humanity. The course aims to study this through classic texts from different periods, understood in the context of their time and in relation to current theological discussions. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe topics and texts for special study.
This paper is concerned with three central loci of Christian systematic theology: the doctrine of the Trinity, the doctrine of God and the imago Dei, as well as the way in which these doctrines intersect.
This paper will explore some classical themes in the philosophy of religion. These will include attributes of God, issues of the relationships between God and the world, and issues of God and ‘the soul’.
The paper will study questions concerning the nature and form of moral judgment, as treated in the history of Western philosophy.
This paper will cover (a) topics in contemporary natural science that bear upon theology, and theological responses to these proposals and (b) historical, philosophical, and methodological perspectives on the dialogue between theology and science.
This paper will consider religious themes in literature connected to a set topic, to be announced by the Faculty Board at the end of the Easter Term preceding the year in which the paper is taught. This paper shall be examined by a portfolio of six essays in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 20.
This paper will be concerned with the life, thought, and worship of modern Judaism. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper will cover the origins, development, and contemporary situation of the theology, law, and mysticism of Islam. It will deal with literary-critical and interpretative problems relating to the founding documents of the religion, and with contemporary methodologies in philosophy of religion, gender studies, and comparative jurisprudence as applied to Islam. References to Christianity may be included. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
The paper will consider the origins and development up to contemporary times of the beliefs and practices of the Hindu and Buddhist traditions. It will deal with problems of interpretation relating to the formation and understanding of founding texts, and with relevant issues in such areas as gender studies and the functioning of élite and colonial influences. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper will be concerned with the exegesis of prescribed text or texts in Hebrew. It will involve translation from and linguistic, text-critical, and exegetical comment on texts which the Faculty Board will from time to time prescribe, including some parts of the prophetic and poetic books of the Old Testament; passages for unseen translation from Hebrew into English; a passage for translation from English into Hebrew; and essay questions on literary and theological aspects of the prescribed texts.
This paper will contain (i) passages for translation, and for textual, grammatical, exegetical, and theological comment from such portions of text as the Faculty Board will from time to time prescribe, and (ii) passages for unseen translation from texts of similar provenance.
This paper will contain passages for translation and comment from a number of texts which the Faculty Board shall from time to time prescribe, together with questions on the language and content of those texts.
This paper will be concerned with the translation of, and linguistic and exegetical comment on portions of the Qur’an, Qur’anic commentaries, and other Islamic literature which the Faculty Board shall from time to time prescribe.
This paper will examine from the perspective of biblical theology, as well as a historical perspective, the twin themes of creation and covenant in the Hebrew Bible. Through close textual analysis the relationship between these themes will be studied, and their role in contemporary biblical theologies, both Jewish and Christian, will be explored.
This paper will be concerned with central issues, arising from the primary sources and critical scholarship, in the study of Christology within the New Testament.
This paper will be concerned with a topic in the history of Christianity, as specified by the Faculty Board from time to time. This paper shall be examined by the submission of two essays in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 20.
This paper will be concerned with an advanced topic in the study of theology. The topic will be prescribed by the Faculty Board.
The paper will examine theological problems arising within ‘classical’ Christian theology, in the context of major theological loci. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe topics and texts for special study.
This paper will be concerned with an aspect of the study of religion, as specified by the Faculty Board from time to time.
This paper will consider the life, thought, and worship of medieval and modern Judaism. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe subjects and texts for special study.
This paper will deal with two advanced topics in Islamic studies specified from time to time by the Faculty Board. The Board may also from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper will be concerned with two advanced topics in the Hindu and Buddhist traditions prescribed from time to time by the Faculty Board. The Board may also from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper studies the major problems of (religious) metaphysics that have been handed down to contemporary philosophy of religion from the Enlightenment period. Taking Kant’s Critique of Pure Reason as its starting point, it first provides a close, critical examination of Kant’s own reworking of the notions of ‘God’ and ‘soul’, and of his rejection of the classical arguments for God’s existence. It then provides a systematic account of the major responses to, or evasions of, Kant’s challenge in the 20th and 21st centuries amongst those philosophers of religion who have sought either to repristinate theological metaphysics, or to give philosophical credence to God-talk by means of other, ‘post-metaphysical’, strategies of defence. Once this map of current philosophical alternatives is outlined, the lectures turn to re-examine four classic problems of theological metaphysics in the light of them: ‘natural theology’ and its current possibilities; the problem of evil; the soul and immortality; and God and time.
This paper will cover a focused range of topics in the relation of contemporary natural sciences with theology.
Papers in this group except D1(a), (b), and (f) shall be examined by the submission of two essays in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 20.
This paper will examine some of the central critical and theological issues in the Pentateuch. The Faculty Board will prescribe a text for special study.
This paper will explore in detail a topic of particular interest to students of Christianity in the first two centuries. The topic will be prescribed by the Faculty Board.
This paper will study in detail a topic in the history of Christianity. The topic will be prescribed by the Faculty Board.
This paper will study the doctrine of God through classic texts from several periods. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe topics and texts for special study.
This paper proposes a new historical framework for the study of the history and interaction of rabbinic Judaism, patristic Christianity, and early Islam.
This topic will be studied from a comparative point of view. The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
Papers in this group except D2(c) shall be examined by the submission of two essays in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 20.
This paper is concerned with the Christian doctrine of human nature. It is studied in relation to a dossier of primary texts from the patristic to the Renaissance period, arranged round four topics.
This paper will be concerned with the theological interpretation of a basic Christian text, the Gospel of John. It will explore the practice of theological interpretation of scripture with reference to this Gospel, drawing on modern and premodern theologians and commentators.
The Faculty Board may from time to time prescribe texts for special study.
This paper will be concerned with the interaction between Jewish and Hellenistic traditions from the time of Alexander the Great until the early rabbis. It will examine the conceptual problems of ‘Hebraism and Hellenism’ through an examination of the literature, history, and religious life of Jews in the period.
This paper will be concerned with the transregional history of Pentecostalism, from 1900 to the present day.
This paper is concerned with topics in applied Christian ethics, as specified from time to time by the Faculty Board.
This paper is concerned with the role of imagination in religious belief and explores the philosophical and theological problems involved in representing the divine presence through images, symbols, or imaginary narratives.